Configuration Management -- The Configuration Management Database (CMDB) application is a centralized source that gives you full visibility into your IT environment. By storing information about your organization's infrastructure and how it is configured, this system allows you to monitor your network and ensure stability and best performance. Other ServiceNow applications enhance the effectiveness of the CMDB application or closely overlap to enable needed business goals.
Configuration Management Database (CMDB) -- Use the ServiceNow Configuration Management Database (CMDB) application to build logical representations of assets, services, and the relationships between them that comprise the infrastructure of your organization. Details about these components are stored in the CMDB as configuration items (CIs) which you can use to monitor the infrastructure, helping ensure integrity, stability, and continuous service operation.
Explore -- Use the topics in this section to learn and explore CMDB concepts, its predefined tables and the relationships between them.
Overview -- The Configuration Management Database (CMDB) creates and maintains the logical configurations your network infrastructure needs to support a ServiceNow service.
CMDB tables descriptions -- List of tables in the CMDB in a base system with its name, label, and a description of the type of information that is stored in the table.
CMDB schema model -- The CMDB schema model is a series of connected tables that contain all the assets and business services controlled by a company and its configurations.
Configuration Item [cmdb_ci] class -- Attributes in the Configuration Item [cmdb_ci] class, which extends the Base Configuration Item [cmdb] class.
Hardware [cmdb_ci_hardware] class -- Attributes, identification rule, and other important schema structures for the CMDB Hardware [cmdb_ci_hardware] class.
Computer [cmdb_ci_computer] class -- Attributes, identification rule, and other important schema structures for the CMDB Computer [cmdb_ci_computer] class.
Server [cmdb_ci_server] class -- Attributes, identification rule, and other important schema structures for the CMDB Server [cmdb_ci_server] class.
Cloud class -- Description, identification rule, and other important schema structures for the CMDB cloud classes.
CMDB classifications and class dependency -- CMDB classifications are groups of CIs that share attributes and are stored in their own class table. Classifications let administrators to define a class hierarchy for the CIs within the CMDB.
Dependent CIs management -- A life cycle update for a CI affects its dependent CIs. For example, when the CI that a dependent CI depends on is deleted, the dependent CI becomes orphan with no further use. To maintain the integrity and health of the CMDB, the system applies cascade-cleanup processes to dependent CIs that are affected by a life cycle update.
CMDB record types -- The CMDB contains the following major record types.
Related Lists of CI components -- Related lists in CI records display additional components contained by that CI, such as disk drives on a server and the rules that control the behavior of a network router.
Teams related list -- The Teams related list associates a user group to a CI based on group type, providing flexibility in tracking the different types of groups assigned to a CI. The Teams related list appears on CI forms for CIs of the Service [cmdb_ci_service] class and its descendent classes such as the Service Instance [cmdb_ci_service_auto] class.
Add a custom group type to the Teams related list -- The Teams related list associates a user group to a CI based on group type, providing flexibility in tracking the different types of groups assigned to a CI. The Teams related list appears on CI forms for CIs of the Service [cmdb_ci_service] class and its descendent classes such as the Service Instance [cmdb_ci_service_auto] class.
Create a CI class -- Create a CI class (table) that is an extension of an existing CI class. Then create identification and reconciliation rules for the new class.
Reclassify a CI -- You can upgrade, downgrade, or switch the class of a CI by modifying its Class attribute.
Delete CIs -- You can use the CI Class Manager to delete CIs that are no longer needed.
View and edit class definitions and metadata -- Use the CI Class Manager as a central location to explore the CMDB class hierarchy, CI table definitions, and class CIs. View the details of each table such as its label and fields, relationships, and all related metadata definitions.
Principal Class -- A Principal Class is a designation for those CMDB classes that are most critical for foundational data health and governance in the organization. Those classes are then prioritized for tracking, health, certification, lifecycle management, and class list views.
Update Principal Class filter -- Manage the list of classes in the Principal Class filter so that those classes are prioritized for tracking, health, certification, lifecycle management, and class list views.
CI relationships in the CMDB -- The CMDB, in contrast to a static asset list, helps you track not only the configuration items (CIs) within your system, but also the relationships between those items.
Suggested class relationships -- The system keeps a table (Suggested Relationship [cmdb_rel_type_suggest]) of relationship types that are appropriate for a CI type, based on its class. You can manage suggested relationships by navigating to Configuration Suggested Relationships , or in the CI Class Manager.
Add a suggested relationship -- Add a suggested relationship for a class. The list of suggested relationships for a class is available when you create a new relationship for a CI of that class.
Relationship governance rules -- Relationship governance rules is a set of relationship rules used to ensure consistency and validity in modeling relationships between configuration items (CIs) in the CMDB. Use relationship governance rules to prevent the selection of relationship types or directions that are not allowed between specific CI types.
CI relations formatter -- The default CI form includes a CI relations formatter from which you can examine a CI and its relationships in various views. From the CI relations formatter, you can also launch the CI relationship editor for the CI.
Domain separation -- Domain separation is supported in the relations formatter and the CI relationship editor. Domain separation enables you to separate data, processes, and administrative tasks into logical groupings called domains. You can control several aspects of this separation, including which users can see and access data.
Create or edit a relationship filter -- Create a custom relationship filter to display CI relationships from selected tables in the CI relations formatter.
Legacy CI relations formatter -- On instances that do not meet the internet browser requirements for the latest CI relations formatter, the default CI form includes the legacy CI relations formatter instead.
CI relationship editor -- Use the relationship editor to view, create, modify, or delete CI relationships. Open the relationship editor from the CI Relations formatter.
Create or edit a CI relationship -- Use the relationship editor to view, create, or modify CI relationships. You can open the relationship editor from the CI Relations formatter.
Delete a CI relationship -- Maintain the integrity of the CMDB by deleting any CI relationships that are no longer relevant or needed for a CI. Use the relationship editor to delete CI relationships.
Legacy CI relationship builder -- Used to define CI relationships manually, this page is a sophisticated version of the standard list collector. In the legacy CI relations formatter, click the CI relationship builder icon ( CI relationship builder icon ) to display the legacy Define Relationships page.
Relation qualifier -- A relation qualifier, which is a CI of the Qualifier [cmdb_ci_qualifier] type, stores important information about the CI relationships.
CI relationship security -- When applying security to CI relationships, it is important to apply the access controls both to the CI Relationship (cmdb_rel_ci) table and to create an operation editCIRelations to the * table as well.
Create a CI relation rollup -- A CI relation rollup allows you to sum, count, max, min, or mean a relationship type. You can create CI relation rollups.
CMDB CI class models -- The CMDB contains base-system classes that store data about configuration items (CIs). The CMDB CI Class Models ServiceNow Store app adds class models that extend the CMDB class hierarchy, including class descriptions, identification rules, identifier entries, and dependent relationships if applicable.
API extension classes -- The CMDB CI Class Models ServiceNow Store app adds or updates classes for APIs (application programming interface).
Unmatched API -- The CMDB CI Class Models app adds or updates classes for unmatched APIs. API endpoints that are not structured well enough to populate the API [cmdb_ci_api] and API Component [cmdb_ci_api_component] classes instead populate the Unmatched API Endpoint [cmdb_ci_unmatched_api_endpoint] class. Unmatched APIs are typically used by integrations like security scanners or observability tools.
Avi load balancer -- The CMDB CI Class Models app adds or updates classes for the Avi load balancer.
BYOL model of RDS -- The CMDB CI Class Models app adds or updates classes for the BYOL Model of RDS for Oracle.
Cassandra -- The CMDB CI Class Models app adds or updates classes for Cassandra databases.
DNS resource classes -- The CMDB CI Class Models ServiceNow Store app adds or updates classes for DNS records, also known as a DNS resource records (RR).
Class extensions for integrations -- Extend and update CMDB CI Class Models app classes and rules when using third-party integration tools.
Firewall extension classes -- The CMDB CI Class Models app adds or updates classes for firewall devices.
IBM HMC classes -- The CMDB CI Class Models app adds or updates classes for the IBM Hardware Management Console (HMC).
IoT extension classes -- The CMDB CI Class Models app adds or updates classes for the Internet of Things (IoT).
Kong extension classes -- The CMDB CI Class Models app adds or updates classes for Kong gateways.
Kubernetes extension classes -- The Discovery and Service Mapping app adds or updates classes for the Kubernetes pattern.
NIDS CI class -- The Network Intrusion Detection System (NIDS) [cmdb_ci_nids] class builds the relationships between passive network monitoring appliances, and the devices on the network that it discovers. A NIDS Manager manages the NIDS sensors that detect the devices and builds "detects::detected by” relationships between the NIDS records (parent) and the CIs it discovers (child).
Network Inventory classes -- The CMDB CI Class Models app adds or updates classes for the Telecommunications Network Inventory application. Telecommunications Network Inventory uses the Network Inventory (NI) extension classes to extend the Configuration Management Database (CMDB) Configuration item (CI) class hierarchy.
Nutanix classes -- The CMDB CI Class Models app adds or updates classes for Nutanix.
OpenStack classes -- The CMDB CI Class Models app adds or updates classes for OpenStack.
OT extension classes -- The CMDB CI Class Models app adds or updates classes for Operational Technology (OT).
RHV VDSM classes -- The CMDB CI Class Models app adds or updates classes for Red Hat Virtualization (RHV) OLVM or RHV.
TLS extension classes -- The CMDB CI Class Models app adds or updates a class for TLS certificates.
VMware NSX load balancer -- The CMDB CI Class Models app adds or updates classes for VMware NSX load balancers.
Baseline CMDB -- Baseline CMDB provides capabilities that help you understand and control the changes that have been made to your configuration items (CIs) in the CMDB.
Create a CMDB baseline -- Baseline CMDB provides capabilities that help you understand and control the changes that have been made to your configuration items (CIs) in the CMDB.
Display baseline differences -- Baseline CMDB provides capabilities that help you understand and control the changes that have been made to your configuration items (CIs) in the CMDB.
Properties for baseline CMDB -- Baseline CMDB provides capabilities that help you understand and control the changes that have been made to your configuration items (CIs) in the CMDB.
Service Graph Workspace -- The Service Graph Workspace is an efficient, central, and modernized way for you to work. Use Service Graph Workspace to search and explore the CMDB, examine health and recent activities, and access insightful dashboards and tools to support tasks in your organization.
Explore -- Learn more about Service Graph Workspace, its different views and insight dashboards, when using key CMDB features such as CMDB Health, CMDB Data Manager, and CMDB 360.
Data Owner Home view -- Data Owner Home view in Service Graph Workspace provides a filtered view for data owner users who own, manage, or support CIs. It provides those users with a simple method to browse their CIs, view health, related activity associated with their CIs, understand what their CIs support, and access to actions they're authorized to use for their CIs.
Ingestion view -- The Overview page in the Ingestion view in Service Graph Workspace provides a centralized dashboard view for administrators to monitor the installation, performance, and error handling of Service Graph Connectors.
Governance view -- Governance view in Service Graph Workspace provides administrators with important information, actions, and links to tools that are used to manage, monitor, and administer data ingestion and other CMDB functions.
Explore and Search view -- Search through CMDB tables without having detailed knowledge of the CMDB data model by using contexts that are mapped to CI classes as navigation. Use natural language with the AI-driven search to search the CMDB and related data.
Insights view -- View insightful dashboards that show aggregated counts, state, and health for key features such as CMDB Health, Service Instances, and CMDB 360.
CMDB Health -- Use the CMDB Health Dashboard in the Insights view in Service Graph Workspace as a central location to view detailed health reports and aggregations for your CMDB at a glance. You can also use the provided functions to remediate issues that CMDB Health detected, to improve CMDB health.
CMDB Data Foundation -- Access the CMDB Data Foundation insights dashboard in Service Graph Workspace to monitor foundational key health-related metrics in CMDB.
CSDM Data Foundation -- Access the CSDM Data Foundation insights dashboard in Service Graph Workspace to see key CSDM indicators which can help you get the full benefit from your ServiceNow AI Platform products.
CMDB success advisor -- Access the CMDB success advisor insights dashboard in Service Graph Workspace to monitor and improve CMDB data quality for your principal classes and hardware assets.
Feature adoption -- Use the Feature adoption insights page in Service Graph Workspace to see and increase the level of adoption of key CMDB features and service instances to improve the overall health of the CMDB. Explore how tools and features can maximize the health and efficiency of your CMDB and use direct links to install and start using features immediately.
Performance insights -- Use the Performance insights page in Service Graph Workspace to analyze performance of key CMDB components such as Identification and Reconciliation Engine (IRE), and duplicate CIs. You can review and follow recommendations to improve performance.
Cloud vs Non-cloud -- Charts showing counts and details for resources that are hosted on various cloud services versus those resources that aren't, with breakdown by key CI classes such as applications, databases, and datacenters.
Service instances -- Use the Service instances page in Service Graph Workspace to see counts, trends, and health of Service instances (application services) in your organization.
CMDB 360 -- The CMDB 360 insights dashboard provides aggregations and analysis of CMDB 360 data, where you can track activities and identify potential issues of discovery sources.
Tasks view -- The Task view in Service Graph Workspace provides task owners access for tracking and managing their tasks such as CMDB Health related tasks, certification, attestation, and lifecycle tasks generated by the CMDB Data Manager.
Lists view -- The Lists view in Service Graph Workspace provides access to CIs within the CMDB hierarchy and to records in tables that aren't descendants of the Configuration Item [cmdb_ci] table, but are important in the CMDB ecosystem.
Configuration identifiers framework -- Configuration identifiers provide a framework that lets you customize some behaviors of a Service Graph Workspace feature, enabling different settings for that feature, on different workspaces. Most importantly, you can use this customization framework when integrating a Service Graph Workspace feature into another workspace.
Configure -- Plan and configure your implementation of Service Graph Workspace.
Modify important actions -- Modify the appearance order and other properties of the important action cards that appear on the Governance view of Service Graph Workspace.
Configure datacenters for Cloud vs Non-cloud resources -- The Cloud vs Non-cloud resources chart in the insights view in Service Graph Workspace determines which CIs and service instances (application services) are stored on a cloud and which aren't in the organization. In addition to base system classifications, you can add cloud vs. non-cloud classifications that reflect specific datacenter deployments in the organization.
Request attributes for new CIs -- Integrate a request for specific CI attributes when manually creating a new CI in your workspace. Then, when creating a new CI in the respective workspace, users can enter values for the requested attributes, as appropriate for the new CI.
Limit class list selection for new CIs -- Limit the selection of classes for a new CI being manually created in your workspace, to only those classes that are relevant to that workspace. When then creating a new CI in the respective workspace, users can only select a class that is authorized as an option.
Create a custom list -- Create your own lists of classes that you can then navigate in the Lists view in Service Graph Workspace to explore data.
Customize exploration contexts -- Customize the default navigation contexts that are used for exploring CMDB data in the Explore and Search view in Service Graph Workspace, by adding contexts that are relevant in your organization.
Create a CI manually -- Create a CI in Service Graph Workspace, while applying Identification and Reconciliation Engine (IRE) processes and other requirements for the CI's class. IRE identification rules enforce the new CI to be unique and to comply with other class requirements.
Manage CI details using CI Form -- Use CI Form in Service Graph Workspace or in another workspace, to view, edit, and manage details of a CI such as its attributes, related lists, and CMDB 360 records. When updating CIs, IRE rules are applied to avoid potential issues such as duplicate CIs. CI Form supports derivation of form configurations throughout the CMDB hierarchy.
Edit a related table from CMDB performance insights -- Edit a related table on the Related Entries [cmdb_related_entry] table directly from the CMDB performance insights tool in the Service Graph Workspace Insights view. Update the related table to correctly reference another CI in the Referenced field when a reference is missing from the related table.
Edit a data source from CMDB performance insights -- Edit a data source for your Service Graph Connectors to specify the data that an import set should ingest. Consider configuring a batch process to make ingestion more efficient and improve performance.
Edit a scheduled data import from CMDB performance insights -- Edit a scheduled data import directly from CMDB performance insights for your Service Graph Connectors. Consider enabling Concurrent Import with a custom size partition to split incoming data into multiple import sets and transform the import sets concurrently to reduce processing time.
Reference -- Reference topics provide additional information about components such as properties, installed with Service Graph Workspace and class-specific criteria for the Cloud vs Non-cloud resources chart.
Criteria in Cloud vs Non-cloud resources -- The Cloud vs Non-cloud resources chart provides counts for several key classes. The chart uses different classes and relationship criteria for each class to determine which resources count as cloud and which count as non-cloud.
Components -- Several types of components are installed with the activation of the CMDB Workspace (sn_cmdb_ws) plugin, which includes Service Graph Workspace. This includes properties, tables, user roles, and scheduled jobs.
CMDB Workspace -- The CMDB Workspace is an efficient, central, and modernized way for you to work. Use CMDB Workspace to search and explore the CMDB, examine health and recent activities, and access CMDB dashboards and tools to support tasks in your organization.
Explore -- Learn more about CMDB Workspace, its different views, and its benefits when using key CMDB features such as CMDB Health, CMDB Data Manager, and CMDB 360.
Home view in CMDB Workspace -- Home view is the default view in CMDB Workspace. It shows important tasks that you should tend to, various counts for activities in CMDB such as new CIs, CMDB Health aggregations, and various charts. The Home view also provides several links with immediate access to key CMDB tools.
My Work view in CMDB Workspace -- Use the My Work view in CMDB Workspace to manage your tasks. Tasks in this view are related to data compliance such as attestation, certification, and other life-cycle tasks.
CMDB 360 view in CMDB Workspace -- The CMDB 360 dashboard provides aggregations and analysis of CMDB 360 data. CMDB 360 collects data about all the discovery sources reporting attribute values for CIs. Use the CMDB 360 view in CMDB Workspace to track activities and identify potential issues of discovery sources. You can also create your own queries and associated schedules and reports to explore CMDB 360 data.
Insights view in CMDB Workspace -- Use the Insights view in CMDB Workspace to see and increase the level of adoption of key CMDB features and application services to improve the overall health of the CMDB. Explore how tools and features can maximize the health and efficiency of your CMDB and use direct links to install and start using features immediately.
Management view in CMDB Workspace -- The Management view provides CMDB Admins with quick access to key management tools and deep insights into CMDB health and activities. The view provides details such as duplicate CIs and recent activities in the CMDB.
Configuration identifiers framework -- Configuration identifiers provide a framework that lets you customize some behaviors of a CMDB Workspace feature, enabling different settings for that feature, on different workspaces. Most importantly, you can use this customization framework when integrating a CMDB Workspace feature into another workspace.
Configure -- Plan and configure your implementation of CMDB Workspace.
Modify important actions -- Modify the appearance order and other properties of the important action cards that appear on the Home view of the CMDB Workspace.
Add a quick link -- For an immediate access to tools or data that you need, add your own quick link to the Home view of CMDB Workspace.
Configure datacenters for Cloud vs Non-cloud resources -- The Cloud vs Non-cloud resources chart in CMDB Workspace determines which CIs and application services are stored on a cloud and which aren't in the organization. In addition to base system classifications, you can add cloud versus non-cloud classifications that reflect specific datacenter deployments in the organization.
Request attributes for new CIs -- Integrate a request for specific CI attributes when manually creating a new CI in your workspace. Then, when creating a new CI in the respective workspace, users can enter values for the requested attributes, as appropriate for the new CI.
Limit class list selection for new CIs -- Limit the selection of classes for a new CI being manually created in your workspace, to only those classes that are relevant to that workspace. When then creating a new CI in the respective workspace, users can only select a class that is authorized as an option.
Create a CI manually in CMDB Workspace -- Create a new CI in CMDB Workspace, while applying Identification and Reconciliation Engine (IRE) processes and other requirements for the CI's class. IRE identification rules enforce the new CI to be unique and to comply with other class requirements.
Manage CI details using CI Form -- Use CI Form in CMDB Workspace or in another workspace, to view, edit, and manage a comprehensive set of details of a CI such as its attributes, related lists, and CMDB 360 records. When updating CIs, IRE rules are applied to avoid potential issues such as duplicate CIs. CI Form supports derivation of form configurations throughout the CMDB hierarchy.
Edit a related table from CMDB performance insights in CMDB Workspace -- Edit a related table on the Related Entries [cmdb_related_entry] table directly from the CMDB performance insights tool in the CMDB Workspace Insights view. Update the related table to correctly reference another CI in the Referenced field when a reference is missing from the related table.
Edit a data source from CMDB performance insights in CMDB Workspace -- Edit a data source for your Service Graph Connectors to specify the data that an import set should ingest. Consider configuring a batch process to make ingestion more efficient and improve performance.
Edit a scheduled data import from CMDB performance insights in CMDB Workspace -- Edit a scheduled data import directly from CMDB performance insights for your Service Graph Connectors. Consider enabling Concurrent Import with a custom size partition to split incoming data into multiple import sets and transform the import sets concurrently to reduce processing time.
Reference -- Reference topics provide additional information about components such as properties, installed with CMDB Workspace and class-specific criteria for the Cloud vs Non-cloud resources chart.
Criteria in Cloud vs Non-cloud resources -- The Cloud vs Non-cloud resources chart provides counts for several key classes. The chart uses different classes and relationship criteria for each class to determine which resources count as cloud and which count as non-cloud.
Components -- Several types of components are installed with the activation of the CMDB Workspace (sn_cmdb_ws) plugin, including properties, tables, user roles, and scheduled jobs.
API Insights -- The ServiceNow API Insights workspace is an all-in-one application that enables you to track all your APIs. You can also use it to start workflows related to different stages in the application programming interface (API) life cycle.
Explore -- Learn about API Insights with a sample workflow and review the benefits it can provide for different users in your organization.
Configure -- Complete the configuration tasks to start using the API Insights workspace.
System administrator tasks -- As a user with the admin role, set up the API Insights workspace by installing the application and assigning roles to users for managing API operations.
Install -- You can install the API Insights application (sn_api_insights_ws) if you have the admin role.If the application does NOT include demo data or it does NOT install related applications and plugins, delete or revise the following sentence:The application installs related ServiceNow Store applications and plugins if they are not already installed.
Assign -- Assign roles to control access to features, capabilities, and data in the API Insights application.
CMDB administrator tasks -- As a CMDB administrator with the sn_cmdb_admin role, you can set up data model recommendations for API clustering, configure settings for importing APIs into the API Insights workspace, and optionally review enterprise architect administrator settings for managing APIs.
Recommendation settings -- Set recommendations for clustering API components to align the organization's data with the desired data model.
API import settings -- Set options to import custom and ServiceNow APIs from your instance into the CMDB.
Tools, relationships, and workflows -- Configure API Insights settings, including API creation tools, relationship models, ownership groups, and automated workflows, to streamline API governance and operational processes.
API specification settings -- You can access API specification validation rules to verify that your API specifications are complete, consistent, and adhere to best practices.
Automate tag-based mapping -- You can configure and automate creating CMDB relationships between APIs and application services or business applications based on API tags.
Define tag-based mapping rules -- You can configure and automate creating CMDB relationships between APIs and application services or business applications based on API tags.
Scheduling the tag-based mapping rules -- You can configure and automate creating CMDB relationships between APIs and application services or business applications based on API tags.
Enterprise architect administrator tasks -- As an enterprise architect administrator with the sn_api_insights_ws.api_mgmt_architect_admin role, configure workflows for organizing APIs, including automating API actions and defining settings to enable enterprise architects manage APIs in the API Insights workspace.
API action settings -- Configure flows in Workflow Studio for automating API actions within API Insights, streamlining processes like API access requests.
Tools, relationships, and workflows -- Configure API Insights settings, including API creation tools, relationship models, ownership groups, and automated workflows, to streamline API governance and operational processes.
Administer and monitor API data -- The Overview tab in the API Insights workspace provides a centralized overview of your organization's API landscape.
Administer -- The Overview tab in the API Insights workspace provides a centralized view of data ingestion activities and integration health.
Monitor -- The Overview tab in the API Insights workspace provides a centralized view of data ingestion activities and integration health.
Manage API data -- You can use the API Insights workspace to centralize and manage API data for informed decision-making.
View all -- Manage and monitor all APIs within your organization by reviewing their life cycle stages, identifying missing critical attributes, and accessing helpful resources to ensure proper API maintenance and governance.
Search -- Search for an API or an API component available within your organization in the API Insights workspace.
Compare -- Compare APIs available within your organization in the API Insights workspace.
Connect -- Initiate API creation directly from the API Insights workspace by connecting to an external API design tool of your choice.
Request access -- Request access to an API available within your organization in the API Insights workspace.
Identify and remediate -- Identify and remediate missing API data in the API Insights workspace by linking missing elements and verifying complete API records.
Remediate missing data -- Identify and remediate missing API data in the API Insights workspace by linking missing elements and verifying complete API records.
Manage team's data -- Improve the operational efficiency of the API ecosystem within your organization by creating a relationship for APIs missing key attributes such as business context also called as business application ownership groups, product models, or designs.
View details -- As an enterprise architect, gain insights into your organization's API performance, relationships, and governance from the API details page within the API Insights workspace.
Manage application service relationships -- You can associate APIs with relevant configuration items (CIs) to ensure accurate mappings between APIs and the configuration items they support.
View application service relationships -- You can associate APIs with relevant configuration items (CIs) to ensure accurate mappings between APIs and the configuration items they support.
Create application service relationships -- You can associate APIs with relevant configuration items (CIs) to ensure accurate mappings between APIs and the configuration items they support.
Remove application service relationships -- You can associate APIs with relevant configuration items (CIs) to ensure accurate mappings between APIs and the configuration items they support.
Automate tag-based mapping -- You can configure and automate creating CMDB relationships between APIs and application services or business applications based on API tags.
Define tag-based mapping rules -- You can configure and automate creating CMDB relationships between APIs and application services or business applications based on API tags.
Scheduling the tag-based mapping rules -- You can configure and automate creating CMDB relationships between APIs and application services or business applications based on API tags.
Manage access requests -- Manage received and sent requests by granting or rejecting API access, sending reminders, or withdrawing requests in API Insights.
Received -- Manage incoming received requests for API access in API Insights.
Sent -- Manage your sent access requests by either sending a reminder or withdrawing the request in API Insights.
Optimize clustering recommendations -- Use clustering recommendations to organize and group related API components, improving the efficiency and accuracy of API management.
View -- Use machine learning-based suggestions to group related API components, improving the organization and mapping of APIs within the system.
Accept -- Associate API components with an API record by accepting clustering recommendation in the API Insights workspace.
Manage API data connections -- You can view the status of your API data connections, including success rates, processing status, and ongoing executions, and monitor the progress of connections added using Service Graph Connectors in API Insights.
View connection status -- View the status of your API data connections using Service Graph Connectors, including success rates, processing status, and ongoing executions.
Monitor connections -- Check progress status of API data connections in API Insights.
View -- You can view installed and draft API data connections that were added using Service Graph Connectors within API Insights.
View an installed connection -- You can view installed and draft API data connections that were added using Service Graph Connectors within API Insights.
View a draft connection -- You can view installed and draft API data connections that were added using Service Graph Connectors within API Insights.
Create -- Create an API data connection added for a Service Graph Connector within API Insights.
Explore -- You can explore available options for onboarding and maintaining API data using Service Graph Connectors within API Insights.
Update a connector -- You can explore available options for onboarding and maintaining API data using Service Graph Connectors within API Insights.
Install a connector using an entitlement -- You can explore available options for onboarding and maintaining API data using Service Graph Connectors within API Insights.
Install a connector from ServiceNow Store -- You can explore available options for onboarding and maintaining API data using Service Graph Connectors within API Insights.
Reference -- Reference topics provide additional information about API Insights components, API Insights properties, and domain separation.
Components installed -- Several types of components are installed with activation of the API Insights plugin, including tables, user roles, and scheduled jobs.
Properties -- API Insights properties control the behavior of the application.
Domain separation -- If any conkeyrefs are broken, re-add them from the doc/source/reuse/domain-separation/domain-separation-overview.dita file.In the short description, edit the first sentence to state whether domain separation is supported or not and add the application name. Keep the conkeyref at the end that describes domain separation.Domain separation is unsupported for API Insights. Domain separation enables you to separate data, processes, and administrative tasks into logical groupings called domains. You can control several aspects of this separation, including which users can see and access data.
CMDB Identification and Reconciliation (IRE) -- The Identification and Reconciliation module provides a centralized framework for identifying and reconciling data from different data sources. It helps maintain the integrity of the CMDB and some non-CMDB tables when multiple data sources are used to create and update CI records.
Explore -- The Identification and Reconciliation (IRE) module provides a centralized framework for identifying and reconciling data from different data sources. It helps maintain the integrity of the CMDB and some non-CMDB tables when multiple data sources are used to create and update CI records.
Dynamic IRE -- Dynamic Identification and Reconciliation Engine (IRE) processes CI identification for maximum accuracy and efficiency and eliminates the requirement to manually create or maintain rules.
Components and process of Identification and Reconciliation -- The CMDB Identification and Reconciliation functionality is supported by the Identification and Reconciliation engine (IRE), rules, and tasks. Identification rules, reconciliation rules, IRE data source rules, de-duplication tasks, and reclassification tasks determine how IRE identifies and reconciles CI.
Identification and Reconciliation Engine (IRE) -- IRE is an underlying key component in Identification and Reconciliation, providing a centralized framework to perform identification and reconciliation processes across different data sources. IRE uses identification rules, reconciliation rules, and IRE data source rules when processing incoming data before inserting that data to the CMDB.
Configure -- Configure the necessary rules for CMDB Identification and Reconciliation (IRE) to function effectively.
Identification rules -- The CMDB identification process relies on identification rules to uniquely identify CIs.
Create a CI identification rule -- Identification rules are used to uniquely identify CIs in the CMDB, as part of Identification and Reconciliation (IRE) processes. Each CMDB class can be associated with a single identification rule.
Create an identification inclusion rule -- Narrow the scope of CIs that are included in the identification process by creating an identification inclusion rule.
Create a data refresh rule -- Specify data refresh rules to determine if a CI is stale for a specific discovery source. Such CIs can then be updated by a lower-priority authorized discovery source.
Exclude classes from Dynamic IRE -- Exclude specific classes, for which Dynamic IRE isn't beneficial, from Dynamic IRE. When a hierarchy branch (such as the Hardware class branch) is configured to use Dynamic IRE, you can configure specific classes within that branch, to be excluded from Dynamic IRE.
Configure CI reclassification during IRE processing -- During the Identification and Reconciliation Engine (IRE) CI identification process, a CI might need to be reclassified to a different sys_class_name type. By default, CIs are reclassified automatically. If automatic reclassification is disabled, then the CI is not reclassified and the system generates a reclassification task for your review.
Create a reclassification restriction rule -- During the Identification and Reconciliation Engine (IRE) CI identification process, a CI might need to be reclassified to a different sys_class_name type. By default, CIs are reclassified automatically. If automatic reclassification is disabled, then the CI is not reclassified and the system generates a reclassification task for your review.
Create an IRE data source rule -- When using Identification and Reconciliation Engine (IRE), you can prevent a specific discovery (data) source from inserting new CIs for a specific class. Create IRE data source rules for discovery sources that you don't trust in creating CIs but continue to trust in updating those CIs that exist.
CMDB dependent relationship rules -- Service definitions consist of CI types and relationship types. Dependent relationship rules define the dependency structure of the CI types and the relationship types in these service definitions, helping in CI identification and in the construction of business service maps.
Create dependent relationship rules -- Create hosting and containment rules (dependent relationship rules) for CI classes to help with correctly identifying dependent CIs during the business discovery process and service mapping. Discovery calls the identification API that applies dependent relationship rules.
Create a dependent relationship rule for a CMDB class -- Create hosting and containment rules (dependent relationship rules) for CI classes to help with correctly identifying dependent CIs during the business discovery process and service mapping. Discovery calls the identification API that applies dependent relationship rules.
Create or edit a collection of containment rules -- Create hosting and containment rules (dependent relationship rules) for CI classes to help with correctly identifying dependent CIs during the business discovery process and service mapping. Discovery calls the identification API that applies dependent relationship rules.
Create or edit a collection of hosting rules -- Create hosting and containment rules (dependent relationship rules) for CI classes to help with correctly identifying dependent CIs during the business discovery process and service mapping. Discovery calls the identification API that applies dependent relationship rules.
Apply IRE to Import Sets -- You can apply CMDB Identification and Reconciliation Engine (IRE) processes when Import Sets are used to import CIs into the CMDB. CI identification can prevent duplicate CIs in the CMDB, which Import Sets might otherwise cause.
Detecting duplicate CIs -- When IRE identification process detects duplicate CIs, it groups each set of duplicate CIs into a de-duplication task for review and remediation. A large number of duplicate CIs might be due to weak identification rules. You can configure the identification engine to reconcile duplicate CIs.
Identification simulation -- Identification simulation is a central location for automatically constructing a payload that is guaranteed to be complete and valid. You can then simulate the processing of the payload by the Identification and Reconciliation Engine (IRE) and examine the results before actually submitting it for execution by IRE.
Automatically generate payload -- Identification simulation is a central location for automatically constructing a payload that is guaranteed to be complete and valid. You can then simulate the processing of the payload by the Identification and Reconciliation Engine (IRE) and examine the results before actually submitting it for execution by IRE.
Simulate payload processing using identification simulation -- Identification simulation is a central location for automatically constructing a payload that is guaranteed to be complete and valid. You can then simulate the processing of the payload by the Identification and Reconciliation Engine (IRE) and examine the results before actually submitting it for execution by IRE.
Set logging level for identification simulation -- Identification simulation is a central location for automatically constructing a payload that is guaranteed to be complete and valid. You can then simulate the processing of the payload by the Identification and Reconciliation Engine (IRE) and examine the results before actually submitting it for execution by IRE.
Examine run logs -- Identification simulation is a central location for automatically constructing a payload that is guaranteed to be complete and valid. You can then simulate the processing of the payload by the Identification and Reconciliation Engine (IRE) and examine the results before actually submitting it for execution by IRE.
View a reclassification task -- Reclassification tasks are created for CIs that couldn't be automatically reclassified during the identification process. Review these tasks to locate the CIs and decide if to reclassify them.
IRE support for non-CMDB tables -- Apply Identification and Reconciliation Engine (IRE) processes to supported non-CMDB tables to ensure data integrity and health of those tables.
Create an identification rule for a non-CMDB table -- To use Identification and Reconciliation Engine (IRE) features with supported non-CMDB tables, you must first create identification rules that uniquely identify the table records. Each non-CMDB table can be associated with a single identification rule.
Create a data refresh rule for a non-CMDB table -- To apply Identification and Reconciliation Engine (IRE) features to supported non-CMDB tables, create data refresh rules for those tables. Data refresh rules are used to determine if a record is stale for a specific data source. Such records can then be updated by a lower-priority authorized data source.
Create an IRE data source rule for non-CMDB tables -- When using Identification and Reconciliation Engine (IRE), you can prevent a specific data source from inserting new records for a specific non-CMDB table. Create IRE data source rules for data sources that you don't trust in creating records but continue to trust in updating those records that exist.
Reference -- Reference topics provide property settings, domain separation, and other reference content for the CMDB Identification and Reconciliation Engine (IRE).
Domain separation -- Domain separation is supported in the CMDB Identification and Reconciliation feature. Domain separation enables you to separate data, processes, and administrative tasks into logical groupings called domains. You can control several aspects of this separation, including which users can see and access data.
Properties -- Use the Identification and Reconciliation properties to configure the identification and reconciliation engine (IRE).
IRE error messages -- The Identification and Reconciliation Engine (IRE) generates the following errors and messages. Depending on settings, these messages appear in the Identification Logging pane and in the system logs.
Components installed -- Several types of components are installed with Identification and Reconciliation (included in the com.snc.cmdb plugin), including tables.
Populating the CMDB -- You can populate the CMDB by using Discovery, by using the IntegrationHub ETL or Import Sets to import and integrate data from a third-party source, by integrating with an external CMDB, or by manually creating CIs.
Backing up CMDB data -- The cmdb_backup_storage_information table (part of the [app-cmdb-content] ServiceNow Store application) holds generic backup storage information for a CI as a platform related item. The table includes a CI as a reference attribute and stores information for hardware, cloud, containers, and other CI types.
CMDB 360 -- CMDB 360 retains complete history about discovery sources and proposed values, involved in updates of CI attributes. Use CMDB 360 data to track how the CMDB is populated by various discovery sources at the CI attribute level. Also, to revert CI updates from a specific discovery source, or to recompute attribute values using updated reconciliation rules.
CMDB 360 experience in a workspace -- The CMDB 360 view in CMDB Workspace and in Service Graph Workspace provides aggregations and analysis of CMDB 360 data which you can use to track activities and identify Potential issues of discovery sources. You can also create different types of your own queries and associated schedules and reports to explore CMDB data.
Configure the CMDB 360 dashboard in a workspace -- Configure CMDB 360 settings to determine how your CMDB 360 data is analyzed and aggregated. These settings affect the data that appears on the cards and the records shown when you drill down on those cards in the CMDB 360 dashboard in CMDB Workspace or in Service Graph Workspace.
Create a Get Records query -- Create a Get Records query from the CMDB 360 dashboard in CMDB Workspace or in Service Graph Workspace to help you explore CMDB 360 data.
Create a Find Gap query -- Create a Find Gap query from the CMDB 360 dashboard in CMDB Workspace or in Service Graph Workspace to help you find CIs that are not being reported by a discovery source.
Create a Compare Attribute Values query -- Create a Compare Attribute Values query from the CMDB 360 dashboard in CMDB Workspace or in Service Graph Workspace to help you find CIs with mismatched attribute values between discovery sources.
Schedule a query for a report -- Set up a schedule to regularly query for CMDB 360 data. Use scheduled queries to provide CMDB 360 data to reports you create, which can provide insight into how discovery sources populate the CMDB and the reliability of those discovery sources.
Exclude classes from CMDB 360 -- Prevent CMDB 360 from collecting, storing, and analyzing data for classes for which it isn't needed. CMDB 360 processes large amounts of data. Therefore, excluding classes can help improve the performance of the Multisource Dashboard Analytics Population scheduled job and of CMDB 360 queries.
Recompute CI attribute values -- Modify reconciliation rules, or exclude a discovery source which is found to be invalid. Then, use the updated reconciliation rules in recomputing CI attribute values, for which those reconciliation rules or discovery source are applicable to.
Components related to CMDB 360 -- Several types of components are related to CMDB 360 (included in the com.snc.cmdb plugin), such as tables and properties.
CMDB data management -- The integrity and health of the CMDB is essential for the various features that depend on the data in the CMDB. As the CMDB grows and infrastructures change, the CMDB can accumulate stale, duplicate, or outdated CIs and therefore no longer accurately reflect the IT infrastructure and applications in the organization.
Working with CMDB Data Manager -- CMDB Data Manager is a policy-driven framework for bulk management of CI life-cycle operations such as deletion, archival, and attestation. The CMDB Data Manager is a comprehensive and integrated solution that scales to large CMDBs and copes with rapid changes in a cloud-based world.
Retirement definitions -- Specify a retirement definition for a class, to reflect protocols in your organization applicable to the class and to its child classes. These definitions support the transition of CIs through life cycle stages as implemented by CMDB Data Manager life-cycle policies. A class can have a retirement definition by derivation, or by a retirement definition specified for that class.
Notifications -- The CMDB Data Manager supports several types of notifications that alert administrators, task assignees, and approvers about policy execution outcomes, task life-cycle events, and pending actions. All notifications are delivered via email using ServiceNow event-driven email actions.
CMDB Data Manager experience in a workspace -- Use the CMDB Data Manager in CMDB Workspace or in Service Graph Workspace to administer policies, CIs life-cycle and attestation tasks, view analytics about on-going CMDB Data Manager processes, and to approve or reject assigned tasks.
Administer CMDB Data Manager -- As a CMDB administrator, you can create policies, manage CI attestation, manage CI exclusion lists, access CMDB Data Manager insights, and access subflows and settings that are used in the CMDB Data Manager.
Get started -- The Data Manager overview page in CMDB Workspace and in Service Graph Workspace provides a dashboard view of Data Manager tasks, and lets you get started in using the CMDB Data Manager.
Manage retirement definitions -- Use CMDB Workspace or Service Graph Workspace to create, delete, edit, or activate retirement definitions in your organization, for a class. Tables that are targeted in CMDB Data Manager life-cycle policies, must be associated with an active retirement definition. Target CIs in Retire policies, are set to match their associated class retirement definitions.
Delete a CMDB Data Manager retirement definition -- Use CMDB Workspace or Service Graph Workspace to create, delete, edit, or activate retirement definitions in your organization, for a class. Tables that are targeted in CMDB Data Manager life-cycle policies, must be associated with an active retirement definition. Target CIs in Retire policies, are set to match their associated class retirement definitions.
Manage exclusion lists -- Create and manage exclusion lists for the various policy types used in CMDB Data Manager, in CMDB Workspace or in Service Graph Workspace. Policies of the specified type won't target CIs and other records in the exclusion list for that policy type.
Create a CMDB Data Manager policy -- Create a CMDB Data Manager policy in CMDB Workspace or Service Graph Workspace to automatically process CIs life-cycle events such as deletion. Applying consistent and standard life-cycle policies to CIs helps maintain the health of the CMDB.
Publish a draft CMDB Data Manager policy -- If you created a draft Data Manager policy, or imported legacy certification schedules, you can activate that draft policy by publishing it in CMDB Workspace or in Service Graph Workspace.
View CMDB Data Manager policies -- View Data Manager policies on a dashboard view in CMDB Workspace or in Service Graph Workspace, with a timeline of upcoming scheduled policies, counts, and grouped by policy status.
View CMDB Data Manager analytics -- The CMDB Data Manager in CMDB Workspace and in Service Graph Workspace, provides charts and counts that show the overall state of Data Manager policies in the organization. Review these details to track progress and to identify any problems that require your attention.
Review CMDB Data Manager tasks -- Review Data Manager tasks (such as life-cycle tasks) that are assigned to you, to an assignment group that you belong to, to people you manage, or to members of a group that you are the manager of. All in accordance with CMDB Data Manager policies. During the review, you can approve, cancel, reject, or reassign a task.
Duplicate CIs remediation -- Duplicate CIs in the CMDB unnecessarily overload the system and interfere with the CMDB's integrity and reliability. It is therefore important to regularly use CMDB tools that detect and remediate duplicate CIs.
CI de-duplication experience in a workspace -- Create libraries of de-duplication templates in CMDB Workspace or in Service Graph Workspace, to process de-duplication tasks which remediate duplicate CIs, in a consistent manner and in bulk. De-duplication templates are pre-configured with all necessary settings for remediating duplicate CIs in de-duplication tasks, per class.
Create a de-duplication template -- Create a de-duplication template that you can then run to apply pre-configured and consistent remediation to de-duplication tasks, in bulk. Organize your templates in libraries that make sense in your organization.
Run a template to process de-duplication tasks -- Run a de-duplication template to run de-duplication tasks that remediate duplicate CIs, in bulk. A de-duplication template is pre-configured with remediation settings per class. Running a de-duplication template, processes its assigned de-duplication tasks, consistently, according to the template settings.
Remediate a single de-duplication task -- Remediate a single de-duplilcation task using a de-duplication template in CMDB Workspace, in Service Graph Workspace, or manually, using the Duplicate CI Remediator.
Publish or unpublish a de-duplication template -- After creating a de-duplication template, you must publish the draft template to make it available to run. You might also need to unpublish a published de-duplication template so it's temporarily unavailable for de-duplication remediation, until you republish it again.
Schedule a de-duplication template -- Create a schedule, such as a monthly schedule, for a published de-duplication template so it will automatically run on a recurring interval.
Retire a de-duplication template -- Retire a template that is no longer needed for processing its de-duplication tasks which remediate duplicate CIs.
Review de-duplication tasks (manual) -- Review details of de-duplication tasks which remediate duplicate CIs, and then potentially process a de-duplication task.
Remediate a de-duplication task (manual) -- Remediate a single de-duplication task by using the Duplicate CI Remediator wizard. Use the wizard to guide you through the duplicate CI reconciliation process or to apply a custom workflow.
Manually create a de-duplication task -- Manually create a de-duplication task when it is not automatically created. You can then use the Duplicate CI Remediator or the De-duplication dashboard in CMDB Workspace and in Service Graph Workspace to remediate the manually created task.
Turn off workflows of related tables during remediation -- Configure de-duplication remediation processes for related tables, to turn off the execution of business rules, workflows, and any other automatic processes that might be turning off the update of referenced duplicate CIs to the main CI. Disabling all these workflows of related tables, allow de-duplication tasks, that would otherwise fail, to complete.
Manage default related items list -- You can add or remove items from the default list of related items which is used in duplicate CI remediation for all de-duplication tasks.
Properties related to remediation of duplicate CIs -- Use de-duplication properties to configure how remediation of duplicate CIs works when using the Duplicate CI Remediator, or the De-duplication Dashboard in CMDB Workspace and in Service Graph Workspace.
CIs attestation -- Verify the existence of actual IT infrastructure and applications that you own, systematically and in bulk. As CIs are continuously ingested into the CMDB from various data sources, ensure the integrity of the CMDB. Remove any stale CIs that are associated with IT infrastructure or applications that no longer exists.
Review attestation tasks in a workspace -- Review attestation tasks that are assigned to you or to an assignment group that you belong to in accordance with CMDB Data Manager Attestation policies. Check the physical existence of IT infrastructure or applications associated with CIs in the attestation task and then process those CIs as appropriate.
Run an attestation policy on-demand -- Run an attestation policy in Service Graph Workspace or in CMDB Workspace, when needed, regardless of the policy recurring schedule. A manual, on-demand run doesn't interfere with the policy's specified schedule.
Data Certification -- Data Certification manages scheduled and on-demand validations of data in CMDB and non-CMDB tables.
Data Certification experience in a workspace -- Use Data Certification in CMDB Workspace or in Service Graph Workspace to administer Data Certification, create certification policies, manage certification tasks, and view analytics about on-going processes.
Data Certification Dashboard -- Use the Data Certification Dashboard in CMDB Workspace or in Service Graph Workspace as a central location to manage Data Certification instances and tasks, and to see counts, progress, state, and analytical insights. You can drill down past due certification tasks to examine and to reassign them, for example, so that they can be completed by an appropriate user.
Review certification tasks -- Review the values of record fields and CI attributes in certification tasks assigned to you, and then certify, edit, or fail the review according to your findings. For managers, tasks of direct reports are included, and for user group managers, tasks of members in the group are also included.
Review failed certification tasks -- Review records (and CIs) that failed the certification review and are assigned to you. Those exceptions appear in a list that is dynamically updated as certification tasks are being reviewed.
Run a certification policy on-demand -- Run a certification policy in Service Graph Workspace or in CMDB Workspace, when needed, regardless of the policy recurring schedule. A manual, on-demand run doesn't interfere with the policy's specified schedule.
Components related to CMDB Data Manager -- The following scheduled jobs, tables, roles, and properties, are related to CMDB Data Manager. Some of those, are installed with CMDB Workspace and Service Graph Workspace.
CMDB groups -- A CMDB group is a collection of CIs that lets you apply CI actions collectively to all the CIs that are members in the group.
Create and populate a CMDB group -- A CMDB group is a collection of CIs that lets you apply CI actions collectively to all the CIs that are members in the group.
CMDB Compliance -- CMDB Compliance is a tool set that enables administrators to certify CMDB data for correctness and fix any discrepancies found in the data.
Compliance Activation -- Compliance functionality is provided by the Certification Core (com.snc.certification_core) plugin which contains shared functionality required for certification audits.
Architecture Compliance -- Architecture Compliance manages scheduled or on-demand audits of CMDB data to determine which configuration items (CI) match expected attributes. The compliance audits check servers to ensure that their physical resources, such as CPU speed or memory, comply with certain standards.
Architecture Compliance Overview module -- The Architecture Compliance Overview module displays various architecture compliance reports. The Overview module is a type of homepage.
Desired State -- Desired State performs scheduled or on-demand audits of CMDB data to determine which records match the expected attributes, CI relationships, and relationships to other records in the system.
Desired State Overview module -- The Desired State Overview module displays various desired state reports. The Overview module is a type of homepage.
Use the Desired State Overview module -- The Desired State Overview module displays various desired state reports. The Overview module is a type of homepage.
Desired State reporting -- The Desired State application includes reports to assess your audit results.
Certification audits -- A certification audit compares the actual attributes of certain ServiceNow records. This audit selects a filter, against the expected attributes, relationships, and related record values defined by template conditions or a script.
Create a compliance audit -- Create a compliance audit. Compliance offers two types of audits: one uses templates to define conditions and the other uses a script.
Copy an audit -- New audits can be created from an existing audit.
Schedule and run an audit -- The system performs audits automatically from the schedule you configure.
Certification audit results -- Audit results show the records that have passed or failed an audit and itemize any discrepancies detected.
View an audit result -- To generate certification results, you must first create and run an audit.
Delete an audit result -- While audit results can be deleted, you cannot delete an audit result that has a follow-on task associated with it.
View an audit result in the Compliance view -- After an audit has run, you can view the results and follow-on tasks from the Compliance view in the records of every CI audited.
Results preview -- You can preview an audit to view potential results without saving audit results or generating follow-on tasks. For example, use this feature to test template conditions for correctness without creating thousands of result records.
Health windows -- A health window is a trailing time frame in which the ServiceNow system evaluates audit results from CIs that have desired state fields defined.
Certification filters -- A certification filter creates a subset of ServiceNow records to audit, typically from configuration items (CI) of a certain type, such as all UNIX servers in a specific datacenter.
Compliance filter -- The compliance filter for license bases uses the following fields to define entitled users or CIs.
Create a filter -- You can create as many versions of a filter as necessary. You can then designate which versions are active and available for selection in Compliance template records, Governance Risk and Compliance control test definitions, or Data Certification schedule definitions.
Copy a filter -- New filters can be created from an existing filter.
Certification follow-on tasks -- The ServiceNow system can automatically generate and assign follow-on tasks to correct discrepancies detected during compliance audits.
Access follow-on tasks -- The ServiceNow system can automatically generate and assign follow-on tasks to correct discrepancies detected during compliance audits.
Manage follow-on tasks -- The ServiceNow system can automatically generate and assign follow-on tasks to correct discrepancies detected during compliance audits.
Certification templates -- Certification templates can define attributes, relationships, and reference field values that indicate what a record is expected to contain.
Scripted audits -- A scripted audit enables users with the certification_admin role to conduct an audit from a script rather than using restrictive template conditions.
Create a scripted audit -- A scripted audit is an audit whose conditions are defined by a script.
Script methods -- ServiceNow provides four methods for creating the audit script.
Managing proposed changes -- The proposed changes feature allows you to pre-configure changes to configuration items and their associated relationships. These pre-configured changes are prepared to be implemented, but do not actually happen until they are applied at a later time.
View the proposed changes of a CI -- The proposed changes feature allows you to pre-configure changes to configuration items and their associated relationships. These pre-configured changes are prepared to be implemented, but do not actually happen until they are applied at a later time.
Add a proposed change to a CI -- The proposed changes feature allows you to pre-configure changes to configuration items and their associated relationships. These pre-configured changes are prepared to be implemented, but do not actually happen until they are applied at a later time.
Apply a proposed change to a CI -- The proposed changes feature allows you to pre-configure changes to configuration items and their associated relationships. These pre-configured changes are prepared to be implemented, but do not actually happen until they are applied at a later time.
Create or edit a proposed change verification rule -- The proposed changes feature allows you to pre-configure changes to configuration items and their associated relationships. These pre-configured changes are prepared to be implemented, but do not actually happen until they are applied at a later time.
Verify proposed changes -- The proposed changes feature allows you to pre-configure changes to configuration items and their associated relationships. These pre-configured changes are prepared to be implemented, but do not actually happen until they are applied at a later time.
Create or edit a planned change validation script -- The proposed changes feature allows you to pre-configure changes to configuration items and their associated relationships. These pre-configured changes are prepared to be implemented, but do not actually happen until they are applied at a later time.
Intelligent Search for CMDB -- Use everyday natural language query (NLQ) in a search string to query for a set of CIs in the CMDB. Intelligent Search for CMDB, parses, resolves ambiguities, and converts your search string into a valid CMDB query. Complex search strings open fully constructed on a canvas of CMDB Query Builder where you can continue and refine, or run.
Unified Map -- The Unified Map feature displays a graphical hierarchical map of the CMDB — CIs and the connections between them. Unified Map combines some of the capabilities of Dependency Views and of Service Mapping into a single map experience.
Explore -- The Unified Map feature displays a graphical hierarchical map of the CMDB — CIs and the connections between them. Unified Map combines some of the capabilities of Dependency Views and of Service Mapping into a single map experience.
Administer -- Administrators can configure general Unified Map settings to control the initial content and appearance of maps for all users in a workspace.
Manage shared filter settings -- Admins can save a set of Unified Map map filter settings (layer, CI class, relationship type, and other CI attribute settings) as a shared preset that any user can apply to their map view.
Configure node count -- Configure the maximum number of nodes that can be loaded when a map in this workspace opens. These are general settings that only sn_cmdb_admin can configure.
Configure number of levels -- Configure the default or maximum number of levels on maps. These are general settings that only sn_cmdb_admin can configure.
Configure endpoint de-dupe -- Configure how duplicate edges are displayed on maps. These are general settings that only sn_cmdb_admin can configure.
Configure life cycle filter -- By default, only CIs for which Life cycle stage is Operational or empty appear on maps. You can configure the map to display CIs with other Life cycle stage values. These are general settings that only sn_cmdb_admin can configure.
Configure related items -- Add related items categories, specify which information should appear on cards on the Unified Map Related items panel, and specify how related items (events) appear on the timeline and on badges. These are general settings that only sn_cmdb_admin can configure.
Configure Attributes panel -- Each class has a unique set of extended attributes that appear in the bottom section of the Attributes panel for a CI. For any class, you can specify which extended attributes should be displayed. These are general settings that only sn_cmdb_admin can configure.
Configure connections to a referenced class -- Configure how to display connections to a referenced class and from a referencing class on Unified Map. A reference connects two CIs from differing classes that aren't connected by a relationship. These are general settings that only sn_cmdb_admin can configure.
Create a class profile -- Configure a class profile that specifies which layers should appear for a particular class: application, service instance, business, or infrastructure. For example, you can configure that the mapped application service (service instance) [cmdb_ci_service_discovered] class should display only Service Mapping data and not infrastructure elements.
Configuration settings -- General configuration settings that control Unified Map are collected in a configuration identifier. A configuration identifier is a set of properties and table-driven configurations that specify the appearance and content of an instance of a UX application. The CMDB Workspace UX application contains Unified Map.
Use -- Unified Map presents a graphical display of CMDB CIs and the connections between to enable powerful insights.
Configure map contents -- Manipulating the contents and layout of a map can greatly assist with envisioning and optimizing your CMDB. You can control which elements appear on the map, isolate and analyze relationships between CIs, and simplify the map to isolate issues.
Filter CIs -- Customize the map to focus on the CIs that you want to work on by filtering out (hiding) irrelevant CIs. You can filter by layer count, CI class, relationship type, discovery source, location, and CI ownership.
Manage a user preset -- Save useful Unified Map filter settings as a user preset that you can apply to a map at any time. For example, define a filter to display only CIs of a particular class and then save the filter settings as a user preset.
View a map summary -- The Overview panel displays summary data for items on the map that are associated with the home node — counts and types of CIs and connections, discovery sources, and so on.
View CI attributes -- Open the Attributes panel in Unified Map to view attributes like location and life cycle stage for a CI or a relationship.
View service instances -- For a selected CI, the Service instances panel in Unified Map lists details in the Service Mapping application for all associated service instances (formerly application services).
View service mapping data -- Service instances that are populated using Service Mapping methods are included in maps. Service Mapping provides significant information for mapped service instances (application services) [cmdb_ci_service_discovered] such as relationships and grouping.
View related items -- Open the Related items panel in Unified Map to show all related items (typically, events such as changes, active incidents, or active problems) for the selected CI.
Related items panel -- Configure which categories of related items, such as active incidents and active problems, appear on the Unified Map Related items panel.
Viewing related items on the timeline -- The timeline indicates related items like incidents, problems, and changes over a specified period of time for the selected CI. You can use the timeline to visualize the history of changes to a CI and how they affect the topology of the CMDB.
View CI changes -- The Changes panel in Unified Map displays change details such as changes to life cycle stage or operational state for the selected CI.
Editing a map -- While you work in the map editor, you can add a CI to the map and remove (hide) a CI from the map. Removing a CI node from a map deletes the records of the CI relationships, but does not delete the CI record from the CMDB. You can also add, modify, and delete CI relationships in the CMDB.
Add a CI to a map -- You can view an existing CI on the map to enable you to create, modify, or delete its connections.
Remove a CI -- You can remove (hide) a CI from the map only if you added it during the current editing session and have not yet saved the map. You can't remove a CI that was on the map when you started the editing session.
Update a connection -- Use the map editor to add a relationship between two CIs or to modify an existing relationship.
Delete a connection -- While editing a map, you can delete a connection (a relationship record) from the CMDB. The CIs that are involved in the connection are not deleted from the CMDB.
Dependency Views -- ServiceNow Dependency Views graphically displays an infrastructure view for a configuration item (CI) and the application or business services that it is part of and that it supports. Dependency Views indicates the status of its configuration items, and allows access to CIs related alerts, incidents, problems, changes, and services.
Supported browsers -- The latest version or service pack of internet browsers are required to view and manipulate Dependency Views maps.
Domain separation -- Domain separation is unsupported in Dependency Views. Domain separation enables you to separate data, processes, and administrative tasks into logical groupings called domains. You can control several aspects of this separation, including which users can see and access data.
Dependency Views map -- ServiceNow Dependency Views maps graphically display CIs that support application or business services and the relationships between the CIs.
Map menus and controls -- Dependency Views maps contain the following menus and controls.
Cluster nodes in a map -- Dependency Views maps can display cluster group nodes alongside individual CI nodes, and the child nodes of these cluster groups.
Virtual grouping of nodes in a map -- To reduce the density on a map, Dependency Views automatically groups CIs of a similar CI type from the same level.
Use -- Use the layout controls on a Dependency Views map to display elements in different configurations for easier management. Use the filter panel on the map to display fewer levels or to filter out elements you don't want to see, then save the filter for use later. Draw new relationships between elements or edit existing relationships.
View a map -- When you display a Dependency Views map, the map is centered on the root CI and displays the layout and number of levels defined in the map properties. If Operational Intelligence is activated, then a Dependency Views map provides a mode that lets you directly access metrics information for the CIs on the map.
Save or load a map -- In the View Map module, use the menu icon to save and load Dependency Views maps.
Export map -- Export a Dependency Views map to an image in PNG format.
View collapsed nodes -- Cluster and virtually grouped nodes can be displayed in a collapsed mode to avoid unnecessary clutter in large maps.
Administer -- Users with the sn_cmdb_admin or admin role can control the appearance and behavior of Dependency Views by configuring map indicators, map related items, map icons, and menu actions.
Create or modify map indicators -- Dependency Views maps and application service maps, use icons to display additional information for a CI by displaying its related records such as alerts, outages, incidents and problems. These icons are called map indicator.
Create or modify map icons -- Upload new icons or modify existing icons to customize the icon displayed for a CI in maps in Dependency Views, Service Mapping, and Event Management.
Create a predefined filter -- Create filters to narrow down the CIs that are displayed on a Dependency Views map. You can create filters that are based on CIs' class, CIs' attributes, or CIs' relationships.
Create or modify Map Related Items -- The Map Related Items module relates referenced CIs to one another, which allows them to be displayed in a Dependency Views map.
Create or modify menu actions -- To modify an existing menu option, first you create a copy of the original menu action record, and then you modify the copy.
Create or edit a dependency type -- Use one of the dependency types provided, or create a custom dependency type with a script that will execute in real time to generate a custom view of a Dependency Views map for a specific CI.
Properties -- Use Dependency Views properties to configure how data appears in Dependency Views maps.
Components -- Several types of components are installed with the activation of the Next_Gen BSM (com.snc.ng_bsm) plugin, such as tables.
CMDB Query Builder -- The CMDB Query Builder enables you to build complex infrastructure and service queries that span multiple CMDB classes, non-CMDB tables, and that involve many CIs that are connected by different relationships.
Explore -- The CMDB Query Builder enables you to build complex infrastructure and service queries that span multiple CMDB classes, non-CMDB tables, and that involve many CIs that are connected by different relationships.
Execution modes -- The CMDB Query Builder engine uses two execution modes to run queries. By default, the system is configured to use the enhanced mode V2 which is designed for performance optimization. V2 is supported for most queries and enables running complex queries significantly quicker and process larger result sets without performance degradation.
Configure -- You can configure settings that affect some functionality of the CMDB Query Builder.
Settings -- Configure settings that control some of the functionality of the CMDB Query Builder.
Relationships to query on -- Configure the type of relationships that you want to query for in CMDB Query Builder. For example, configure which CI on the canvas is the parent and which is the child in the relationship or the level of relationships to query on.
Batch size for queries -- In a base system, a global batch size of 100 is allocated for every Query Builder query run. If needed, you can use a system property to override the default global batch size, or optimize the batch size value per saved query.
Set batch size for a specific saved query -- In a base system, a global batch size of 100 is allocated for every Query Builder query run. If needed, you can use a system property to override the default global batch size, or optimize the batch size value per saved query.
Execution mode -- Configure the execution mode to use when running a query, at the query-level. The execution mode determines whether the query runs using a performance-enhancing engine (V2) or the legacy engine (V1).
Navigate -- Use the navigation tools to enlarge or shrink the query, to move the query, or to border a section of the query to run.
Build CMDB query -- A CMDB query type that queries the infrastructure for CI classes and optionally non-CMDB tables, and the relationships and references that connect them.
Build Service Mapping query -- The Service Mapping query type is a pattern consisting of classes and relationships between those classes. After you build the pattern and run the query, the query returns all the Service Mapping services that contain that pattern.
Run a partial CMDB query -- You can run a partial query in the CMDB Query Builder by defining a section of a query, and then running it.
Delete a CMDB query -- Delete a CMDB query that is no longer used or needed.
Create report -- Use CMDB Query Builder reports to show the results of a CMDB query or a Service Mapping query. Create a basic report or a dynamic report that auto-updates when the results of the associated saved query change.
Create a basic report -- After running a query in the CMDB Query Builder, you can create a basic report that is scoped to the query execution.
Create a dynamic report -- After running a saved query in the CMDB Query Builder, create a dynamic report that continuously updates to show the latest query results. You can use a dynamic report as any other report created using Reporting and you can add it to Performance Analytics dashboards.
Search for a saved query -- The CMDB Query Builder allows you to search for a specific saved query using any combination of search criteria such as the query's name, type, custom tags, and who created or updated the query.
Schedule a CMDB query -- Schedule a saved CMDB query to run once at a scheduled time or on a recurring schedule, and to email the query results to specified users.
Export and import a CMDB query -- Export a saved CMDB or Service Mapping query definition to an XML file which you can later import and run in the CMDB Query Builder. This process lets you port a saved query between instances, such as from a development environment to a production environment.
Reference -- Reference topics provide example queries and descriptions of navigation and property settings.
Domain separation and CMDB Query Builder -- Domain separation is supported in the CMDB Query Builder. Domain separation enables you to separate data, processes, and administrative tasks into logical groupings called domains. You can control several aspects of this separation, including which users can see and access data.
Example queries -- Use the example queries as models for building your custom CMDB queries and Service Mapping queries.
Sample 1 -- Use this example to build a CMDB query to find all servers with a connection to a database.
Sample 2 -- Use this example to build a CMDB query to find all critical application services, and their owner.
Sample 3 -- Use this example to build a CMDB query to find all application services for which there is an incident or a change request. Results are returned for either the application service itself or any CI within the service.
Sample 4 -- Use this example to build a CMDB query to find all hardware in my service offering that has Microsoft Windows installed.
Sample 5 -- Use this example to build a Service Mapping query to find all Linux servers in services.
CMDB Health -- A healthy CMDB, based on health benchmarks in an organization, is essential to an effective and continuous use of the product. Health indicators such as duplicate CIs, required CI fields, and audits are evaluated and aggregated into health scores at the class, health group, and service levels. CMDB Health also provides a framework for applying standardized CI remediation.
Explore -- Learn more about CMDB Health and review the benefits it can provide for users in your organization.
Overview of CMDB Health -- Learn about the benefits, configuration, and usage of the CMDB Health feature.
CMDB Health KPIs and metrics -- CMDB Health calculates an aggregated score for three Key Performance Indicators (KPIs) which are correctness, compliance, and completeness, each further consisting of sub-metrics.
Configure -- Data collection for CMDB Health is highly configurable to reflect data health requirements and standards in your organization. Most importantly, the CMDB Health Dashboard jobs are disabled by default and health data isn't collected until you enable those jobs.
Configure KPI and metrics preferences -- Include or exclude KPIs and metrics as needed in your organization, and configure system behaviour when CIs fail metric health tests.
Set a CI attribute to be mandatory -- Configure a CI attribute as mandatory so it is included in the CMDB Health tests for the required metric if enabled. Required is a metric of the CMDB Health completeness KPI.
Set a CI field to be recommended -- Define a list of CI fields as recommended, noting that it is desirable that they are populated by a data source such as Discovery. You can then configure the CMDB completeness KPI to include recommended fields in its aggregated health reports.
Create a CMDB Health orphan rule -- Create an orphan rule to determine the percentage of orphan CIs in the CMDB. This sum is then aggregated into the correctness CMDB Health KPI. Orphan rules are defined per class, and only a single orphan rule can be defined per class.
Create a CMDB Health staleness rule -- If the staleness metric is in effect, then staleness rules are used to determine the percentage of stale CIs in the CMDB. This sum is then aggregated into the correctness KPI.
Create health inclusion rule -- Filter the CIs that are included in health calculations and that appear in the CMDB Health Dashboard by defining health inclusion rules. Use health inclusion rules to temporarily filter out classes that generate a large number of failures, until the problems are fixed.
Configure aggregation weights -- Metrics health scores are aggregated into their respective KPI (key performance indicator) scores, which in return are aggregated into the overall CMDB Health score. Modify the default aggregation weights for metrics and KPIs to reflect on the importance of one metric over another is assessing the health of CMDB in the organization.
CMDB Health system properties -- Configure the following system properties to customize how CMDB Health monitors and evaluates CIs health.
Enable and configure a CMDB Health Dashboard job -- Enable and configure the CMDB Health Dashboard jobs that process CMDB Health tests, to start calculating CMDB Health scores for the completeness, compliance, correctness KPIs, associated metrics, and relationships.
CMDB Health experience in a workspace -- View CMDB Health dashboards and use other CMDB Health-related features in CMDB Workspace and in Service Graph Workspace.
View CMDB Health Dashboard -- The CMDB Health Dashboard serves as a central location to view detailed health reports for your CMDB at a glance. Also, it provides functions to remediate issues that CMDB Health detected, to improve CMDB health.
View relationships health -- View health scores for relationship health such as orphan, stale, and duplicate relationships, in the Relationship Health Dashboard.
View CI health -- View CMDB Health report for an individual CI, on the CIs form in CMDB Workspace or in Service Graph Workspace.
Create a CMDB remediation rule -- A CMDB remediation rule is associated with a task that was created for a failed CMDB health test. A CMDB remediation rule is applied automatically or manually to execute a remediation workflow that can, for example, delete stale CIs.
Apply CMDB remediation -- Manually initiate a workflow to remediate a CI that failed a CMDB health test. For example, you can remediate CIs that are orphan or stale.
Tracking and troubleshooting -- Use the following information to track and resolve issues with the CMDB Health processes.
Process status: failure threshold reached -- The CMDB Health Dashboard shows the string ‘failure threshold reached' when the number of CIs that are failing the metric tests, reaches the failure threshold set for the metric.
Process status: incomplete score -- The CMDB Health Dashboard shows the string 'incomplete score' for a metric when it fails to calculate the score for the metric.
Reference -- Reference topics provide additional information about the KPIs and metrics that CMDB Health uses and about tables, scheduled jobs, and properties that are used by CMDB Health.
Domain separation -- This is an overview of domain separation as it pertains to CMDB Health. Domain separation enables you to separate data, processes, and administrative tasks into logical groupings called domains. You can control several aspects of this separation, including which users can see and access data.
Components -- Several types of components are installed with CMDB Health (included in the com.snc.cmdb plugin), such as tables, properties, and scheduled jobs.
CSDM and CMDB Data Foundations Dashboards -- The ServiceNow CSDM and CMDB Data Foundations Dashboards store app contains dashboards with insights into the key foundational metrics of your CMDB and Common Service Data Model (CSDM). This app uses ServiceNow health benchmarks to provide recommendations to ensure that the CMDB and CSDM are properly configured for optimal usage and to mitigate any potential risks.
CMDB Data Foundations dashboard -- Use the CMDB Data Foundations dashboard to monitor foundational key health-related metrics in CMDB.
CSDM Data Foundations dashboard -- The CSDM Data Foundations dashboard displays key CSDM indicators on a single page to help you get the full benefit from your ServiceNow AI Platform products.
CMDB Coverage -- The ServiceNow CMDB Coverage application enables you to assess and improve the quality of the Configuration Management Database (CMDB). Improved CMDB coverage provides organizations with better visibility into their network coverage, reliable asset data, and stronger IT operational control.
Explore -- Learn about CMDB Coverage and review the benefits it can provide for users in your organization.
Configure -- Configure the CMDB Coverage application to assess and improve the quality of the CMDB.
Use -- Create discovery schedules, set up a new IPAM Service Graph Connector, and review your IPAM Service Graph Connector configuration from SGC Central to enable complete visibility.
Set up or review IPAM connectors -- Set up a new IPAM Service Graph Connector or review your IPAM Service Graph Connector configuration from SGC Central.
Review CMDB tables -- Review the CMDB tables that are used for CMDB Coverage analysis, and add additional tables to enable complete visibility.
Reference -- Reference topics provide additional information about the scheduled jobs and properties used by CMDB Coverage.
Initialization -- The initialization activity processes historical IP address data from your existing CMDB CIs and IPAM sources. Initialization establishes baseline coverage metrics before ongoing monitoring begins.
Scheduled jobs -- CMDB Coverage uses scheduled jobs to identify stale and missing data.
Properties -- CMDB Coverage properties control the behavior of the application.
Domain separation and CMDB Coverage -- If any conkeyrefs are broken, re-add them from the doc/source/reuse/domain-separation/domain-separation-overview.dita file.In the short description, edit the first sentence to state whether domain separation is supported or not and add the application name. Keep the conkeyref at the end that describes domain separation.Domain separation is unsupported for CMDB Coverage. Domain separation enables you to separate data, processes, and administrative tasks into logical groupings called domains. You can control several aspects of this separation, including which users can see and access data.
CMDB success advisor -- The ServiceNow CMDB success advisor is a scoped application that drives business outcomes for targeted business products, including Data Foundations and Hardware Asset Management, by improving Configuration Management Database (CMDB) data quality. Use a specialized advisor to resolve data quality issues through guided remediation and identify which data integrations are keeping your CMDB accurate and complete.
Explore -- Learn about CMDB success advisor and review the benefits it can provide for different users in your organization.
Supported business outcomes -- CMDB success advisor helps improve CMDB data quality by aligning data quality efforts with specific business outcomes. Identify the areas most relevant to your organization and start with the outcomes to achieve.
Configure -- Complete the configuration tasks to start using the CMDB success advisor.
Install -- You can install the CMDB success advisor application (sn_cmdb_advisor) if you have the admin role. The application installs related ServiceNow applications and plugins if they are not already installed.
Assign -- Assign roles to control access to features, capabilities, and data in the CMDB success advisor application.
Manage upgrades -- Make sure that existing Hardware Asset Management (HAM) CI classes are included as principal classes in Data Foundations during upgrade, without requiring manual configuration.
Access -- You can access CMDB success advisor from the Service Graph Workspace and CMDB Workspace to set up and manage application-specific dashboards. Depending on your progress, you can either begin the setup or access the dashboard to monitor and manage targeted configuration items (CIs) for an application.
View landing page -- As a CMDB administrator, you can use the CMDB success advisor landing page to configure and manage data quality dashboards for Data Foundations and Hardware Asset Management (HAM).
Use Data Foundations advisor -- As a CMDB administrator, you can use the Data Foundations dashboard in CMDB success advisor to improve data quality for the most critical CI classes. Use Data Foundations to keep your CI data accurate, complete, and reliable across the CI classes your organization relies on for incidents, problems, and changes.
About principal classes -- Principal classes are CI classes that your organization treats as business-critical. In CMDB success advisor, the CI classes you select define the Data Foundations advisor scope.
CI class recommendations -- CMDB success advisor analyzes your instance's historical data to recommend which CI classes should be in your Data Foundations scope.
Set recommendation criteria -- Create the sn_cmdb_advisor.principal_class_recommendation_criteria system property to filter which CI classes CMDB success advisor considers when generating principal class recommendations for the Data Foundations advisor.
Advisor setup -- The Data Foundations advisor dashboard provides tools to define your principal class scope, monitor CI data quality, and drive targeted improvements.
Get started with dashboard setup -- The Data Foundations advisor dashboard can be configured automatically on installation or upgrade, or manually through the CMDB success advisor landing page.
Automatic dashboard setup -- CMDB success advisor can automatically configure the Data Foundations advisor dashboard on installation or upgrade, giving you immediate access to pre-configured CMDB health insights without manual setup.
Manual dashboard setup -- If the Data Foundations advisor dashboard was not configured automatically, set it up manually by selecting the principal classes that define the Data Foundations scope.
Manage advisor scope -- After the Data Foundations advisor dashboard is configured, you can update the principal class scope to keep it aligned with your goals, and resolve discrepancies when classes are changed outside the advisor.
Manage principal classes -- Add or remove CI classes from the Data Foundations advisor scope to keep it aligned with your organization's current goals.
Principal class sync -- When other tools or processes add or remove principal classes outside the advisor scope, the Data Foundations advisor displays a notification prompting you to review and update the scope.
Resolve out-of-sync state -- Resolve a principal class sync discrepancy by reviewing and updating the Data Foundations advisor scope in the Set principal classes dialog box.
Monitor foundational data quality -- The CMDB success advisor for Data Foundations dashboard enables CMDB administrators to identify and address data quality issues specific to principal classes in the Configuration Management Database (CMDB).
Improve foundational data quality -- The Remediation actions panel available for a chart in the CMDB success advisor dashboard for Data Foundations suggests targeted actions to address Data Foundations data quality issues and improve the overall quality of your Configuration Management Database (CMDB).
Analyze data integrations -- Improve Data Foundations coverage by analyzing existing and suggested data integrations, including Discovery patterns and Service Graph Connectors.
Review -- Review both existing and suggested Discovery patterns and Service Graph Connectors to improve your Data Foundations data coverage.
Evaluate -- Identify supported principal classes and attributes from a Discovery pattern or Service Graph Connector to evaluate data coverage and upgrade requirements.
View suggested integrations -- View integrations recommended for your Data Foundations advisor scope that are not yet installed, to identify opportunities to improve CI data coverage for your principal classes.
Analyze CMDB settings -- Monitor and optimize Configuration Management Database (CMDB) settings that support configuration item (CI) data quality, Common Service Data Model (CSDM) alignment, and Data Foundations outcomes.
Evaluate -- Identify and evaluate settings including CMDB reconciliation rules, CI creation business rules, and CMDB Data Manager policies that support data quality and life cycle management for your principal classes.
Assess settings -- The Configuration Management Database (CMDB) and Data Foundations settings review provides a configuration-level assessment of the CMDB configuration item (CI) classes for your principal classes to support data quality, life cycle management, and integration accuracy.
Verify checklist -- Use this checklist to review Configuration Management Database (CMDB) and Data Foundations settings in CMDB success advisor that directly affect Data Foundations data quality, configuration item (CI) to asset synchronization, and life cycle alignment.
Data Foundations indicators -- Indicators enable viewing of high-level metrics that highlight data quality, completeness, and integration coverage issues across principal classes and configuration items (CIs).
Reference -- Reference topics provide additional information about CMDB success advisor components, configuration reviews, and data integration checklists.
Components installed -- Several types of components are installed with activation of the CMDB success advisor plugin, including tables and scheduled jobs.
Key concepts -- Familiarize yourself with the key terms and concepts to work with CMDB success advisor.
CI Class Manager -- Use the CI Class Manager to centrally view, create, or edit basic class definitions, class settings for Identification and Reconciliation Engine (IRE), CMDB Health, and manage some Service Mapping definitions.
CMDB CI Lifecycle Management (legacy) -- From the time of its creation until it's no longer needed, a CMDB CI would typically transition through several operational states. CI LIfecycle Management provides the mechanism to define states and actions for a CI and lets you apply appropriate actions based on a CI's state to tailor the management of CI lifecycle to business needs.
Get started with CI Lifecycle Management -- Follow these high level steps to get started and to track activities of the CI Lifecycle Management module of the CMDB application.
Lifecycle management APIs -- CI Lifecycle Management provides a set of state management APIs for manipulating CI operational states, and applying CI actions.
Components installed by CI Lifecycle Management -- Several types of components are installed by CI Lifecycle Management (included in the com.snc.cmdb plugin), including tables, scheduled jobs, and properties.
Activate the CI Lifecycle Management scheduled job -- When starting to use the CI Lifecycle Management module, ensure to activate the CI Lifecycle Management - Restore Internal State Management Tables scheduled job which is disabled by default. This scheduled job continuously checks and maintains the data integrity of all internal CI Lifecycle Management tables.
Define a CI action -- Define a CI Lifecycle Management CI action that can be later applied to CIs.
Define compatible CI actions -- Allow a CMDB CI Lifecycle Management operation in which two specified CI actions can be applied simultaneously to a CI.
Define a not-allowed CI action -- Define a restriction for CI Lifecycle Management in which a specified action is not allowed for a CI that is in a specified operational state.
Set priority for an operational state -- CI Lifecycle Management allows multiple operators or automations to simultaneously set different operational states for a CI. A CI can have only a single operational state, so in this case, the cumulative operational state of the CI is set to the one with the highest priority. It is recommended that you specify a priority for each operational state that you define so that a cumulative state can be correctly calculated.
Define a non-allowed operational transition -- Define a restriction for CI Lifecycle Management in which a specified CI cannot transition from one operational state to another.
View CMDB benchmarks -- CMDB calculates several CMDB Health benchmarks which then display in the Benchmarks dashboard. These benchmarks are based on various CMDB Health metrics, displaying monthly averages, trends, comparisons to industry averages of your ServiceNow peers, and global benchmarks.
Useful related lists in CI forms -- By default, the forms that display manageable configuration items (CI) - computers, printers, network gear, uninterruptible power supplies (UPS), and power distribution units (PDU) - provide a number of related lists for the form.
Platform Analytics Solution for CMDB (legacy) -- Platform Analytics Solutions contain preconfigured dashboards. These dashboards contain actionable data visualizations that help you improve your business processes and practices.
Now Assist for Configuration Management Database (CMDB) -- Use ServiceNow Now Assist for Configuration Management Database (CMDB) to improve the quality of CMDB data, search the CMDB quickly, find and remedy issues with Service Graph Connector import sets, and several other processes.
Explore -- With the Now Assist for Configuration Management Database (CMDB) application, you can use Agentic AI to search the CMDB, summarize discovery, ownership and related information for a CI, and fix failed SGC import sets. You can also follow step-by-step guidance to help you remediate duplicate CIs, improve CMDB data accuracy, completeness, and health .
Supporting information -- Get a quick overview of the important information that is related to the Now Assist for CMDB application.
Set up Now Assist for CMDB 3.0 -- Configure the Now Assist for CMDB application so users can benefit from Agentic workflows, agents, and skills.
Set up Now Assist for CMDB before v3.0 -- Configure the Now Assist for CMDB application so users can benefit from Agentic workflows, agents, and skills.
Set up Search CMDB -- Review and configure the settings of the Search CMDB agentic workflow.
Set up CI summarization -- Review and configure the settings of the Now Assist for Configuration Management Database (CMDB) CI summarization skill to restrict the availability of the skill to certain users or conditions.
Set up summarize CMDB readiness -- Review and configure the settings of the summarize CMDB readiness skill to control its availability and to enable an AI-generated summary of the CMDB success advisor dashboard data.
Activate the CMDB MCP server -- Enable Al agents and other clients to securely access data and perform actions using the Model Context Protocol (MCP).
Set up SGC diagnosis -- Review and configure the settings of the Service Graph Connector diagnosis skill.
Use generative AI skills -- Use Now Assist for CMDB skills to view a concise summary of key CI data, to help you to resolve deduplication tasks, and several other processes.
Summarize CI data -- View a concise summary of key CI data. You can select the CI on a CI form, in a workspace page, or on any list view. The summary can include discovery data, ownership, and key related items such as open incidents, alerts, problems, upcoming change requests, and security vulnerabilities. Additionally, the summary lists the service instances that the CI is part of.
Summarize CMDB readiness -- View an AI-generated summary of the CMDB success advisor for HAM dashboard data. The summary highlights the key findings on CMDB data accuracy, completeness, and health, and recommends remediation actions to address the findings.
Search the Service Graph database -- Now Assist for CMDB uses the search result classifier skill to analyze your search criteria, identify and apply implicit filters, determine the optimum search method (keyword search or query generation), query Service Graph data, and then display the results. You then have the option to refine the search using natural language in the Now Assist panel.
View CI details on CI forms -- Now Assist answers your questions on CI classes and attributes to help you work in CI forms, dashboards, home pages, and other views on the workspace.
View CI details on the Explore CI view -- Now Assist answers your questions on CI classes and attributes to help you work in CI forms, dashboards, home pages, and other views on the workspace.
Manage de-duplication tasks -- Resolve deduplication tasks with support from the Now Assist Manage duplicate CIs skill. CMDB administrators follow step-by-step guidance to perform remediation, and can preview remediation results before applying a template.
Resolve de-duplication tasks -- Now Assist recommends resolutions for duplication tasks by automating the choices that a user would typically make. Now Assist makes recommendations for the main CI, attribute relationship, and related item values to merge, and duplicate CI actions to perform. The process enhances accuracy and greatly reduces the time and effort needed to address CI duplication.
Diagnose failed SGC import sets -- To reduce debugging and resolution time and effort, the Service Graph Connector diagnosis skill generates summaries of errors and recommendations for resolving processing errors with SGC import sets.
Use agentic workflows -- Users with the sn_cmdb_user role can access several Now Assist for CMDB agentic workflows.
Create a CI -- The Create configuration item agentic workflow accepts your natural language request to manually generate a valid CI in the class that you specify.
Advice on CMDB governance -- Data governance can be an overwhelming task. The Provide advice on CMDB governance agentic workflow supports data admins and owners by methodically working through the many-faceted process of improving CMDB data accuracy, completeness, and health. The objective is to help users to trust the data that they use for their work.
Get advice on CMDB governance -- Work through the process of improving CMDB data accuracy, completeness, and health. The objective is to help users to trust the data that they use for their work.
Analyzing the impact of a change or incident -- The analyze impact agentic workflow uses generative AI to identify which upstream services and configuration items (CIs) are likely to be affected by an incident or by a proposed change before it is approved. The skill reasons about propagation likelihood based on CMDB dependency topology and the nature of the change. The skill returns a structured list with impact levels and reasoning.
Analyze change and incident impact -- Use the impact analysis skill to identify upstream services and CIs likely to be affected by a proposed change. Invoke the skill from a change record or directly with a CI and description to receive a prioritized impact assessment with severity levels and reasoning.
Search the CMDB -- The Search CMDB agentic workflow enables you to search for CIs by specifying any of several attributes of the CIs of interest. The workflow accepts your natural language request, verifies your search goal, and then, depending on the information you provided, generates a keyword search, a single-table search with dot walks, or a multi-table search that involves relationship navigation. The workflow can infer CI relationship data to generate an appropriate query.
Determine which SGC to use -- Sometimes you're not sure which integration to use to capture CI data. When you provide Now Assist with then name of a particular CI class, it can recommend the data sources or Service Graph Connectors and ingestion sources that can best populate CMDB data.
Reference -- Reference topics provide additional information about the property settings that you use to configure and administer Now Assist for CMDB.
Property settings -- List of system properties for the agents used by Now Assist for CMDB agents.
Analyze impact agentic workflow reference -- Reference information for the analyze impact agentic workflow, including input modes, output schema, supported record types, constraints, and system properties.
Reference -- The topics in this section provide various reference details for CMDB.
Domain separation and Configuration Management Database (CMDB) -- Domain separation is supported in the CMDB. Domain separation enables you to separate data, processes, and administrative tasks into logical groupings called domains. You can control several aspects of this separation, including which users can see and access data.
List of classes added by the CMDB CI Class Models app -- Alphabetical list of classes that are added by the CMDB CI Class Models ServiceNow Store app. The app adds class models (name, label, and a description of the type of information stored in the table) to the base-system CMDB. The app can also update the label (display name) of an existing base class.
CMDB APIs (CMDB SDK) -- Use CMDB APIs to create, update, and read operations on the CMDB. Domain separation is supported in CMDB APIs.
Quick start tests for Configuration Management Database (CMDB) -- Validate that Configuration Management Database (CMDB) still works after you make any configuration change such as apply an upgrade or develop an application. Copy and customize these quick start tests to pass when using your instance-specific data.
CMDB glossary -- Texts associated with CMDB, such as UI text and core CMDB documentation, use many terms that are important to understand in the context of CMDB.
CSDM -- The CSDM is the data model that admins should follow when they set up ServiceNow products and applications. The standards for defining configuration items (CIs) and relationships between CIs in the CMDB help to promote that your data resides in the appropriate CMDB tables. The result is maximum value from ServiceNow AI Platform applications.
Explore -- The CSDM is the data model that admins should follow when they set up ServiceNow products and applications. The standards for defining configuration items (CIs) and relationships between CIs in the CMDB help to promote that your data resides in the appropriate CMDB tables. The result is maximum value from ServiceNow AI Platform applications.
Products that benefit from CSDM -- Following the CSDM guidelines generates significant benefits in impact analysis, risk analysis, and business continuity.
CSDM data domains -- The CSDM is the data model that admins should follow when they set up ServiceNow products and applications. The standards for defining configuration items (CIs) and relationships between CIs in the CMDB help to promote that your data resides in the appropriate CMDB tables. The result is maximum value from ServiceNow AI Platform applications.
Foundation domain -- Tables in the Foundation domain contain base data that is referenced from or to objects in the other CSDM domains. Before you can use ServiceNow products, you must populate foundational data.
Ideation & Strategy domain -- The Ideation & Strategy domain represents the ideas, concepts, and considerations for both the creation of new or additional services as well as improvements and enhancements to existing services. These capabilities are part of Strategic Portfolio Management (SPM).
Design & Planning domain -- Enterprise architects and digital product owners work on the design and planning of digital products that your organization can either buy or build.
Build & Integration domain -- Development teams use the tables in the Build & Integration domain during the build effort (systems development life cycle — AGILE DEVELOPMENT) of digital products. The tables represent the logical development details of the enterprise applications (digital products) to be deployed and used by your organization. These are not operational CIs.
Service Delivery domain -- The Service Delivery domain represents the overall end-to-end service delivery system that includes the infrastructure, technologies, integration patterns (infrastructure, systems, data, processes, dependency models), service delivery networks, and operational models. Together, these items deliver the services that conform to CSDM to internal and external users and organizations.
Service Consumption domain -- Internal or external consumers can request business services through the request catalogs in the Service Consumption domain. The business service offerings in the request catalogs are the deployed digital products in the Service Delivery domain. Business relationship managers and customer service managers might sell or even consume elements of the Service Delivery domain.
Manage Portfolio domain -- The Manage Portfolio domain is a layer on top of the CSDM conceptual model that interacts with the other CSDM domains. The typical user, a service owner, might be responsible for services in more than one domain.
Configure -- Activate and configure CSDM capabilities.
CSDM plugin -- Activate the CSDM plugin so you can begin implementing the CSDM data model.
Configure Data Foundations dashboard -- Use the CSDM Data Foundations dashboard to monitor and evaluate key foundational metrics of the CSDM framework.
Synchronize existing data -- You complete several tasks to confirm that your existing application data migrates successfully to the required tables in the CMDB.
Support for synchronization -- Several features help you to promote accuracy and completeness for the process of syncing legacy data with life-cycle data in the CSDM framework.
Legacy status values -- Several legacy statuses are automatically mapped to the Life Cycle Stage and Life Cycle Stage Status fields.
Implement -- Following the CSDM framework ensures that you meet your primary goal of consistent accuracy in reporting and analytics so you can effectively manage your digital environment.
Synchronize life cycle -- You can align life-cycle values for each product instance on the asset, CI, and IBI tables. A one-time process moves legacy status values for asset and CI across the platform to standard CSDM life-cycle value pairs (life cycle stage and life cycle stage status). Business rules then run regularly to promote identical IBI, asset, and CI life-cycle data for each product instance.
Synchronize legacy data -- You can align life-cycle values for each product instance on the asset, CI, and IBI tables. A one-time process moves legacy status values for asset and CI across the platform to standard CSDM life-cycle value pairs (life cycle stage and life cycle stage status). Business rules then run regularly to promote identical IBI, asset, and CI life-cycle data for each product instance.
Migrate legacy data -- You can align life-cycle values for each product instance on the asset, CI, and IBI tables. A one-time process moves legacy status values for asset and CI across the platform to standard CSDM life-cycle value pairs (life cycle stage and life cycle stage status). Business rules then run regularly to promote identical IBI, asset, and CI life-cycle data for each product instance.
Group assignment attributes -- To empower a particular user group to manage a collection of CIs or CI classes, set group assignment attributes through the Technology management offering or the CI Class Manager. The operation synchronizes the group attribute data across all CIs that belong to the specified CI class or groups of CIs.
Set groups for CIs -- Synchronize group assignment attributes on entire CI classes and individual CIs using the CI Class Manager.
Groups for technology management offerings -- Synchronize group assignment attributes on entire CI classes and individual CIs by creating a dynamic CI group for use by a Technology management offering.
Foundation stage -- In the Foundation stage of implementing the CSDM framework, admins prepare the referential data that enables accurate reporting to support good business decisions. Use the base-system tables when you begin implementing the CSDM to derive the highest value from your ServiceNow products and the ServiceNow AI Platform.
Crawl stage -- In the Crawl stage, you work on base-system CMDB tables that are associated with IT Service Management (ITSM).
Walk stage -- In the Walk stage, you identify and populate the network infrastructure CIs and applications that your organization's technical teams support.
Run stage -- In the Run stage, you set up the relationship between a technology and the business that sells and consumes the technology.
Fly stage -- When you reach the Fly stage, you have accomplished all or most of the process of implementing the CSDM framework. The fly stage completes the process.
Navigate -- The CSDM is the data model that admins should follow when they set up ServiceNow products and applications. The standards for defining configuration items (CIs) and relationships between CIs in the CMDB help to promote that your data resides in the appropriate CMDB tables. The result is maximum value from ServiceNow AI Platform applications.
CSDM Data Foundations dashboard -- The CSDM Data Foundations dashboard displays key CSDM indicators on a single page to help you get the full benefit from your ServiceNow AI Platform products.
Service instance dashboard -- The Service instance dashboard enables you to monitor and manage service instances (service instances were formerly called application services) to confirm that they are fully configured and are populated in the CMDB.
Apply CSDM guidelines -- ServiceNow products expect that CMDB data is organized according to CSDM guidelines and they benefit from that organization.
Reference -- Reference topics provide detailed descriptions of tables, properties, forms, and roles that are used in the CSDM framework.
CSDM resources -- Resources and videos that complement the documentation.
CSDM glossary -- Most ServiceNow products and ServiceNow AI Platform applications align closely with the Common Service Data Model. This table defines terms as they are used across the ServiceNow AI Platform.
Mapping data to CMDB tables -- The objects in the conceptual CSDM framework must map to the physical model objects (CIs and CI class tables) in the CMDB. You can navigate in the platform to see dictionary attributes.
CI relationships -- For configuration management to be most effective, establish relationships between the objects and CIs in the conceptual CSDM.
Synchronizing life-cycle values -- Your organization gains significant value from your ServiceNow AI Platform applications when you take advantage of the option to directly map legacy status values to CSDM life cycle stage and life cycle stage status values and auto-synchronize the values going forward.
Life cycle mapping form -- Use the Life Cycle Mapping module to specify how existing legacy status values should be converted to CSDM life-cycle value pairs (life cycle stage and life cycle stage status). You map both asset and CI legacy status values to life-cycle value pairs.
Foundation tab on the dashboard -- The Foundation tab on the CSDM Data Foundations dashboard identifies data that might be missing from the CMDB.
Auto-generate product models for logical CIs -- Use the CSDM Product Model Assignment job to auto-generate a product model record (application model, service model, or software model) for each logical CI that is not yet associated with a product model. Product models are ideal for associating CIs that are parts of a single digital product.
Life-cycle terms -- Most ServiceNow products and ServiceNow AI Platform applications align closely with the Common Service Data Model. This table defines terms as they are used across the ServiceNow AI Platform.
Document and contract life cycle -- The document and contract life-cycle value pairs represent the overall life cycle of document assets (contracts) and CIs (business process documentation) as related to their products. The life-cycle values for the document and contract life-cycle process are visible only in tables related to document entities in Contracts and CMDB.
Life-cycle of contracts -- The document and contract life-cycle value pairs represent the overall life cycle of document assets (contracts) and CIs (business process documentation) as related to their products. The life-cycle values for the document and contract life-cycle process are visible only in tables related to document entities in Contracts and CMDB.
Tangible/physical life cycle -- The tangible/physical life-cycle states represent the overall life cycle of physical assets and CIs as related to their products. Tangible/physical assets are physical items that are stocked, for example computers, monitors, and keyboards. The stages and statuses for the tangible/physical life-cycle process are visible only in hardware-related tables in Asset Management and the CMDB.
Life cycle of tangible/physical CIs -- The tangible/physical life-cycle states represent the overall life cycle of physical assets and CIs as related to their products. Tangible/physical assets are physical items that are stocked, for example computers, monitors, and keyboards. The stages and statuses for the tangible/physical life-cycle process are visible only in hardware-related tables in Asset Management and the CMDB.
Retiring a service instance -- Because a service instance might depend on a hardware (tangible/physical) device that other service instances depend on, you must take care when retiring a service instance.
Location life cycle -- The values for the location life-cycle process reflect the locations used by your organization and are visible only in the common data locations table.
Life-cycle of locations -- The values for the location life-cycle process reflect the locations used by your organization and are visible only in the common data locations table.
Intangible/logical life cycle -- The intangible/logical life-cycle value pairs represent the overall life cycle of logical assets and CIs as related to their products. A logical or software asset includes items like applications, services, and licenses. The life cycle stage and life cycle stage status values of logical items are visible only in tables related to intangible/logical items in Asset Management and the CMDB.
Life-cycle of intangible/logical entities -- The intangible/logical life-cycle value pairs represent the overall life cycle of logical assets and CIs as related to their products. A logical or software asset includes items like applications, services, and licenses. The life cycle stage and life cycle stage status values of logical items are visible only in tables related to intangible/logical items in Asset Management and the CMDB.
Product life cycle -- The product life-cycle value pairs represent the overall life cycle of a product model, a specific version, or a product configuration. The life-cycle values for the product life-cycle process are visible only in Product (Models) tables.
Life-cycle of product entities -- The product life-cycle value pairs represent the overall life cycle of a product model, a specific version, or a product configuration. The life-cycle values for the product life-cycle process are visible only in Product (Models) tables.
Service instances (Application services) -- Understand service instances (application services), learn about different application service types and how multiple ServiceNow business units and products use them.
Create a Service instance -- Create an application service to adhere to Common Service Data Model standards and to standardize the organization, maintenance, and monitoring of services in your organization.
top-down discovery -- Use top-down discovery to populate an application service. This discovery method deploys discovery patterns to find configuration items (CIs) belonging to the service and connections between these CIs. Pattern-based discovery creates precise and complete service instances that reliably represent the service-aware view of your organization's IT infrastructure.
Dynamic CI Group -- The Dynamic CI Group method for populating an application service, automatically generates a dynamic CI group. The members of the CMDB group that the dynamic CI group is based on, populates the application service. The application service continuously synchronizes with the CMDB group to reflect any changes in membership in the CMDB group.
Tags -- Use tags that help categorize and organize configuration items (CIs) in your organization to populate an service instance. Tag-based mapping doesn't require configuring credentials or providing users with elevated rights. Tag-based population method requires the Service Mapping feature of ITOM Visibility.
Manual -- The Manual method for populating an application service, is based on selecting an entry point CI, which lets users access the application service. To populate the application service, you then manually add CIs to the new application service.
Dynamic Service -- The Dynamic Service method for populating an application service generates a dynamic application service. A dynamic application service automatically updates to reflect any changes to CI relationships in the CMDB CI Relationship [cmdb_rel_ci] table.
Service instance dashboard -- Use insights from the Service instance dashboard to reduce the number of incomplete Service instances by populating them and adding missing data. To use service instances effectively, ensure that service instances are fully configured and are populated.
Convert business services to application services -- Unify the way you manage services in the organization by converting manually created records in the Service [cmdb_ci_service] table into application services. Conversion lets you streamline the different types of services in your organization, leverage ITOM Visibility capabilities, and align with the Common Service Data Model (CSDM). The conversion is irreversible: You can't transform application services back into business services.
Convert business services to application services in bulk -- Unify the way you manage services in the organization by converting manually created records in the Service [cmdb_ci_service] table into application services. Conversion lets you streamline the different types of services in your organization, leverage ITOM Visibility capabilities, and align with the Common Service Data Model (CSDM). The conversion is irreversible: You can't transform application services back into business services.
Convert an individual business service to an application service -- Unify the way you manage services in the organization by converting manually created records in the Service [cmdb_ci_service] table into application services. Conversion lets you streamline the different types of services in your organization, leverage ITOM Visibility capabilities, and align with the Common Service Data Model (CSDM). The conversion is irreversible: You can't transform application services back into business services.
Convert legacy manual services to dynamic application services -- Unify the way that you manage services in your organization by converting legacy manual services into dynamic application services. Conversion lets you streamline the different types of services in your organization, leverage ITOM capabilities, and align with the Common Service Data Model (CSDM).
Manually add CIs -- Add configuration items to manually created application services or to services discovered by Service Mapping.
Manually update an application service with changes from the CMDB -- Ensure that an service instance is up-to-date and reflects all the latest changes to its configuration items (CIs). Regularly update application services to reflect any changes to CIs and their relationships in the CMDB.
Link application services -- You can manually link two application services by adding a reference to one application service into another application service. The service that contains the reference, becomes a dependent service. The service that you include as a reference is a contained service. You can link application services to create dependencies for impact monitoring in Event Management.
Group application services -- Organize application services by groups to perform actions simultaneously on multiple services, and to control user access to services. You can use Event Management to track service health by service groups.
Control user access to application services -- Assign user roles to service groups to grant users access to application services in your organization. Your organization may restrict access to some services for security or secrecy reasons.
View an application service map in base system -- An application service map provides a visualization of data for the CIs comprising an application service, and the relationships and connections between these CIs.
View the change history of application services in classic Service Mapping -- You can view the changes made to an application service as a whole and to the individual configuration items (CIs) comprising the service. Change history is useful for maintenance, planning, or troubleshooting procedures.
Compare two versions of an application service in classic Service Mapping -- You can see a summary of application service changes at a glance by comparing two versions of an application service. This feature is useful for checking the application service status before and after a certain change or problem.
Use application services APIs -- Application services provide APIs that let you perform operations such as creating and updating an service instance, populating it with CIs from the CMDB, and retrieving details from an existing service instance.
Components installed with application services -- Several types of components are installed with activation of the Application Service [com.snc.cmdb.it_service] plugin, including tables, user roles, and scheduled jobs.
Integration Commons for CMDB -- The Integration Commons for CMDB application contains the CMDB Integrations Dashboard and a set of Robust Transform Engine (RTE) transforms and script includes.
CMDB Integrations Dashboard -- You can use the CMDB Integrations Dashboard that provides a central view of status, processing results, and processing errors of all installed Service Graph Connectors and any custom integrations created in IntegrationHub ETL run.
Access CMDB Integrations Dashboard -- You can use the CMDB Integrations Dashboard that provides a central view of status, processing results, and processing errors of all installed Service Graph Connectors and any custom integrations created in IntegrationHub ETL run.
Operation types -- The Robust Transform Engine (RTE) operation types are common operation methods for use in ETL without having to write your own complex data transformations.
Template scripts -- The Robust Transform Engine (RTE) transforms are templated operations included within the Integration Commons for CMDB (sn_cmdb_int_util) store app.
Configuring ADM adapter -- You can configure the Application Dependency Mapping (ADM) adapter to populate running processes, TCP connections, and applications into CMDB.
Accessing connection details -- The common connection framework (CCF) included within the Integration Commons for CMDB (sn_cmdb_int_util) store app enables you to access connection details for Service Graph Connectors.
Managing CMDB data deletion -- The Integration Commons for CMDB (sn_cmdb_int_util) store app uses post-script and transform map methods to remove imported Configuration Management Database (CMDB) records that were deleted later from the source third-party application.
Partition size computation -- Integration Commons for CMDB supports computed partition size for the parallel loading framework, if supported in a Service Graph Connector.
Quick start tests -- Validate that integrations for CMDB pass validation and still work after you make any configuration changes such as applying an upgrade or developing an application.
IntegrationHub ETL -- Use the IntegrationHub ETL store app to create and manage ETL transform maps, which integrate third-party data into the CMDB or into non-CMDB tables without compromising the integrity of data. IntegrationHub ETL provides a simplified user interface that guides you through the integration process end-to-end, including a test integration run of sample data.
Create an ETL transform map -- IntegrationHub ETL provides a guided setup which walks you through the completion of all necessary tasks for creating an ETL transform map for a specific integration.
Import source data and specify basic details -- IntegrationHub ETL provides a guided setup which walks you through the completion of all necessary tasks for creating an ETL transform map for a specific integration.
Preview and prepare data -- IntegrationHub ETL provides a guided setup which walks you through the completion of all necessary tasks for creating an ETL transform map for a specific integration.
Map data columns to CMDB classes and attributes -- IntegrationHub ETL provides a guided setup which walks you through the completion of all necessary tasks for creating an ETL transform map for a specific integration.
Add Relationships -- IntegrationHub ETL provides a guided setup which walks you through the completion of all necessary tasks for creating an ETL transform map for a specific integration.
Preview mapping results -- IntegrationHub ETL provides a guided setup which walks you through the completion of all necessary tasks for creating an ETL transform map for a specific integration.
Provide integration schedule -- IntegrationHub ETL provides a guided setup which walks you through the completion of all necessary tasks for creating an ETL transform map for a specific integration.
Transform types in IntegrationHub ETL -- IntegrationHub ETL provides a guided setup which walks you through the completion of all necessary tasks for creating an ETL transform map for a specific integration.
Add before and after scripts -- Add custom before and after scripts for a data source of a CMDB integration application. Those scripts provide access to the input and output payloads of IRE. When a CMDB integration invokes Identification and Reconciliation Engine (IRE), those scripts run before and after IRE processes the integration payload.
Duplicate an ETL transform map -- Use an existing ETL transform map if you need to create a map that is mostly similar to that existing map. Select an existing map, specify a new data source for the new duplicate map, and then change or retain other settings such as data transforms.
Getting started with Service Graph Connectors -- Service Graph Connectors, including API Service Graph Connectors, are predefined integrations that ingest third-party data and API data into the Configuration Management Database (CMDB) from various domains, such as security, servers, software or monitoring, Internet of Things (IoT), and cloud.
Service Graph Connectors -- You can use a Service Graph Connector to import and integrate third-party data into CMDB and non-CMDB tables.
Active Directory -- The Service Graph Connector for Active Directory retrieves computer and software information from the Microsoft Active Directory (AD) product and imports it into the Configuration Management Database (CMDB) in your instance using Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP).
Configure connections -- Configure your Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) connections and verify them, set up scheduled imports, and optionally add multiple instances with the Guided Setup.
Targeted CMDB classes -- When you complete setting up the connection, you can configure the integration to periodically pull data. The data is saved in tables that extend from the Configuration item [cmdb_ci] table.
Akamai API Security -- Use the Service Graph Connector for Akamai API Security to integrate the APIs discovered by Akamai into your ServiceNow instance to support various API management use cases.
Configure using SGC Central -- Use the playbook available with the SGC Central application to set up the Service Graph Connector for Akamai API Security for pulling in Akamai API Security data into the CMDB.
Targeted CMDB classes -- When you complete setting up the connection, you can configure the integration to periodically pull data from Akamai API Security. The data is saved in tables that extend from the Configuration item [cmdb_ci] table.
Accessing connection details -- You can access the connection details of the Service Graph Connector for Akamai API Security in a single view using the common connection framework (CCF) included within the Integration Commons for CMDB (sn_cmdb_int_util) store app.
Access connection details -- You can access the connection details of the Service Graph Connector for Akamai API Security in a single view using the common connection framework (CCF) included within the Integration Commons for CMDB (sn_cmdb_int_util) store app.
AWS -- Use the Service Graph Connector for AWS to securely bring in Amazon Web Services (AWS) data into your ServiceNow instance.
Configure the AWS environment -- Configure your Amazon Web Services (AWS) environment to import data using the Service Graph Connector for AWS.
AWS resources used by the connector -- Get familiar with the AWS concepts to learn how the Service Graph Connector for AWS is integrated with Amazon Web Services (AWS).
Download the AWS scripts -- Download the AWS scripts included within the guided setup of the Service Graph Connector for AWS.
Configure using SGC Central -- Use the playbook available with the SGC Central application to set up the Service Graph Connector for AWS for pulling in AWS data into the CMDB
Configure using guided setup -- Set up the AWS environment and scheduled jobs to pull in AWS data into the CMDB.
Data mapping -- Data from the AWS data sources is mapped and transformed into the ServiceNow CMDB Configuration Item (CI) class definitions using the Robust Transform Engine (RTE). Data is inserted into the ServiceNow CMDB using the Identification and Reconciliation Engine (IRE).
Target CMDB classes -- When you complete setting up the connection, you can configure the integration to periodically pull data from AWS. The data is saved in tables that extend from the Configuration item [cmdb_ci] table.
Quick start tests -- Validate that Service Graph Connector for AWS still works after you make any configuration change such as applying an upgrade or developing an application. Copy and customize these quick start tests to pass when using your instance-specific data.
Accessing connection details -- You can access the connection details of the Service Graph Connector for AWS in a single view using the common connection framework (CCF) included within the Integration Commons for CMDB (sn_cmdb_int_util) store app.
Access connection details -- You can access the connection details of the Service Graph Connector for AWS in a single view using the common connection framework (CCF) included within the Integration Commons for CMDB (sn_cmdb_int_util) store app.
Additional features -- Use the additional features available within the Service Graph Connector for AWS to maximize its use for importing data.
Enable optimized deletion -- Enable the sn_aws_integ.enableOptimizedDeletion system property for the optimized deletion of retired configuration items (CIs) in AWS during full import of data.
Enable optimized data source performance -- When the SG-AWS-Software-Inventory data source is being used, enable the sn_aws_integ.is_software_inventory_enabled system property for optimizing the performance of the SG-AWS-SendCommand and SG-AWS-SSM-GetS3Object data sources.
Handling memory utilization errors -- You can use the SgAwsApplicationProperties script include to avoid memory utilization errors when importing a large number of configuration items (CIs) from an AWS instance via the Service Graph Connector for AWS.
Set partition size -- When using the SG-AWS-Image-Private, SG-AWS-Tags, SG-AWS-SendCommand, and AWS-SSM-GetS3Object data sources, you can optimize their performance by setting the partition size in the aws_account_partition_size connection property.
Disable parallel loading -- You can disable parallel loading for specific data sources in the Service Graph Connector for AWS.
Handling parallel deletion -- Parallel deletion of configuration items (CIs) in the Service Graph Connector for AWS optimizes performance.
Enable mapping of Cloud Os Image -- Enable the sn_cmdb_ci_class.use_single_cloud_os_image system property to add Cloud Os Image data to the Cloud Image [cmdb_ci_cloud_os_image] table instead of adding the data to the Image [cmdb_ci_os_template] table.
Reference -- Reference topics provide additional information about Service Graph Connector for AWS components.
Supported resource types -- Several AWS resource types are imported as CMDB data by the Service Graph Connector for AWS.
AWS discovery solutions comparison -- ITOM Visibility applications discover a variety of AWS resources and populate the relevant configuration item (CI) classes in the Configuration Management Database (CMDB) with their attributes.
Life cycle management of AWS resources -- Life cycle management in the Service Graph Connector for AWS monitors and updates the statuses of AWS resources throughout their entire life cycle, from creation to deletion.
Record removal process -- The Service Graph Connector for AWS uses the optimized deletion approach to manage removal of records.
Properties -- Service Graph Connector for AWS properties control the behavior of the connector.
ExtraHop -- Use the Service Graph Connector for ExtraHop to pull data from the ExtraHop application into your ServiceNow instance.
Configure -- Set up a REST message and scheduled jobs to import ExtraHop data into your CMDB.
Targeted CMDB classes -- When you complete setting up the connection, you can configure the integration to periodically pull data from ExtraHop. The data is saved in tables that extend from the Configuration item [cmdb_ci] table.
GCP -- Use the Service Graph Connector for GCP to ingest CMDB data from a Google Cloud Platform (GCP) project using the REST APIs.
Configure using SGC Central -- Use the playbook available with the SGC Central application to set up the Service Graph Connector for GCP for pulling in GCP project data into the CMDB.
Data mapping -- Data from the GCP data sources is mapped and transformed into the ServiceNow CMDB Configuration Item (CI) class definitions using the Robust Transform Engine (RTE). Data is inserted into the ServiceNow CMDB using the Identification and Reconciliation Engine (IRE).
Target CMDB classes -- When you complete setting up the connection, you can configure the integration to periodically pull data from a GCP project. The data is saved in tables that extend from the Configuration item [cmdb_ci] table.
Accessing connection details -- You can access the connection details of the Service Graph Connector for GCP in a single view using the common connection framework (CCF) included within the Integration Commons for CMDB (sn_cmdb_int_util) store app.
Access connection details -- You can access the connection details of the Service Graph Connector for GCP in a single view using the common connection framework (CCF) included within the Integration Commons for CMDB (sn_cmdb_int_util) store app.
Reference -- Reference topics provide additional information about Service Graph Connector for GCP components.
GCP discovery solutions comparison -- ITOM Visibility applications discover a variety of Google Cloud Platform (GCP) resources and populate the relevant configuration item (CI) classes in the Configuration Management Database (CMDB) with their attributes.
Deep discovery for GCP -- The SG-GCP Execute Patch Job and SG-GCP Get Patch Job scheduled import jobs enable deep discovery by running patch jobs at the GCP project level.
Life cycle management of GCP resources -- Life cycle management in the in the Service Graph Connector for GCP monitors and updates the statuses of GCP resources throughout their entire life cycle, from creation to deletion.
Record removal process -- The Service Graph Connector for GCP uses soft deletion and hard deletion to manage the removal of records.
Properties -- Service Graph Connector for GCP properties control the behavior of the connector.
Google Chromebooks -- Use the Service Graph Connector for Google Chromebooks to import device details from Chromebooks into the Configuration Management Database (CMDB).
Configure connections -- Set up scheduled import jobs to pull in Chromebook device data from the Google Console into your CMDB.
Targeted CMDB classes -- When you complete setting up the connection, you can configure the integration to periodically pull Google Console data from Chromebook devices. The data is saved in tables that extend from the Configuration item [cmdb_ci] table.
Infoblox -- Use the Service Graph Connector for Infoblox to pull data from an Infoblox instance into your ServiceNow instance.
Configure using SGC Central -- Use the playbook available with the SGC Central application to set up the Service Graph Connector for Infoblox for pulling in Infoblox data into the CMDB.
Data mapping -- Data from the Infoblox data source is mapped and transformed into the ServiceNow CMDB configuration item (CI) class definitions using the Robust Transform Engine (RTE). Data is inserted into the ServiceNow CMDB using the Identification and Reconciliation Engine (IRE).
Target CMDB classes -- When you complete setting up the connection, you can configure the integration to pull data periodically from Infoblox. The data is saved in tables that extend from the Configuration item [cmdb_ci] table.
Accessing connection details -- You can access the connection details of the Service Graph Connector for Infoblox in a single view using the common connection framework (CCF) included within the Integration Commons for CMDB (sn_cmdb_int_util) store app.
Access connection details -- You can access the connection details of the Service Graph Connector for Infoblox in a single view using the common connection framework (CCF) included within the Integration Commons for CMDB (sn_cmdb_int_util) store app.
Handling parallel data loading -- Parallel data loading in the Service Graph Connector for Infoblox optimizes performance.
Create table cleanup jobs -- Create table cleanup jobs to automate the cleanup of retired CIs from Service Graph Connector for Infoblox version 1.4.0 and earlier based on your organization's data retention requirements and integration dependencies.
Reference -- Reference topics provide additional information about Service Graph Connector for Infoblox components.
Life cycle management -- Life cycle management in the Service Graph Connector for Infoblox monitors and updates the statuses of Infoblox resources throughout their life cycle, from creation to deletion.
Properties -- Service Graph Connector for Infoblox properties control the behavior of the connector.
Jamf -- Use the Service Graph Connector for Jamf to pull data from Jamf into your ServiceNow instance.
Configure using SGC Central -- Use the playbook available with the SGC Central application to set up the Service Graph Connector for Jamf for pulling in Jamf data into the CMDB.
Configure using guided setup -- Set up authentication credentials and scheduled jobs to import Jamf data into your Configuration Management Database (CMDB).
Targeted CMDB classes -- When you complete setting up the connection, you can configure the integration to periodically pull data from Jamf. The data is saved in tables that extend from the Configuration item [cmdb_ci] table.
Accessing connection details -- You can access the connection details of the Service Graph Connector for Jamf in a single view using the common connection framework (CCF) included within the Integration Commons for CMDB (sn_cmdb_int_util) store app.
Access connection details -- You can access the connection details of the Service Graph Connector for Jamf in a single view using the common connection framework (CCF) included within the Integration Commons for CMDB (sn_cmdb_int_util) store app.
Configuring data synchronization -- You can configure the connection properties for synchronizing only delta data from a Jamf instance.
Disable delta synchronization -- You can configure the connection properties for synchronizing only delta data from a Jamf instance.
Properties -- Service Graph Connector properties control the behavior of connections.
Microsoft Azure -- Use the Service Graph Connector for Microsoft Azure to pull data from Microsoft Azure into your CMDB.
Configure using SGC Central -- Use the playbook available with the SGC Central application to set up the Service Graph Connector for Microsoft Azure for pulling in Microsoft Azure data into the CMDB.
Configure using guided setup -- Set up data sources and scheduled import jobs to pull in data from Azure into your CMDB.
Data mapping -- Data from the Azure data sources is mapped and transformed into the ServiceNow CMDB Configuration Item (CI) class definitions using the Robust Transform Engine (RTE). Data is inserted into the ServiceNow CMDB using the Identification and Reconciliation Engine (IRE).
Target CMDB classes -- When you complete setting up the connection, you can configure the integration to periodically pull data from Microsoft Azure. The data is saved in tables that extend from the Configuration item [cmdb_ci] table.
Quick start tests -- Validate that Service Graph Connector for Microsoft Azure still works after you make any configuration change such as applying an upgrade or developing an application. Copy and customize these quick start tests to pass when using your instance-specific data.
Accessing connection details -- You can access the connection details of the Service Graph Connector for Microsoft Azure in a single view using the common connection framework (CCF) included within the Integration Commons for CMDB (sn_cmdb_int_util) store app.
Access connection details -- You can access the connection details of the Service Graph Connector for Microsoft Azure in a single view using the common connection framework (CCF) included within the Integration Commons for CMDB (sn_cmdb_int_util) store app.
Additional features -- Use the additional features available within the Service Graph Connector for Microsoft Azure to maximize its use for importing data.
Configuring data synchronization -- You can configure the system property for synchronizing only delta data from an Azure instance.
Disable delta synchronization -- You can configure the system property for synchronizing only delta data from an Azure instance.
Enabling VM insights -- You must enable the VM insights feature in the Azure portal for collecting TCP and processes data using the Service Graph Connector for Microsoft Azure.
Reference -- Reference topics provide additional information about Service Graph Connector for Microsoft Azure components.
Microsoft Azure discovery solutions comparison -- ITOM Visibility applications discover a variety of Microsoft Azure resources and populate the relevant configuration item (CI) classes in the Configuration Management Database (CMDB) with their attributes.
Life cycle management of Microsoft Azure resources -- Life cycle management in the Service Graph Connector for Microsoft Azure monitors and updates the statuses of Azure resources throughout their entire life cycle, from creation to deletion.
Record removal process -- The Service Graph Connector for Microsoft Azure uses the Integration Commons record removal process for life cycle management during full data loads. For delta loads, life cycle management of records is based on updates from Microsoft Azure.
Properties -- Service Graph Connector for Microsoft Azure properties control the behavior of the connector.
Microsoft Defender for Endpoint -- Use the Service Graph Connector for Microsoft Defender Endpoint to pull data from machines protected by the Microsoft Defender for Endpoint security solution into your ServiceNow instance.
Configure using SGC Central -- Set up scheduled import jobs to pull in Microsoft Defender for Endpoint data into your Configuration Management Database (CMDB).
Configure using guided setup -- Pull in data from machines using the Microsoft Defender for Endpoint security solution into your Configuration Management Database (CMDB).
Targeted CMDB classes -- When you complete setting up the connection, you can configure the integration to pull data periodically from machines utilizing the Microsoft Defender for Endpoint security solution. The data is saved in tables that extend from the Configuration item [cmdb_ci] table.
Properties -- Service Graph Connector properties control the behavior of connections.
Accessing connection details -- You can access the connection details of the Service Graph Connector for Microsoft Defender Endpoint in a single view using the common connection framework (CCF) included within the Integration Commons for CMDB (sn_cmdb_int_util) store app.
Access connection details -- You can access the connection details of the Service Graph Connector for Microsoft Defender Endpoint in a single view using the common connection framework (CCF) included within the Integration Commons for CMDB (sn_cmdb_int_util) store app.
Life cycle management of Microsoft Defender for Endpoint resources -- Life cycle management in the Service Graph Connector for Microsoft Defender Endpoint monitors and updates the statuses of Microsoft Defender for Endpoint resources throughout their entire life cycle, from creation to deletion.
Microsoft Intune -- Use the Service Graph Connector for Microsoft Intune to pull data from the Microsoft Intune application into your ServiceNow instance.
Configure using SGC Central -- Use the playbook available with the SGC Central application to set up the Service Graph Connector for Microsoft Intune for pulling in Microsoft Intune data into the CMDB.
Configure using guided setup -- Set up authentication credentials and a scheduled job to import Microsoft Intune data into your CMDB.
Targeted CMDB classes -- When you complete setting up the connection, you can configure the integration to periodically pull data from Microsoft Intune. The data from the regular data sources (SG-Intune Computer, SG-Intune Devices, and SG-Intune Software) and the advanced data sources (SG-Intune Device Reports and SG-Intune Software Reports) is saved in tables that extend from the Configuration item [cmdb_ci] table.
Accessing connection details -- You can access the connection details of the Service Graph Connector for Microsoft Intune in a single view using the common connection framework (CCF) included within the Integration Commons for CMDB (sn_cmdb_int_util) store app.
Access connection details -- You can access the connection details of the Service Graph Connector for Microsoft Intune in a single view using the common connection framework (CCF) included within the Integration Commons for CMDB (sn_cmdb_int_util) store app.
Properties -- Service Graph Connector properties control the behavior of connections.
Microsoft SCCM -- Use the Service Graph Connector for Microsoft SCCM to pull data from Microsoft System Center Configuration Manager (SCCM) into your ServiceNow instance.
Configure using SGC Central -- Use the playbook available with the SGC Central application to set up the Service Graph Connector for Microsoft SCCM for pulling in Microsoft SCCM data into the CMDB.
Configure using guided setup -- Set up and validate data source connection credentials to import Microsoft SCCM data into your CMDB.
Targeted CMDB classes -- When you complete setting up the connection, you can configure the integration to periodically pull data from Microsoft SCCM. The data is saved in tables that extend from the Configuration item [cmdb_ci] table.
Upgrade to the latest version -- Upgrade your Service Graph Connector for Microsoft SCCM. When you upgrade versions, you can select the files that you want to transfer from the earlier version to the later version of the Service Graph Connector for Microsoft SCCM.
Enable software editions -- Enable software editions so that you can gather edition information for products such as Adobe Acrobat, Microsoft SQL Server, and Windows Exchange Server into the Service Graph Connector for Microsoft SCCM.
Accessing connection details -- You can access the connection details of the Service Graph Connector for Microsoft SCCM in a single view using the common connection framework (CCF) included within the Integration Commons for CMDB (sn_cmdb_int_util) store app.
Access connection details -- You can access the connection details of the Service Graph Connector for Microsoft SCCM in a single view using the common connection framework (CCF) included within the Integration Commons for CMDB (sn_cmdb_int_util) store app.
Configuring air gap connections -- The Service Graph Connector for Microsoft SCCM supports an air gap solution for networks that are configured in a manner that doesn't support a MID agent.
Air gap configuration in low-secure server -- Configure the air gap solution for the Service Graph Connector for Microsoft SCCM in your low-secure server after you finish the configuration in your high-secure server.
Air gap configuration in ServiceNow instance -- Configure the air gap solution for the Service Graph Connector for Microsoft SCCM in your ServiceNow instance after you finish the configuration in your high-secure and low-secure servers.
Test data load for air gap solution -- After you configure the air gap solution for the Service Graph Connector for Microsoft SCCM, test whether the Microsoft SCCM endpoint is accessible from the high-secure server.
Full data load for air gap solution -- After you verify that the test data load for the air gap solution for the Service Graph Connector for Microsoft SCCM is successful, you can perform a full data load.
Netskope -- The Service Graph Connector for Netskope pulls in asset inventory data (hardware and software) from the Netskope database into the Configuration Management Database (CMDB) application in your ServiceNow AI Platform instance.
Configure -- The guided setup for the Service Graph Connector for Netskope provides an organized sequence of tasks to configure the integration on your ServiceNow AI Platform instance.
Observability-AppDynamics -- Use the Service Graph Connector for Observability - AppDynamics to ingest CMDB data from an AppDynamics installation using REST APIs. Push events from AppDynamics into ServiceNow with Event Management.
Configure using SGC Central -- Set up scheduled import jobs to pull in AppDynamics data into your Configuration Management Database (CMDB).
Configure using guided setup -- Set up scheduled import jobs to pull in data from AppDynamics into your Configuration Management Database (CMDB).
Targeted CMDB classes -- When you complete setting up the connection, you can configure the integration to periodically pull data from AppDynamics. The data is saved in tables that extend from the Configuration item [cmdb_ci] table.
Accessing connection details -- You can access connection details for Service Graph Connector for Observability - AppDynamics using the common connection framework (CCF) included with the Integration Commons for CMDB (sn_cmdb_int_util) store app.
Access connection details -- You can access connection details for Service Graph Connector for Observability - AppDynamics using the common connection framework (CCF) included with the Integration Commons for CMDB (sn_cmdb_int_util) store app.
Observability-Datadog -- Use the Service Graph Connector for Observability - Datadog to ingest CMDB data from a Datadog installation using REST APIs. Push events from Datadog into ServiceNow with Event Management.
Data mapping -- Data from the Observability-Datadog data sources is mapped and transformed into the ServiceNow CMDB Configuration Item (CI) class definitions using the Robust Transform Engine (RTE). Data is inserted into the ServiceNow CMDB using the Identification and Reconciliation Engine (IRE).
Configure the connector -- Pull in data from Datadog into your Configuration Management Database (CMDB).
Targeted CMDB classes -- When you complete setting up the connection, the data is automatically pulled from Datadog. The data is saved in target tables.
Properties -- Observability-Datadog properties control the behavior of the connector.
Accessing connection details -- You can access the connection details of the Service Graph Connector for Observability - Datadog in a single view using the common connection framework (CCF) included within the Integration Commons for CMDB (sn_cmdb_int_util) store app.
Access connection details -- You can access the connection details of the Service Graph Connector for Observability - Datadog in a single view using the common connection framework (CCF) included within the Integration Commons for CMDB (sn_cmdb_int_util) store app.
Observability-Dynatrace -- Use the Service Graph Connector for Observability - Dynatrace to ingest CI data, events, metrics, and logs from Dynatrace into your ServiceNow instance.
Configure using SGC Central -- Set up scheduled import jobs to pull in Dynatrace data into your Configuration Management Database (CMDB).
Configure the connector using guided setup -- Use the Service Graph Connector for Observability - Dynatrace to ingest Configuration Management Database (CMDB) data from Dynatrace using REST APIs. This connector is the second generation of the Service Graph Connector for Observability - Dynatrace application developed by ServiceNow.
Data mapping -- Data from the Dynatrace data sources is mapped and transformed into the ServiceNow CMDB Configuration Item (CI) class definitions using the Robust Transform Engine (RTE). Data is inserted into the ServiceNow CMDB using the Identification and Reconciliation Engine (IRE).
Target CMDB classes -- When you complete setting up the connection, you can configure the integration to periodically pull data from Dynatrace. The data is saved in tables that extend from the Configuration item [cmdb_ci] table.
Set up push notifications -- Set up push notifications of events from Dynatrace into a ServiceNow instance that has the Service Graph Connector for Observability - Dynatrace installed.
Properties -- Service Graph Connector for Observability - Dynatrace properties control the behavior of the connector.
Accessing connection details -- You can access the connection details of the Service Graph Connector for Observability - Dynatrace in a single view using the common connection framework (CCF) included within the Integration Commons for CMDB (sn_cmdb_int_util) store app.
Access connection details -- You can access the connection details of the Service Graph Connector for Observability - Dynatrace in a single view using the common connection framework (CCF) included within the Integration Commons for CMDB (sn_cmdb_int_util) store app.
Observability - Dynatrace SaaS -- Use the Service Graph Connector for Observability - Dynatrace SaaS to integrate the data discovered by Dynatrace into your ServiceNow instance to support various use cases.
Configure using SGC Central -- Use the playbook in SGC Central to set up the Service Graph Connector for Observability - Dynatrace SaaS and pull Dynatrace data into your CMDB.
Data mapping -- Data from the Dynatrace data sources is mapped and transformed into the ServiceNow CMDB Configuration Item (CI) class definitions using the Robust Transform Engine (RTE). Data is inserted into the ServiceNow CMDB using the Identification and Reconciliation Engine (IRE).
Targeted CMDB classes -- When you complete setting up the connection, you can configure the integration to periodically pull data from Dynatrace. The data is saved in tables that extend from the Configuration item [cmdb_ci] table.
Properties -- Service Graph Connector for Observability - Dynatrace SaaS properties control the behavior of the connector.
Accessing connection details -- You can access the connection details of the Service Graph Connector for Observability - Dynatrace SaaS in a single view using the common connection framework (CCF) included within the Integration Commons for CMDB (sn_cmdb_int_util) store app.
Access the details of a Dynatrace SaaS connection -- You can access the connection details of the Service Graph Connector for Observability - Dynatrace SaaS in a single view using the common connection framework (CCF) included within the Integration Commons for CMDB (sn_cmdb_int_util) store app.
Observability - New Relic -- Use the Service Graph Connector for Observability - New Relic to ingest CMDB data from a New Relic installation using REST APIs. Push events from New Relic into ServiceNow with Event Management.
Configure using SGC Central -- Use the playbook available with the SGC Central application to set up the Service Graph Connector for Observability - New Relic for pulling in New Relic project data into the CMDB.
Targeted CMDB classes -- When you complete setting up the connection, you can configure the integration to periodically pull data from New Relic. The data is saved in tables that extend from the Configuration item [cmdb_ci] table.
Accessing connection details -- You can access the connection details of the Service Graph Connector for Observability - New Relic in a single view using the common connection framework (CCF) included within the Integration Commons for CMDB (sn_cmdb_int_util) store app.
Access connection details -- You can access the connection details of the Service Graph Connector for Observability - New Relic in a single view using the common connection framework (CCF) included within the Integration Commons for CMDB (sn_cmdb_int_util) store app.
OpenTelemetry -- Use the Service Graph Connector for OpenTelemetry to ingest Configuration Management Database (CMDB) data from the ServiceNow Cloud Observability (formerly Lightstep) application using REST APIs. Push events from the Cloud Observability application into ServiceNow with Event Management.
Configure -- Set up scheduled import jobs to pull in data from ServiceNow Cloud Observability (formerly Lightstep) into your Configuration Management Database (CMDB).
Target CMDB classes -- When you complete setting up the connection, you can configure the integration to periodically pull data from ServiceNow Cloud Observability (formerly Lightstep). The data is saved in tables that extend from the Configuration item [cmdb_ci] table.
Properties -- Service Graph Connector for OpenTelemetry properties control the behavior of the connector.
Linking inferred services -- Create inferred services relationships in your ServiceNow instance with other Cloud Observability application services as originally configured in the application by linking an inferred service configuration item (CI) in CMDB with an inferred service from the Cloud Observability application.
Link an inferred service -- Create inferred services relationships in your ServiceNow instance with other Cloud Observability application services as originally configured in the application by linking an inferred service configuration item (CI) in CMDB with an inferred service from the Cloud Observability application.
Accessing connection details -- You can access the connection details of the Service Graph Connector for OpenTelemetry in a single view using the common connection framework (CCF) included within the Integration Commons for CMDB (sn_cmdb_int_util) store app.
Access connection details -- You can access the connection details of the Service Graph Connector for OpenTelemetry in a single view using the common connection framework (CCF) included within the Integration Commons for CMDB (sn_cmdb_int_util) store app.
Qualys -- The Service Graph Connector for Qualys pulls in asset inventory data (hardware and software) from the Qualys database into the Configuration Management Database (CMDB) application in your ServiceNow AI Platform instance.
Configure connections -- Set up the Qualys environment and scheduled jobs to import in Qualys data into your Configuration Management Database (CMDB).
SGC for Qualys APIs -- Data from the Qualys data source fields is imported with the Global Asset API and the Asset Management and Tagging API.
Targeted CMDB classes -- When you complete setting up the connection, you can configure the integration to periodically pull data. The data is saved in tables that extend from the Configuration item [cmdb_ci] table. The Service Graph Connector for Qualys identifies and classifies information about various configuration Items (CIs).
Rapid7 -- The Service Graph Connector for Rapid7 pulls in asset inventory data (hardware and software) from the Rapid7 database into the Configuration Management Database (CMDB) application in your ServiceNow AI Platform instance.
Configure connections -- Configure your connections, set up scheduled imports, verify successful connections and optionally add multiple instances in the Guided Setup.
Targeted CMDB classes -- When you complete setting up the connection, you can configure the integration to periodically pull data. The data is saved in tables that extend from the Configuration item [cmdb_ci] table.
SentinelOne -- The Service Graph Connector for SentinelOne pulls in asset inventory data (hardware and software) from the SentinelOne database into the Configuration Management Database (CMDB) application in your ServiceNow AI Platform instance.
Configure connections -- The guided setup for the Service Graph Connector for SentinelOne provides an organized sequence of tasks to configure the integration on your ServiceNow AI Platform instance.
Targeted CMDB classes -- When you complete setting up the connection, you can configure the integration to periodically pull data. The data is saved in tables that extend from the Configuration item [cmdb_ci] table.
Splunk -- The Service Graph Connector for Splunk pulls in asset inventory data (hardware and software) from the Splunk database into the Configuration Management Database (CMDB) application in your ServiceNow AI Platform instance.
Configure -- Configure your connections, set up scheduled imports, verify successful connections and optionally add multiple instances in the Guided Setup.
SGC for Splunk add-on -- Import more detailed asset data with the Service Graph Connector for Splunk with an add-on developed by ServiceNow engineering. The add-on permits you to import data about your Windows and Linux assets.
Install SGC for Splunk add-on -- Install the Splunk add-on developed by ServiceNow engineering from splunkbase to search for Windows and Linux Assets.
Targeted CMDB tables -- When you complete setting up the connection, you can configure the integration to periodically pull data. The data is saved in tables that extend from the Configuration item [cmdb_ci] table.
SolarWinds -- Use the Service Graph Connector for SolarWinds to pull in data from the SolarWinds software into your ServiceNow instance.
Configure using SGC Central -- Use the playbook available with the SGC Central application to set up the Service Graph Connector for SolarWinds for pulling in SolarWinds data into the CMDB.
Targeted CMDB classes -- When you complete setting up the connection, you can configure the integration to periodically pull data from SolarWinds. The data is saved in tables that extend from the Configuration item [cmdb_ci] table.
Accessing connection details -- You can access the connection details of the Service Graph Connector for SolarWinds in a single view using the common connection framework (CCF) included within the Integration Commons for CMDB (sn_cmdb_int_util) store app.
Access connection details -- You can access the connection details of the Service Graph Connector for SolarWinds in a single view using the common connection framework (CCF) included within the Integration Commons for CMDB (sn_cmdb_int_util) store app.
Configuring air gap connections -- Air gap connections for the Service Graph Connector for SolarWinds enable safe and controlled data transfer without compromising security.
Air gap configuration in low-secure server -- Configure the air gap solution for the Service Graph Connector for SolarWinds in your low-secure server after you finish the configuration in your high-secure server.
Air gap configuration in ServiceNow instance -- Configure the air gap solution for the Service Graph Connector for SolarWinds in your ServiceNow instance after you finish the configuration in your high-secure and low-secure servers.
Test data load for air gap solution -- After you configure the air gap solution for the Service Graph Connector for SolarWinds, test whether the SolarWinds endpoint is accessible from the high-secure server.
Full data load for air gap solution -- After you verify that the test data load for the air gap solution for the Service Graph Connector for SolarWinds is successful, you can perform a full data load.
Data mapping -- Data from the SolarWinds data sources is mapped and transformed into the ServiceNow CMDB Configuration Item (CI) class definitions using the Robust Transform Engine (RTE). Data is inserted into the ServiceNow CMDB using the Identification and Reconciliation Engine (IRE).
Properties -- SolarWinds properties control the behavior of the connector.
Tanium -- Use the Service Graph Connector for Tanium to bring in hardware, software, and software usage data from a Tanium environment into your ServiceNow instance.
Configure using SGC Central -- Set up scheduled import jobs to pull in Tanium data into your Configuration Management Database (CMDB).
Configure using guided setup -- Set up scheduled import jobs to pull in data from Tanium into your Configuration Management Database (CMDB).
Targeted CMDB classes -- When you complete setting up the connection, you can configure the integration to periodically pull data from Tanium. The data is saved in tables that extend from the Configuration item [cmdb_ci] table.
Accessing connection details -- You can access the connection details of the Service Graph Connector for Tanium in a single view using the common connection framework (CCF) included within the Integration Commons for CMDB (sn_cmdb_int_util) store app.
Access connection details -- You can access the connection details of the Service Graph Connector for Tanium in a single view using the common connection framework (CCF) included within the Integration Commons for CMDB (sn_cmdb_int_util) store app.
Tanium Endpoints -- Use the Service Graph Connector for Tanium Endpoints to integrate the data discovered by Tanium into your ServiceNow instance to support various use cases.
Configure the Tanium environment -- Configure your Tanium environment to import data using the Service Graph Connector for Tanium Endpoints.
Configure a service account -- Create a service account to bind the API token that is used by the Service Graph Connector for Tanium Endpoints. If a service account for the integration already exists, edit it to assign the required roles.
Configure a persona -- Create a persona to bind the API token that is used by the Service Graph Connector for Tanium Endpoints. If a persona for the integration already exists, edit it. Use a persona only if a service account isn't permitted by your organization.
Create an API token -- Create an API token to be used by the Service Graph Connector for Tanium Endpoints.
Configure using SGC Central -- Use the playbook in SGC Central to set up the Service Graph Connector for Tanium Endpoints and pull Tanium data into your CMDB.
Data mapping -- Data from the Tanium data sources is mapped and transformed into the ServiceNow CMDB configuration item (CI) class definitions using the Robust Transform Engine (RTE). Data is inserted into the ServiceNow CMDB using the Identification and Reconciliation Engine (IRE).
Targeted CMDB classes -- When you complete setting up the connection, you can configure the integration to periodically pull data from Tanium. The data is saved in tables that extend from the Configuration Item [cmdb_ci] table.
Accessing connection details -- You can access the connection details of the Service Graph Connector for Tanium Endpoints in a single view using the common connection framework (CCF) included within the Integration Commons for CMDB (sn_cmdb_int_util) store app.
Access the details of a Tanium Endpoints connection -- You can access the connection details of the Service Graph Connector for Tanium Endpoints in a single view using the common connection framework (CCF) included within the Integration Commons for CMDB (sn_cmdb_int_util) store app.
Reference -- Reference topics provide additional information about Service Graph Connector for Tanium Endpoints components.
Properties -- Service Graph Connector for Tanium Endpoints properties control the behavior of the connector.
Trellix -- Use the Service Graph Connector for Trellix to bring in device, server, and network data from a Trellix environment into your ServiceNow instance to streamline your incident response and asset management use cases.
Configure using SGC Central -- Use the playbook available with the SGC Central application to set up the Service Graph Connector for Trellix for pulling in Trellix data into the CMDB.
Configure using guided setup -- Set up scheduled import jobs to pull in data from a Trellix project into your CMDB.
Target CMDB classes -- When you complete setting up the connection, you can configure the integration to periodically pull data from Trellix. The data is saved in tables that extend from the Configuration item [cmdb_ci] table.
Accessing connection details -- You can access the connection details of the Service Graph Connector for Trellix in a single view using the common connection framework (CCF) included within the Integration Commons for CMDB (sn_cmdb_int_util) store app.
Access connection details -- You can access the connection details of the Service Graph Connector for Trellix in a single view using the common connection framework (CCF) included within the Integration Commons for CMDB (sn_cmdb_int_util) store app.
VMware Workspace ONE UEM -- Use the Service Graph Connector for VMware Workspace ONE UEM to pull data from VMware Workspace ONE Unified Endpoint Management (UEM) into your ServiceNow Instance.
Configure -- Use the Service Graph Connector for VMware Workspace ONE UEM to pull mobile and computing devices data from VMware Workspace ONE Unified Endpoint Management (UEM) into your ServiceNow instance.
Targeted CMDB classes -- When you complete setting up the connection, you can configure the integration to periodically pull data from VMware Workspace ONE Unified Endpoint Management (UEM). The data is saved in tables that extend from the Configuration item [cmdb_ci] table.
Accessing connection details -- You can access the connection details of the Service Graph Connector for VMware Workspace ONE UEM in a single view using the common connection framework (CCF) included within the Integration Commons for CMDB (sn_cmdb_int_util) store app.
Access connection details -- You can access the connection details of the Service Graph Connector for VMware Workspace ONE UEM in a single view using the common connection framework (CCF) included within the Integration Commons for CMDB (sn_cmdb_int_util) store app.
Wiz -- Use the Service Graph Connector for Wiz to ingest CMDB data from projects within the Wiz platform using the REST APIs.
Set up the Wiz environment -- You must obtain the credentials associated with the Wiz service account to configure Wiz for use with the Service Graph Connector for Wiz.
Configure using SGC Central -- Set up scheduled import jobs to pull in data from a Wiz project into your Configuration Management Database (CMDB).
Target tables -- When you complete setting up the connection, you can configure the integration to periodically pull data from a Wiz project. The data is saved in tables that extend from the CMDB CI classes and other non-CMDB classes.
Properties -- Service Graph Connector properties control the behavior of connections.
Supported Wiz types -- The Wiz types and corresponding native types are imported as CMDB data and saved in tables that extend from the Configuration item [cmdb_ci] table.
Accessing connection details -- You can access the connection details of the Service Graph Connector for Wiz in a single view using the common connection framework (CCF) included within the Integration Commons for CMDB (sn_cmdb_int_util) store app.
Access connection details -- You can access the connection details of the Service Graph Connector for Wiz in a single view using the common connection framework (CCF) included within the Integration Commons for CMDB (sn_cmdb_int_util) store app.
Domain separation -- If any conkeyrefs are broken, re-add them from the doc/source/reuse/domain-separation/domain-separation-overview.dita file.In the short description, edit the first sentence to state whether domain separation is supported or not and add the application name. Keep the conkeyref at the end that describes domain separation.Domain separation is supported for Service Graph Connectors. Domain separation enables you to separate data, processes, and administrative tasks into logical groupings called domains. You can control several aspects of this separation, including which users can see and access data.
Cloud discovery solutions comparison -- Comparing cloud discovery solutions provides insights on the relative strengths of each solution. The comparison showcases the number of resource types supported by the solutions across AWS, Microsoft Azure, and GCP. The comparison can help you understand the capabilities of each solution and better manage your CMDB when using one or multiple methods.
Support Tools application -- You can use the ServiceNow Service Graph Connector Support Tools application to resolve any issues or perform a general analysis on a Service Graph Connector installed on your instance.
Install Service Graph Connector Support Tools -- You can install Service Graph Connector Support Tools if you have the admin role. The application installs related ServiceNow Store applications and plugins if they are not already installed.
Resolving issues -- You can use the Service Graph Connector Support Tools application to initiate a chatbot conversation with a virtual agent and resolve an issue or perform a general analysis on a Service Graph Connector installed on your instance.
Resolve a Service Graph Connector issue -- You can use the Service Graph Connector Support Tools application to initiate a chatbot conversation with a virtual agent and resolve an issue or perform a general analysis on a Service Graph Connector installed on your instance.
API Service Graph Connectors -- You can use an API Service Graph Connector to import and integrate third-party API data into CMDB tables.
Apigee X -- Use the ServiceNow API Service Graph Connector for Apigee X to import API proxy details from an Apigee X application into the Configuration Management Database (CMDB).
Target tables -- When you complete setting up the connection, you can configure the integration to periodically pull data from an Apigee X application. The data is saved in tables that extend from the Configuration item [cmdb_ci] classes and other non-CMDB tables.
Access connection details -- You can access the connection details of the API Service Graph Connector for Apigee X in a single view using the common connection framework (CCF) included within the Integration Commons for CMDB (sn_cmdb_int_util) store app.
Access the details of an Apigee X connection -- You can access the connection details of the API Service Graph Connector for Apigee X in a single view using the common connection framework (CCF) included within the Integration Commons for CMDB (sn_cmdb_int_util) store app.
AWS API Gateway -- Use the ServiceNow API Service Graph Connector for AWS API Gateway to import API details from an AWS API Gateway service into the Configuration Management Database (CMDB).
Target tables -- When you complete setting up the connection, you can configure the integration to periodically pull data from an AWS API Gateway service. The data is saved in tables that extend from the Configuration item [cmdb_ci] classes and other non-CMDB classes.
Additional features -- Use the additional features available within the API Service Graph Connector for AWS API Gateway to maximize its use for importing data.
Set partition size -- You can optimize their performance of AWS API Gateway data sources by setting the partition size in the PartitionSize connection property.
Set page size -- When retrieving data from an AWS API Gateway service, you can control the number of records fetched per API call by setting the PageSize connection property. This affects pagination behavior when calling APIs.
Accessing connection details -- You can access the connection details of the API Service Graph Connector for AWS API Gateway in a single view using the common connection framework (CCF) included within the Integration Commons for CMDB (sn_cmdb_int_util) store app.
Access the details of an AWS API Gateway connection -- You can access the connection details of the API Service Graph Connector for AWS API Gateway in a single view using the common connection framework (CCF) included within the Integration Commons for CMDB (sn_cmdb_int_util) store app.
Azure API Management -- Use the ServiceNow API Service Graph Connector for Azure API Management to import API details from an Azure API Management application into the Configuration Management Database (CMDB).
Configure using SGC Central -- Set up scheduled import jobs to pull in Azure API Management data into your CMDB.
Target tables -- When you complete setting up the connection, you can configure the integration to periodically pull data from an Azure API Management application. The data is saved in tables that extend from the Configuration item [cmdb_ci] classes and other non-CMDB classes.
Accessing connection details -- You can access the connection details of the API Service Graph Connector for Azure API Management in a single view using the common connection framework (CCF) included within the Integration Commons for CMDB (sn_cmdb_int_util) store app.
Access the details of an Azure API Management connection -- You can access the connection details of the API Service Graph Connector for Azure API Management in a single view using the common connection framework (CCF) included within the Integration Commons for CMDB (sn_cmdb_int_util) store app.
Boomi Cloud API Management -- Use the ServiceNow API Service Graph Connector for Boomi Cloud API Management to import API details from a Boomi Cloud API Management application into the Configuration Management Database (CMDB).
Configure using SGC Central -- Set up scheduled import jobs to pull in Boomi Cloud API Management data into your CMDB.
Target tables -- When you complete setting up the connection, you can configure the integration to periodically pull data from a Boomi Cloud API Management application. The data is saved in tables that extend from the Configuration item [cmdb_ci] classes and other non-CMDB tables.
Accessing connection details -- You can access the connection details of the API Service Graph Connector for Boomi Cloud API Management in a single view using the common connection framework (CCF) included within the Integration Commons for CMDB (sn_cmdb_int_util) store app.
Access the details of a Boomi connection -- You can access the connection details of the API Service Graph Connector for Boomi Cloud API Management in a single view using the common connection framework (CCF) included within the Integration Commons for CMDB (sn_cmdb_int_util) store app.
Kong Gateway -- Use the ServiceNow API Service Graph Connector for Kong Gateway to import API details from a Kong Gateway application into the Configuration Management Database (CMDB).
Configure using SGC Central -- Set up scheduled import jobs to pull in Kong Gateway data into your Configuration Management Database (CMDB).
Target tables -- When you complete setting up the connection, you can configure the integration to periodically pull data from a Kong Gateway application. The data is saved in tables that extend from the Configuration item [cmdb_ci] classes and other non-CMDB tables.
Accessing connection details -- You can access the connection details of the API Service Graph Connector for Kong Gateway in a single view using the common connection framework (CCF) included within the Integration Commons for CMDB (sn_cmdb_int_util) store app.
Access the details of a Kong Gateway connection -- You can access the connection details of the API Service Graph Connector for Kong Gateway in a single view using the common connection framework (CCF) included within the Integration Commons for CMDB (sn_cmdb_int_util) store app.
Kong Konnect -- Use the ServiceNow API Service Graph Connector for Kong Konnect to import API details from a Kong Konnect service into the Configuration Management Database (CMDB).
Target tables -- When you complete setting up the connection, you can configure the integration to periodically pull data from a Kong Konnect application. The data is saved in tables that extend from the Configuration item [cmdb_ci] classes and other non-CMDB tables.
Accessing connection details -- You can access the connection details of the API Service Graph Connector for Kong Konnect in a single view using the common connection framework (CCF) included within the Integration Commons for CMDB (sn_cmdb_int_util) store app.
Access the details of a Kong Konnect connection -- You can access the connection details of the API Service Graph Connector for Kong Konnect in a single view using the common connection framework (CCF) included within the Integration Commons for CMDB (sn_cmdb_int_util) store app.
MuleSoft -- Use the ServiceNow API Service Graph Connector for MuleSoft to import API details from a MuleSoft Anypoint Platform application into the Configuration Management Database (CMDB).
Configure using SGC Central -- Set up scheduled import jobs to pull in MuleSoft Anypoint Platform data into your CMDB.
Target tables -- When you complete setting up the connection, you can configure the integration to periodically pull data from a MuleSoft Anypoint Platform application. The data is saved in tables that extend from the Configuration item [cmdb_ci] classes and other non-CMDB tables.
Accessing connection details -- You can access the connection details of the API Service Graph Connector for MuleSoft in a single view using the common connection framework (CCF) included within the Integration Commons for CMDB (sn_cmdb_int_util) store app.
Access the details of a MuleSoft connection -- You can access the connection details of the API Service Graph Connector for MuleSoft in a single view using the common connection framework (CCF) included within the Integration Commons for CMDB (sn_cmdb_int_util) store app.
SGC Central -- The ServiceNow Service Graph Connector Central view also called as the SGC Central view in the Service Graph Workspace or CMDB Workspace enables you to discover and install connectors, and then effectively manage the full life cycle of creating, editing, monitoring, and debugging connections.
Exploring SGC Central -- Learn about the SGC Central application with a sample workflow and review the benefits it can provide for different users in your organization.
Configuring SGC Central -- Set up the SGC Central application for onboarding and maintaining Service Graph Connectors and monitoring the errors related to connections added using Service Graph Connectors.
Install SGC Central -- You can install the SGC Central application (sn_sgc_central) if you have the admin role. The application installs related ServiceNow Store applications and plugins if they are not already installed.
Configure scheduled jobs -- You can configure scheduled jobs to automate data collection for tracking integration performance, errors, and processing status of Service Graph Connectors within the SGC Central application.
Explore connectors -- You can explore available options for onboarding and maintaining Service Graph Connectors within the SGC Central view of the Service Graph Workspace or CMDB Workspace.
Update a connector -- Keep a Service Graph Connector up-to-date within SGC Central.
Install a connector using an entitlement -- Install a Service Graph Connector that matches an entitlement available in Application Manager from within the SGC Central view of the Service Graph Workspace or CMDB Workspace.
Install a connector from ServiceNow Store -- Explore ServiceNow Store to request and use a Service Graph Connector with no available entitlements from within the SGC Central view of the Service Graph Workspace or CMDB Workspace.
Configure connector settings -- You can view and configure settings for your Service Graph Connectors within the SGC Central view of the Service Graph Workspace or CMDB Workspace.
Configure system properties -- You can view and configure settings for your Service Graph Connectors within the SGC Central view of the Service Graph Workspace or CMDB Workspace.
Managing connections -- You can create and update connections added for Service Graph Connectors within the SGC Central view of the Service Graph Workspace or CMDB Workspace to ingest data into Configuration Management Database (CMDB) from third-party sources.
Perform initial setup tasks -- Complete the prerequisites for setting up a connection for the first time using a Service Graph Connector within the SGC Central view of the Service Graph Workspace or CMDB Workspace.
Create a connection -- Create a connection added for a Service Graph Connector within the SGC Central view of the Service Graph Workspace or CMDB Workspace.
Update a connection -- Update a connection configured for a Service Graph Connector within the SGC Central view of the Service Graph Workspace or CMDB Workspace.
View a connection -- You can view installed and draft connections that were added using Service Graph Connectors within the SGC Central view of the Service Graph Workspace or CMDB Workspace.
View an installed connection -- You can view installed and draft connections that were added using Service Graph Connectors within the SGC Central view of the Service Graph Workspace or CMDB Workspace.
View a draft connection -- You can view installed and draft connections that were added using Service Graph Connectors within the SGC Central view of the Service Graph Workspace or CMDB Workspace.
Monitor and analyze connections -- The Overview page in the Service Graph Connector Central (SGC Central) view of the Service Graph Workspace or CMDB Workspace provides a centralized dashboard view for administrators to monitor the installation, performance, and error handling of Service Graph Connectors.
Diagnose a processing error -- Diagnose processing errors in connections configured for a Service Graph Connector and resolve them within the SGC Central view of the Service Graph Workspace or CMDB Workspace using recommendations from Now Assist.
Access IntegrationHub ETL -- You can access the IntegrationHub ETL dashboard within the SGC Central view of the Service Graph Workspace or CMDB Workspace to manage ETL transform maps.
Access IntegrationHub ETL -- You can access the IntegrationHub ETL dashboard within the SGC Central view of the Service Graph Workspace or CMDB Workspace to manage ETL transform maps.
SGC Central reference -- Reference topics provide additional information about SGC Central components.
Components installed with SGC Central -- Several types of components are installed with activation of the SGC Central (sn_sgc_central) plugin, including tables, user roles, and scheduled jobs.
Domain separation and SGC Central -- If any conkeyrefs are broken, re-add them from the doc/source/reuse/domain-separation/domain-separation-overview.dita file.In the short description, edit the first sentence to state whether domain separation is supported or not and add the application name. Keep the conkeyref at the end that describes domain separation.Domain separation is unsupported for SGC Central. Domain separation enables you to separate data, processes, and administrative tasks into logical groupings called domains. You can control several aspects of this separation, including which users can see and access data.
Manage instance data sources -- Data management is critical to success in all aspects of your business. Platform tools give you full control over your data, whether in instances, databases, or third-party applications.
Entity view action mapper -- The Entity View Action Mapper (EVAM) is an application that standardizes how different data sources display in cards and lists.
Exploring Entity View Action Mapper -- The Entity View Action Mapper (EVAM) is an application that standardizes how different data sources display in cards and lists.
View configurations, view templates, and configuration bundles -- A view configuration combines conditions, database fields, and declarative actions with an associated view template. You can also group view configurations together to create configuration bundles using the Entity View Action Mapper (EVAM).
Configuring entity view action mapper -- The Entity View Action Mapper (EVAM) allows you to map specific actions to entity views, enabling customized behavior and streamlined work-flows. Learn how to define, configure, and apply mappings to enhance user interactions with data in the platform.
Define a data source -- The data source is an entity that has associated data that you intend to display. For example, a community post or a user.
Define view template -- You can configure multiple view templates per data source based on conditions to customize how data displays for users. The view template maps fields from the view configuration to component.
Define configuration bundle -- Create a view configuration to combine conditions, database fields, and declarative actions with an associated view template using the Entity View Action Mapper (EVAM).
Managing Entity View Action Mapper -- Optimize data presentation and interaction by defining data sources, creating Entity View Action Mapper (EVAM) configuration bundles, and setting up EVAM view templates to structure and display entity data effectively.
Create an EVAM definition -- Define the list of data sources to render. The Entity View Action Mapper (EVAM) definition is the main record for an EVAM configuration.
Create action definition -- You can associate a declarative action with a view template. The Entity View Action Mapper (EVAM) also enables user interactions to trigger a server script or UXF client action.
Roles required for EVAM -- Learn about the roles needed to configure and manage the Entity View Action Mapper (EVAM).
Domain separation and EVAM -- The Entity View Action Mapper (EVAM) in ServiceNow supports domain separation. This means you can configure EVAM to separate data, processes, and administrative tasks into logical groupings called domains, ensuring that users have access only to the data pertinent to their specific domain.
Instance Data Replication -- ServiceNow Instance Data Replication (IDR) copies data updates from one instance, called the producer instance, to one or more other instances called the consumer instances. IDR enables you to maintain consistent data across different instances. For example, you can synchronize data between different organizations in your company or even between different companies with separate instances.
Explore -- Instance Data Replication (IDR) replicates data updates on one instance, called the producer instance, to one or more other instances, called the consumer instances.
Continuous replication -- Replicate inserts and updates from a producer instance to one or more consumer instances in near-real time in Instance Data Replication (IDR).
Bidirectional replication -- Bidirectional replication in Instance Data Replication (IDR) enables data to flow from a producer instance to a consumer instance and accept data from a consumer instance to flow back to the producer instance.
Discrete replication -- Distinguish consumers in Instance Data Replication (IDR) using discrete mapping in a producer replication set.
Scheduled replication -- Replicate historical inserts and updates from a producer instance to one or more consumer instances on a scheduled basis in Instance Data Replication (IDR).
Configure -- Set up and configure Instance Data Replication (IDR).
Request a subscription -- The Instance Data Replication (IDR) plugin requires a separate subscription and must be activated by ServiceNow personnel.
Preparing for IDR -- Before you set up Instance Data Replication (IDR), analyze the tables and columns in the producer and consumer instances to replicate data successfully.
Preserving table hierarchy -- Decide if you want to replicate a parent-child table hierarchy and what strategy to use for replicating the data in Instance Data Replication (IDR).
Upgrading legacy sets -- Improve message processing and replication performance by upgrading your legacy replication sets in IDR to V2.
Upgrade legacy sets -- Replicate high volumes of data faster and more reliably by upgrading your Instance Data Replication (IDR) legacy producer and consumer replication sets to V2.
Rolling back -- If a problem occurs during an upgrade to V2, the upgrade is rolled back in Instance Data Replication (IDR).
Upgrading your instance -- When upgrading your instance, IDR automatically pauses replication to maintain data replication without any manual intervention.
Replicate data -- Synchronize data between instances using Instance Data Replication (IDR).
Set up continuous replication -- Enable near-real time data replication from a producer instance to one or more consumer instances in Instance Data Replication (IDR).
Set up bidirectional replication -- Replicate updated data on a consumer instance to the producer instance using bidirectional replication in Instance Data Replication (IDR).
Set up discrete replication -- Replicate data from a producer instance to specific, distinguished consumer instances in near-real time, ensuring each consumer instance receives updates independently in Instance Data Replication (IDR).
Set up scheduled replication -- Replicate data from a producer to a consumer at scheduled times each day in Instance Data Replication (IDR).
Cancel scheduled replication -- Cancel scheduled replication by deactivating or deleting a producer replication set.
Seed a consumer instance -- Seed all or some of the tables in your Instance Data Replication (IDR) replication sets depending on the needs of your consumer instance.
Modifying replication behavior -- Modify how data is replicated by configuring optional settings in Instance Data Replication (IDR).
Custom coalescing -- Modify how data is replicated by configuring optional settings in Instance Data Replication (IDR).
Preserving system field values -- Modify how data is replicated by configuring optional settings in Instance Data Replication (IDR).
Triggering workflows -- Modify how data is replicated by configuring optional settings in Instance Data Replication (IDR).
Transform replication data -- Transform producer instance data for tables or table columns that are named differently on consumer instances in Instance Data Replication (IDR).
Warning and error messages -- Understand error and warning messages related to schema definitions. You can then troubleshoot or fix Instance Data Replication (IDR) replication issues.
Reconfigure -- If you must change or update your original replication set, reconfigure Instance Data Replication (IDR) replication sets on the producer instance.
Administer -- Perform administrative duties in Instance Data Replication (IDR).
Manage consumer access -- Approve a consumer's request to access replication data in Instance Data Replication (IDR).
Revoke access -- Revoke a consumer's access to replicated data if you believe that consumer instance should no longer receive data in Instance Data Replication (IDR).
Restore access -- Restore Instance Data Replication (IDR) access to replicated data by sending a request to the producer replication set admin.
Comparing replicated data -- Find missing or mismatched records by comparing replication data between instances in Instance Data Replication (IDR).
Find missing or mismatched records -- Find records missing from the consumer instance or mismatched records after data has been replicated by creating a data comparison request in Instance Data Replication (IDR).
Reseed records -- Synchronize data between instances by reseeding records missing from the consumer instance or mismatched records between the producer and consumer instance in Instance Data Replication (IDR).
Deploying replication configuration -- Copy a replication configuration from one instance to another through an update set in Instance Data Replication (IDR).
Deploy replication configuration -- Export a replication configuration from one instance and import it on another instance through an update set in Instance Data Replication (IDR).
Cloning options -- Ensure that certain tables are preserved or excluded to clone your database from one instance to another successfully with Instance Data Replication (IDR).
Monitoring replication status -- Monitor the status of active producer and consumer replication sets, scheduled jobs, seeding requests, license usage, or scheduled replication through the Instance Data Replication (IDR) Monitoring Dashboard.
Monitoring queues -- Monitor the replication record queue, message produced queue, message consumed queue, and the messages processed for all replications sets through the Instance Data Replication (IDR) Queue Dashboard.
Avoiding errors -- You can avoid insert and update failures in Instance Data Replication (IDR) by specifying a class name filter in the producer replication set.
Resolving errors -- Resolve errors and monitor the status of Instance Data Replication (IDR) replication sets.
Run diagnostics -- Verify the status of services and the connection between your instance and the Instance Data Replication (IDR) message queue.
Review synchronization errors -- Review the status field to check if synchronization is working correctly on the Instance Data Replication (IDR) consumer instance.
Discover replication delays -- Monitor possible data replication issues by using the Instance Data Replication (IDR) Monitoring Dashboard.
Fix seeding errors -- Retry Instance Data Replication (IDR) seeding on tables with seeding errors, which occur from network problems and failed inserts, so that you don't have to do a full seeding.
Identify errors -- Identify Instance Data Replication (IDR) errors by viewing the metadata for messages between producer and consumer instances, payload error logs, and message logs.
Configure notifications -- Notify one or more users when errors occur in Instance Data Replication (IDR).
Consumer replication set status -- Review the status of your consumer replication set and research error messages to identify or fix Instance Data Replication (IDR) replication issues.
XML stats -- Extract Instance Data Replication (IDR)-related data from your instance to monitor replication status.
Reference -- These reference topics provide additional information about data privacy in Instance Data Replication (IDR) and domain separation.
Data privacy -- The ability of replication sets to host multiple remote consumers in Instance Data Replication (IDR) means that there are potential data privacy issues to consider.
Adapter descriptions -- Adapters modify the producer data before inserting the data on consumer instances in Instance Data Replication (IDR).
Excluded tables -- You can't replicate certain tables in Instance Data Replication (IDR). Child tables of tables in the exclusion list are also excluded.
Domain separation -- Instance Data Replication (IDR) functions at the data level, which means it does not explicitly support domain separation.
System properties -- These system properties control the behavior of the Instance Data Replication (IDR) application.
Roles -- Instance Data Replication (IDR) is installed with these roles.
IDR read [idr_read] -- Instance Data Replication (IDR) is installed with these roles.
IDR rest [idr_rest] -- Instance Data Replication (IDR) is installed with these roles.
MetricBase -- The MetricBase application stores time-series data, which is data that is sampled at regular intervals. You can graph the stored data or use it with triggers to execute Workflow Studio flows.
Explore -- Collect, retain, analyze, and act on time-series data using MetricBase.
Configure -- Plan and configure your MetricBase implementation.
Request the plugin -- The MetricBase plugin [com.snc.clotho] requires a separate subscription and must be activated by ServiceNow personnel. Be sure to also request the MetricBase Demo plugin [com.snc.clotho.demo], which includes sample tables, metrics, triggers, and data.
Working with demo data -- Familiarize yourself with MetricBase by exploring the MetricBase demo.
View demo data -- After ServiceNow personnel install the MetricBase and MetricBase Demo plugins, you can use the demo to get familiar with MetricBase.
MetricBase APIs -- Experiment with MetricBase APIs using Data Explorer that is part of the MetricBase Demo application. Data Explorer uses the data installed with the MetricBase Demo application.
Create a time-series definition -- Specify the metric that you want to store, how often to collect it, and how long to store it in MetricBase.
Retention policy schedules -- Specify how long MetricBase stores the time-series data in the MetricBase database.
Retention policies -- Retain data in MetricBase according to retention policies.
Accessing data -- Access the time-series data that you sent to the MetricBase database in the way that is convenient to you.
Access data from a list -- Use the list command on a table in the MetricBase database to view time-series data. The data reveals the behavior of the entity that supplies the data.
Retrieving data -- Use JavaScript or REST APIs to insert and retrieve time-series data from the MetricBase database and to run transforms on the data. The transformations enable you to visualize time-series data in a variety of ways.
Detecting anomalies -- MetricBase creates a model by training a representative sample of your time series data to determine the model parameters. The training process determines the model parameters that best fit your data, to distinguish normal data from anomalous data.
Create and train a model -- Use statistical models to determine significant anomalies in real-time using MetricBase triggers. You will need to train a model using representative data that has already been stored in MetricBase.
Trigger flows -- Time-series data that is stored in the MetricBase database can trigger Workflow Studio flows. These triggers can log incidents, send emails, and create other alerts.
Create a band trigger -- Create a MetricBase band trigger that detects when a metric value falls within a range of values.
Create a linear predictor trigger -- Create a MetricBase linear predictor trigger to detect when a metric is likely to cross a specified threshold within a specified period of time.
Create a gap trigger -- Create a MetricBase gap trigger to alert you when MetricBase stops receiving data.
Create a model trigger -- Model triggers execute when the time-series data deviates from expected values.
Execute triggers conditionally -- MetricBase triggers execute based on a single metric. Condition Scripts impose additional requirements that determine whether a trigger kicks off a flow.
Assign a trigger to a flow -- Now that you created a trigger, use Workflow Studio to specify the flow a trigger executes. The flows can provide alerts for unexpected behavior.
View trigger logs -- Trigger logs show different levels of trigger malfunctions.
Manage -- View the overall health and performance of MetricBase, and debug its triggers and scripts.
View database status -- View the overall health and performance of MetricBase, and debug its triggers and scripts.
View data usage -- View the overall health and performance of MetricBase, and debug its triggers and scripts.
View statistics and metrics -- View the overall health and performance of MetricBase, and debug its triggers and scripts.
Debug MetricBase -- View the overall health and performance of MetricBase, and debug its triggers and scripts.
Reference -- These reference topics provide additional information about MetricBase developer resources and domain separation.
Developer resources -- Developers can use JavaScript or REST APIs to insert and retrieve time-series data from the MetricBase database and to run transforms on the data. The transformations enable you to visualize time-series data in a variety of ways.
Domain separation -- Domain separation is supported in the MetricBase application. Domain separation enables you to separate data, processes, and administrative tasks into logical groupings called domains. You can control several aspects of this separation, including which users can see and access data.
Roles -- MetricBase is installed with these roles.
MID Server -- The Management, Instrumentation, and Discovery (MID) Server is a Java application that runs as a Windows service or UNIX daemon on a server in your local network. The ServiceNow MID Server enables communication and the movement of data between a ServiceNow instance and external applications, data sources, and services.
Exploring MID Server -- MID Server acts as the mediator between the network and the instance. MID Servers are used by other applications to connect to the instance.
Configuring MID Server -- Before MID Server installation can begin, the network must be prepared to access the instance and download site. There are several installation procedures depending on the host operating system and scale of deployment. Once installed, MID Servers can be configured with many capabilities and features.
Prepare network connections for MID Servers -- Before you install the MID Server, perform the necessary prerequisites that it needs to connect to elements inside and outside your network. This includes network privileges and security considerations.
Configure MID Server network connectivity -- Before you install the MID Server, perform the necessary prerequisites that it needs to connect to elements inside and outside your network. This includes network privileges and security considerations.
Installing the MID Server -- Download and install the MID Server on the host machine, test the connection, and then validate the MID Server. Set up multiple MID Servers for load balancing and domain separation. These procedures prepare it for use with any application.
Install MID Server with the command line installer -- Using the ITOM Infra Services Workspace, MID Servers can be deployed with the command line installer. The command line installer automates many of the processes, especially for first time installations.
Installing MID Server on Windows -- Using the ITOM Infra Services Workspace, MID Servers can be deployed to Windows with a variety of authentication and installation methods. For authentication, choose between private key JWT, basic authentication, or mutual authentication.
Install MID Server on Windows with private key JWT using ZIP -- Using the ITOM Infra Services Workspace, MID Servers can be deployed to Windows with a variety of authentication and installation methods. For authentication, choose between private key JWT, basic authentication, or mutual authentication.
Install MID Server on Windows with basic authentication -- Using the ITOM Infra Services Workspace, MID Servers can be deployed to Windows with a variety of authentication and installation methods. For authentication, choose between private key JWT, basic authentication, or mutual authentication.
Install MID Server on Windows with basic authentication using ZIP -- Using the ITOM Infra Services Workspace, MID Servers can be deployed to Windows with a variety of authentication and installation methods. For authentication, choose between private key JWT, basic authentication, or mutual authentication.
Install MID Server on Windows with mutual authentication -- Using the ITOM Infra Services Workspace, MID Servers can be deployed to Windows with a variety of authentication and installation methods. For authentication, choose between private key JWT, basic authentication, or mutual authentication.
Install MID Server on Windows with mutual authentication using ZIP -- Using the ITOM Infra Services Workspace, MID Servers can be deployed to Windows with a variety of authentication and installation methods. For authentication, choose between private key JWT, basic authentication, or mutual authentication.
Installing MID Server on Linux -- Using the ITOM Infra Services Workspace, MID Servers can be deployed to Linux with a variety of authentication and installation methods. For authentication, choose between private key JWT, basic authentication, or mutual authentication.
Install MID Server on Linux with private key JWT using ZIP -- Using the ITOM Infra Services Workspace, MID Servers can be deployed to Linux with a variety of authentication and installation methods. For authentication, choose between private key JWT, basic authentication, or mutual authentication.
Install MID Server on Linux with basic authentication -- Using the ITOM Infra Services Workspace, MID Servers can be deployed to Linux with a variety of authentication and installation methods. For authentication, choose between private key JWT, basic authentication, or mutual authentication.
Install MID Server on Linux with basic authentication using ZIP -- Using the ITOM Infra Services Workspace, MID Servers can be deployed to Linux with a variety of authentication and installation methods. For authentication, choose between private key JWT, basic authentication, or mutual authentication.
Install MID Server on Linux with mutual authentication -- Using the ITOM Infra Services Workspace, MID Servers can be deployed to Linux with a variety of authentication and installation methods. For authentication, choose between private key JWT, basic authentication, or mutual authentication.
Install MID Server on Linux with mutual authentication using ZIP -- Using the ITOM Infra Services Workspace, MID Servers can be deployed to Linux with a variety of authentication and installation methods. For authentication, choose between private key JWT, basic authentication, or mutual authentication.
Installing the MID Server with manual or guided setup -- Download and install the MID Server on the host machine, test the connection, and then validate the MID Server. Use the manual procedures or the guided setup. Set up multiple MID Servers for load balancing and domain separation. These procedures prepare it for use with any application.
Create the MID Server user and grant the role -- To communicate with the instance, MID Servers need a user ID and the appropriate role. Create the user ID for a MID Server and grant the ID the mid_server role. To prevent MID Server validation failure, the system runs business rules to monitor the settings selected for MID Server users.
MID Server role validation -- To communicate with the instance, MID Servers need a user ID and the appropriate role. Create the user ID for a MID Server and grant the ID the mid_server role. To prevent MID Server validation failure, the system runs business rules to monitor the settings selected for MID Server users.
Download the MID Server files -- Download the MID Server installer package through the instance and make it available for installation on the host. Allow the local network to access the authorized IP addresses to ensure that you can download the installation package and receive automatic upgrades.
Install a MID Server on Linux -- Install MID Servers with the MID Server installer and verify it is active. The package includes an installer that automatically configures JRE to run in the environment. The MID Server can use an existing JRE rather than the provided JRE. Uninstall the MID Server to redeploy it.
Linux MID Server silent installation -- Install MID Servers with the MID Server installer and verify it is active. The package includes an installer that automatically configures JRE to run in the environment. The MID Server can use an existing JRE rather than the provided JRE. Uninstall the MID Server to redeploy it.
Run Linux MID Servers as non-root users -- Install MID Servers with the MID Server installer and verify it is active. The package includes an installer that automatically configures JRE to run in the environment. The MID Server can use an existing JRE rather than the provided JRE. Uninstall the MID Server to redeploy it.
Configure a Linux MID Server to use an existing JRE -- Install MID Servers with the MID Server installer and verify it is active. The package includes an installer that automatically configures JRE to run in the environment. The MID Server can use an existing JRE rather than the provided JRE. Uninstall the MID Server to redeploy it.
Uninstall a Linux MID Server -- Install MID Servers with the MID Server installer and verify it is active. The package includes an installer that automatically configures JRE to run in the environment. The MID Server can use an existing JRE rather than the provided JRE. Uninstall the MID Server to redeploy it.
Install a MID Server on Windows -- Install MID Servers with the MID Server guided Windows installation package. The package includes an installer that automatically configures OpenJDK to run in the environment. The MID Server can use an existing JRE rather than the provided OpenJDK. Uninstall the MID Server to redeploy it.
Install a MID Server on Windows with guided installation -- Install MID Servers with the MID Server guided Windows installation package. The package includes an installer that automatically configures OpenJDK to run in the environment. The MID Server can use an existing JRE rather than the provided OpenJDK. Uninstall the MID Server to redeploy it.
Uninstall a Windows MID Server with the guided installer -- Install MID Servers with the MID Server guided Windows installation package. The package includes an installer that automatically configures OpenJDK to run in the environment. The MID Server can use an existing JRE rather than the provided OpenJDK. Uninstall the MID Server to redeploy it.
Configure Windows MID Server service credentials -- Install MID Servers with the MID Server guided Windows installation package. The package includes an installer that automatically configures OpenJDK to run in the environment. The MID Server can use an existing JRE rather than the provided OpenJDK. Uninstall the MID Server to redeploy it.
Windows MID Server silent installation and uninstallation -- Install MID Servers with the MID Server guided Windows installation package. The package includes an installer that automatically configures OpenJDK to run in the environment. The MID Server can use an existing JRE rather than the provided OpenJDK. Uninstall the MID Server to redeploy it.
Manually install a MID Server on Windows -- Install MID Servers with the MID Server guided Windows installation package. The package includes an installer that automatically configures OpenJDK to run in the environment. The MID Server can use an existing JRE rather than the provided OpenJDK. Uninstall the MID Server to redeploy it.
Uninstall a Windows MID Server after manual installation -- Install MID Servers with the MID Server guided Windows installation package. The package includes an installer that automatically configures OpenJDK to run in the environment. The MID Server can use an existing JRE rather than the provided OpenJDK. Uninstall the MID Server to redeploy it.
Configure a MID Server on Windows to use an existing JRE -- Install MID Servers with the MID Server guided Windows installation package. The package includes an installer that automatically configures OpenJDK to run in the environment. The MID Server can use an existing JRE rather than the provided OpenJDK. Uninstall the MID Server to redeploy it.
Validate the MID Server -- You must manually validate the MID Server after it is installed to enable it to execute automation tasks. You can invalidate a MID Server you suspect has been compromised to prevent it from accessing automation credentials in the instance or executing outbound ECC probes.
Test MID Server connectivity -- Confirm that the MID Server host is able to communicate with the instance. Resolve any issues with the network connectivity such as conflicts with firewalls, access control lists, and routing errors. Successful communication is necessary for automatic upgrades.
Install multiple MID Servers on a single system -- Install multiple MID Servers on the same host computer. Multiple MID Servers can support each other with load balancing, as well as use domain separation. The number of MID Servers required is determined by factors like network policies, security restraints, and the reliability of the host computer.
Multiple MID Server deployments -- Install multiple MID Servers on the same host computer. Multiple MID Servers can support each other with load balancing, as well as use domain separation. The number of MID Servers required is determined by factors like network policies, security restraints, and the reliability of the host computer.
Use MID Server guided setup -- MID Server guided setup provides a sequence of tasks that help you install a MID Server with the proper user account and validate the MID Server. If you are setting up a MID Server for the first time, this is a good way to get one up and running in your environment quickly.
Configuring MID Servers -- After installing and validating your MID Servers, ensure that they have access to sufficient system resources, probe the proper targets, and communicate with the instance as expected. Configure MID Server selection criteria, create clusters for failover protection, and set up MID Servers in different domains to protect data.
MID Server selection -- You can configure MID Server selection by application, IP address ranges, network capability, or behavior. Specific MID Servers can be assigned to particular tasks, or the MID Server can be selected automatically. MID Servers can use domain separation to limit the scope of discoveries and event management.
Configure a default MID Server for each application -- You can configure a default MID Server that an application can use if all other possible MID Servers are unavailable. You can narrow down the list of applications that are included in the definition of ALL.
Override the MID Server selection filter -- Use the override feature to write your own filter condition that overrides the normal MID Server selection criteria for an application. An override has precedence over the default filter and can be defined for a specific selection condition.
Using MID Server IP range auto-assignment -- Discovery Quick Start can automatically assign ranges of IP addresses, called subnets, to qualified MID Servers. This subnet auto-assignment requires SNMP credentials for read-only access to routers Discovery uses. The Automation Status Set form shows summary details of subnet Discoveries and the IP range assignments for associated MID Servers.
Required SNMP OIDs for MID Server IP range auto-assignment -- Discovery Quick Start can automatically assign ranges of IP addresses, called subnets, to qualified MID Servers. This subnet auto-assignment requires SNMP credentials for read-only access to routers Discovery uses. The Automation Status Set form shows summary details of subnet Discoveries and the IP range assignments for associated MID Servers.
View automation status sets and IP range assignments -- Discovery Quick Start can automatically assign ranges of IP addresses, called subnets, to qualified MID Servers. This subnet auto-assignment requires SNMP credentials for read-only access to routers Discovery uses. The Automation Status Set form shows summary details of subnet Discoveries and the IP range assignments for associated MID Servers.
File permission enforcement for Windows MID Servers -- To improve security, Windows MID Servers enforce Windows file permission restrictions. The enforcement limits access to the MID Server files to a restricted allow list of users and groups.
Map an IP address to a DNS name -- Associate the IP address to a DNS name to ensure the appropriate MID Server is selected. The IP Address range configuration determines which MID Server is selected. If the MID Server manages resources within defined IP ranges, all host servers must have their DNS names mapped to an IP address.
Configure MID Server capabilities -- MID Server capabilities define the specific functions of a MID Server within an IP address range, allowing an application to select the most appropriate MID Server. Configure capabilities on MID Servers for applications like Orchestration, Cloud Management, and Service Mapping.
MID Server capabilities -- MID Server capabilities define the specific functions of a MID Server within an IP address range, allowing an application to select the most appropriate MID Server. Configure capabilities on MID Servers for applications like Orchestration, Cloud Management, and Service Mapping.
Configure a MID Server cluster -- Group multiple MID Servers to form clusters, then configure clusters for fail-over protection or load balancing. Load-balancing clusters automatically balance work between each MID Server to improve stability and performance, as well as handle fail-over. Fail-over clusters have a configured order used to determine which MID Server to use next if a failure occurs.
MID Server clusters -- Group multiple MID Servers to form clusters, then configure clusters for fail-over protection or load balancing. Load-balancing clusters automatically balance work between each MID Server to improve stability and performance, as well as handle fail-over. Fail-over clusters have a configured order used to determine which MID Server to use next if a failure occurs.
Set MID Server thread use -- Change the number of threads used by the MID Server according to performance requirements. MID Servers which compete with other programs for CPU time can use fewer threads than the default. MID Servers which need more speed, and have a host computer powerful enough, can use more threads.
Install and uninstall Nmap on a MID Server -- If you decide to use credential-less Discovery in your network, you must install Nmap on each Windows MID Server that you want to use for this purpose. Self-hosted customers whose network security does not permit downloads from install.service-now.com must use a specific manual process to install and configure Nmap.
Install Nmap on a self-hosted system -- If you decide to use credential-less Discovery in your network, you must install Nmap on each Windows MID Server that you want to use for this purpose. Self-hosted customers whose network security does not permit downloads from install.service-now.com must use a specific manual process to install and configure Nmap.
Uninstall Nmap on a self-hosted system -- If you decide to use credential-less Discovery in your network, you must install Nmap on each Windows MID Server that you want to use for this purpose. Self-hosted customers whose network security does not permit downloads from install.service-now.com must use a specific manual process to install and configure Nmap.
Configure MID Server as WinRM trusted host -- In environments using Windows Remote Management (WinRM), Discovery or Service Mapping can discover servers using the WinRM protocol. Add servers, which are part of WinRM, as trusted hosts on all MID Servers that Discovery or Service Mapping use for discovery.
MID Server domain separation -- Use the MID Server user role to configure MID Servers to access separate domains. The credentials in the config.xml file of a MID Server determine which domains it can access. Specific MID Server policy records can be restricted for use only by MID Server from the same domain.
Set up domain separation for MID servers -- Use the MID Server user role to configure MID Servers to access separate domains. The credentials in the config.xml file of a MID Server determine which domains it can access. Specific MID Server policy records can be restricted for use only by MID Server from the same domain.
Configure a multi-domain MID Server -- Use the MID Server user role to configure MID Servers to access separate domains. The credentials in the config.xml file of a MID Server determine which domains it can access. Specific MID Server policy records can be restricted for use only by MID Server from the same domain.
Synchronize a JAR file to MID Servers -- You can upload a JAR file to an instance and synchronize it to all MID Servers, or write custom probes that use the synchronized JAR file.
vCenter event collector -- The vCenter event collector is a MID Server extension that listens for vCenter-related events and updates the CMDB accordingly.
MID Server Resource Reservation -- This feature allows resources to be reserved before a task is assigned to a thread. If the resources the task needs aren’t available, then that task waits in the MID Server work queue while other tasks are assigned to the thread.
Use MID Server Resource Reservation -- This feature allows resources to be reserved before a task is assigned to a thread. If the resources the task needs aren’t available, then that task waits in the MID Server work queue while other tasks are assigned to the thread.
How MID Server Resource Reservation works -- This feature allows resources to be reserved before a task is assigned to a thread. If the resources the task needs aren’t available, then that task waits in the MID Server work queue while other tasks are assigned to the thread.
Containerized MID Server -- Containerized MID Server uses a Docker image of the MID Server that allows you to quickly deploy MID Servers at scale. MID Servers are deployed using orchestration tools like OpenShift or Kubernetes. Orchestration tools can automate their deployment and maintenance and add new containers on demand or replace failed containers automatically.
Build MID Server Docker Image for Linux -- Deploy Containerized MID Servers on Linux by creating a Docker image with the provided recipes. Containerized MID Server uses a Docker image of the MID Server that allows you to quickly deploy MID Servers at scale.
Launch Containerized MID Server -- Deploy Containerized MID Servers on Linux by creating a Docker image with the provided recipes. Containerized MID Server uses a Docker image of the MID Server that allows you to quickly deploy MID Servers at scale.
Pass sensitive data to a containerized MID Server with Docker Secrets -- Deploy Containerized MID Servers on Linux by creating a Docker image with the provided recipes. Containerized MID Server uses a Docker image of the MID Server that allows you to quickly deploy MID Servers at scale.
Containerized MID Server Deployment and Auto-configuration -- An agent admin can enter a MID Server Profile and create a deployment request on the instance. She/he can then export the deployment request to a YAML file and use it to deploy MID Servers to Kubernetes or OpenShift cluster.
MID Server Deployment Request -- After creating a MID server profile, the user can make a new deployment request to prepare the deployment process. A deployment request can be different for different container orchestrators.
Containerized MID Server Autoscaling -- MID Servers can be deployed via StatefulSet with any number of replicas. They can scale automatically by leveraging Kubernetes Horizontal Pod Autoscaler (HPA). Horizontal Pod Autoscaler automatically updates a workload resource (such as a Deployment or StatefulSet) to match demand.
Configure a MID Server for IPv6 -- A MID Server configured for IPv6 can connect to ServiceNow and use Discovery over IPv6 for specific addresses.
Securing and encrypting MID Server data -- After configuring your MID Server, you can add security by encrypting MID Server parameter values in the config.xml file. Encryption protects data that the MID Server returns to the ECC Queue. Other available security options include the authorization of SOAP requests, restricting access to the MID Server configuration file, and establishing secure socket layer (SSL) connections.
MID Server certificate check policies -- MID Server uses four kinds of security checks to secure external traffic. The security checks use TLS/SSL certificate validation, hostname validation, Certificate Revocation List (CRL), and Online Certificate Status Protocol (OCSP) validation to improve security. Control these security checks with the MID Server certificate check policies table.
Encrypt or decrypt MID Server configuration file values -- The value of any MID Server parameter in the config.xml file can be encrypted. The attributes for all encrypted values are managed from within the configuration file, including the security attribute of the login password.
MID Server configuration file security -- Sensitive MID Server configuration data can be protected using several different schemes, including internal and external data encryption and external data storage.
Change MID Server configuration file security schemes -- A MID Server security scheme is the method the MID Server uses to protect sensitive values stored in its config.xml file (for example, the instance password). The scheme defines how those values are encrypted and where the encryption key is stored.
MID Server ISecuredConfigProvider interface -- Use the methods in this interface to create custom providers that manage secured parameter values in the MID Server config.xml file.
MID Server authentication credentials and SOAP requests -- Set basic authentication credentials to update the web service invocation data. For added security, you can enforce basic authentication on each incoming SOAP request to the MID Server.
Require basic authorization for incoming SOAP requests -- Set basic authentication credentials to update the web service invocation data. For added security, you can enforce basic authentication on each incoming SOAP request to the MID Server.
MID Server unified key store -- The MID Server unified key store allows all products on the MID Server to use common certificates and key pairs. This feature allows applications to use the same secure communication channel to the MID Server that the MID Server uses to connect to the instance.
Install custom certificates in the MID Server unified key store -- The MID Server unified key store allows all products on the MID Server to use common certificates and key pairs. This feature allows applications to use the same secure communication channel to the MID Server that the MID Server uses to connect to the instance.
Restore the MID Server key store with a backup -- The MID Server unified key store allows all products on the MID Server to use common certificates and key pairs. This feature allows applications to use the same secure communication channel to the MID Server that the MID Server uses to connect to the instance.
Enable MID Server mutual authentication -- Configure the MID Server to use a client certificate for authenticating to the instance. This avoids the need to create a basic authentication credentials in the Key Store for the MID Server's configuration.
MID Server Azure Key Vault integration -- The MID Server integration with the Azure Key vault enables Orchestration, Discovery, and Service Mapping to run without storing any credentials on the instance.
Supported Credentials for Azure Key Vault Integration -- The MID Server integration with the Azure Key vault enables Orchestration, Discovery, and Service Mapping to run without storing any credentials on the instance.
MID Server command audit log -- The command audit log records the commands run by the MID Server for the Discovery application. Review the commands to check for anomalies or errors.
Rekey a MID Server -- Rekey a MID Server to generate a new private key. Private keys are used to decrypt automation credentials, so that MID Servers can transmit information securely. Key pairs are initially generated when a MID Server is validated, and MID Servers should be rekeyed periodically to meet security requirements.
Specify an external TrustStore for the MID Server -- The MID Server JVM can utilize a TrustStore external to the MID installation directory so any certificates added to the TrustStore are not overwritten during an upgrade. It is important that this TrustStore file reside outside of the MID installation directory, and the Truststore location can be specified by adding additional parameters to the MID Server's wrapper-override.conf file.
MID Server SSH cryptographic algorithms -- The MID Server utilizes SSH clients to perform many discovery actions. During the SSH handshake, both the client and server first determine which algorithms both parties support, then client picks the highest priority algorithm. For the Host Key Algorithm, the client picks highest priority algorithm which both parties support that matches the key type.
MID Server FIPS Enforced Mode -- The MID Server supports the National Security Cloud (NSC) IL-5 environment, which requires all utilized cryptography to be FIPS validated. The MID server can be run in FIPS Enforced Mode, where only cryptographic algorithms which are FIPS validated are utilized.
Enable MID Server FIPS Enforced Mode -- The MID Server supports the National Security Cloud (NSC) IL-5 environment, which requires all utilized cryptography to be FIPS validated. The MID server can be run in FIPS Enforced Mode, where only cryptographic algorithms which are FIPS validated are utilized.
Manually convert the MID Server to FIPS Enforced Mode -- The MID Server supports the National Security Cloud (NSC) IL-5 environment, which requires all utilized cryptography to be FIPS validated. The MID server can be run in FIPS Enforced Mode, where only cryptographic algorithms which are FIPS validated are utilized.
MID Server Governance -- Improve MID Server security by setting an automatic timeout to invalidate and shut down inactive MID Servers. You can enable this feature and set the inactivity timeout period globally and for each MID Server.
MID Server reference -- MID Server reference information includes system requirements and other information you need to configure a MID Server for your specific needs.
MID Server system requirements -- Use these minimum system requirements to allocate resources for computers hosting MID Servers.
MID Server upgrades -- Upgrade MID Servers manually, or automatically through the instance. MID Server automatic upgrade is triggered when the instance upgrades and the MID Server no longer has the same version. The new MID Server package is downloaded from install.service-now.com, replaces the old one, and the MID Server starts with the new version.
MID Server pre-upgrade check -- Prior to an upgrade, the MID Server runs tests to identify issues that could cause the upgrade process to fail or result in a MID Server outage.
Pinning a MID Server to a specific version -- You can pin all the MID Servers in your environment to a specific version by setting a system property, or you can configure specific versions for individual MID Servers.
Upgrade the MID Server manually -- MID Servers automatically upgrade to match the instance build the next time they communicate with the instance after an instance upgrade. Use this procedure only if you want to upgrade a MID Server immediately or retry the upgrade after an Upgrade failed status.
Resolving MID Server issues -- Troubleshoot problems with the MID Server to find solutions. Monitor the MID Server to receive alerts about issues as they occur. Troubleshooting procedures exist to resolve specific problems with the MID Server. The Knowledge Base on Hi contains several articles to help you troubleshoot MID Server issues.
MID Server active issues -- The ServiceNow instance has a dedicated table that publishes active issues with MID Servers and alerts administrators when a MID Server is in danger of exceeding its resources.
MID Server fails to start -- When a newly installed MID Server fails to start or shuts down prematurely, improper configuration could be to blame.
MID Server resource threshold alerts -- The instance displays warnings when a MID Server breaches its resource thresholds for CPU and JVM memory usage, enabling users to create email notifications or custom scripts when a breach occurs.
MID Server user connectivity issues -- The instance writes issues involving MID Server user logins and network connectivity to the MID Server Issue [ecc_agent_issue] table and creates events you can use in custom scripts or to send email notifications.
Test remediation efforts for MID Server user connectivity issues -- The instance writes issues involving MID Server user logins and network connectivity to the MID Server Issue [ecc_agent_issue] table and creates events you can use in custom scripts or to send email notifications.
Interpreting MID Server user debugging output -- Debugging output from the system log is available in either a summary or detailed view for MID Server user issues, but must be enabled manually.
MID Server Upgrade History -- Use this module to troubleshoot errors that occur during the MID Server upgrade process. The MID Server Upgrade Histories table contains a record of each instance upgrade. The MID Server Upgrade Stages table shows the status of each MID Server and its upgrade progress, including any errors encountered.
MID Server ECC Queue -- The External Communication Channel (ECC) Queue is a connection point between an instance and the MID Server. Jobs that the MID Server needs to perform are saved in this queue until the MID Server is ready to handle them.
Manage ECC Queue content for a MID Server -- The External Communication Channel (ECC) Queue is a connection point between an instance and the MID Server. Jobs that the MID Server needs to perform are saved in this queue until the MID Server is ready to handle them.
ECC queue security considerations -- The External Communication Channel (ECC) Queue is a connection point between an instance and the MID Server. Jobs that the MID Server needs to perform are saved in this queue until the MID Server is ready to handle them.
MID Server dashboard -- The MID Server dashboard is a central place for MID Server users to monitor ongoing operations. The dashboard consists of reports and gauges that display information from the MID Server Status table.
MID Server properties -- Properties control the behavior of all MID Servers or a particular MID Server.
MID Server parameters -- Parameters control the behavior of a particular MID Server and have lower precedence than MID Server properties.
Add a MID Server parameter -- Parameters control the behavior of a particular MID Server and have lower precedence than MID Server properties.
MID Server Configuration Parameter settings and priority -- The MID Server's settings reside in multiple tables and the MID Server prioritizes them in a set order. MIDConfigParameter must be defined with the correct type-style builders.
MID Server File Cleaner -- A monitor thread runs in the MID Server to clean up old files, to keep the size and quantity of files within the install folder manageable, and to prevent performance issues with the MID Servers.
MID Server privileged commands -- To discover certain information on a host server, the MID Server must run SSH commands with higher privileges. The platform provides default privileged commands for the MID Server to use and the ability to add additional commands to the system.
Long-running commands with sudo -- To discover certain information on a host server, the MID Server must run SSH commands with higher privileges. The platform provides default privileged commands for the MID Server to use and the ability to add additional commands to the system.
Add a new privileged command for use by the MID Server -- To discover certain information on a host server, the MID Server must run SSH commands with higher privileges. The platform provides default privileged commands for the MID Server to use and the ability to add additional commands to the system.
Configure the MID Server to use specific privileged commands -- To discover certain information on a host server, the MID Server must run SSH commands with higher privileges. The platform provides default privileged commands for the MID Server to use and the ability to add additional commands to the system.
Create a pbrun profile privileged command -- To discover certain information on a host server, the MID Server must run SSH commands with higher privileges. The platform provides default privileged commands for the MID Server to use and the ability to add additional commands to the system.
MIDSystem methods -- MIDSystem variables (referred to by the variable name ms.) provide a variety of methods to get information about the MID Server.
MID Server heartbeat -- The instance checks the MID Server for a response every 5 minutes, using a synthetic transaction monitoring system.
Set the MID Server JVM memory size -- The MID Server starts with a default JVM memory allocation, but you can modify this setting in the configuration file.
Pause the MID Server -- Pause the MID Server to temporarily prevent it from polling the ECC Queue for work or sending Discovery results back to the instance.
MID Server pause -- Pause the MID Server to temporarily prevent it from polling the ECC Queue for work or sending Discovery results back to the instance.
Remote tables -- Connect the ServiceNow AI Platform to third-party sources, or to another instance, so that you can retrieve external data and optionally cache it in memory.
Activate remote tables plugin -- If you have the admin role, you can activate the Remote Tables plugin (com.glide.script.vtable). This plugin includes demo data and activates related plugins if they aren’t already active.
Create remote table -- Create a remote table using data retrieved from an external source.
Create script definitions -- Define scripts for a remote table to retrieve data from an external data source or edit data in the external source.
Example 1 -- These are examples of script definitions you might create for retrieval and caching of data from sources external to your current instance. In this first example, we create a script to load all incident records from an external source.
Example 2 -- In this example, we create a script to retrieve specific types of incident records from a third-party source.
Example 3 -- In this example, we create a script to insert an incident record into the external source.
Example 4 -- In this example, we create a script to update an incident record in the external source.
Example 5 -- In this example, we create a script to delete an incident record from the external source.
Define flow logic -- Set the triggers and actions to define a remote table flow logic.
Debug script definitions -- You can enable session debugging for remote table script definitions. To enable script definition logging in a session debug log, set the glide.script.vtable.log.debug property to true.
Domain separation remote tables -- Domain separation is unsupported in remote tables. Domain separation enables you to separate data, processes, and administrative tasks into logical groupings called domains. You can control several aspects of this separation, including which users can see and access data.
Manage content capabilities -- Handle all the necessary aspects of document and knowledge base management for your enterprise with several ServiceNow products.
Document Services -- Document Services provides a broad range of services related to document management, creation, maintenance, and conversion, and integrating with third parties such as Microsoft SharePoint.
Document Management -- The Document Management applications allows management of large numbers of documents efficiently. With the Document Management application, you can create, share, upload, track, and manage documents throughout the life-cycle of the workflow.
Explore -- With the ServiceNow Document Management application, you can manage large numbers of documents efficiently. Easily upload, retrieve, share and delete documents.
Document Management plugin -- With the ServiceNow Document Management plugin (com.snc.platform_document_management), you can create documents, manage large numbers of documents efficiently, and track each version. The plugin is independent, with no dependencies on existing plugins and has been built on the existing sys_attachment framework.
Activate -- Activate the Document Management plugin.
Document security and access -- Document access permissions for users and groups provide you with security for your documents.
Share documents with users -- Assign Reader, Writer or Owner permissions to users to enable them to read, download, update, or delete documents.
Share documents with groups -- As a Writer or Owner, assign access to user groups based on your access permissions.
Use -- Use Document Management to easily upload, retrive, share, publish, and delete documents.
Document repository -- In the Document Management application, you can create, view, update, share documents in the document repository. When new documents are created, they’re placed into a record with metadata such as name, description, type, and so on. The record contains all the versions of the document so you can track and update the documents.
Create a document record -- Create document records and include default versions for the documents.
Document versions -- In the ServiceNow Document Management application, documents display as versions in the record. You view these versions as a related list within the document record. A document can have many versions.
Create -- Create a document version for each document.
Compare document versions -- Document version comparison enables you to view differences between two versions of a document, highlighting changes such as added, removed, or modified content.
Download a document -- Download an attached document version based on the selected default version.
Share a document link -- Create and control document sharing based on classification for shared links with public access.
Modify a shared link access -- Modify the document shared link access to make the link inactive or change the expiration date.
Delete a document link -- Delete a shared link to remove existing user access to the document.
Delete documents -- Delete documents in the document repository.
Document approval and publish process -- A reviewer approves or rejects the document. A document can have multiple reviewers. During the approval process, the approver approves or rejects the document. A document goes through the approval process after the review process. A document is published after the review and approval process.
Publish a document -- Publish a document revision that has been approved.
Digital signature for PDF documents using CAC or PIV smart cards -- Use digital signatures to make the document signing experience seamless and to eliminate manual intervention by using your Personal Identity Verification (PIV) or Common Access Card (CAC) smart card.
Install Document Template integration with digital signatures using a smart card -- You can install the Document Template integration with Digital Signatures using Smart Cards application (com.sn.dt-digital-signature-smart-card-integration) if you have the admin role.If the application does NOT include demo data or it does NOT install related applications and plugins, delete or revise the following sentence:
Set up a document template for signing documents -- Set up a document template for PDF using a Common Access Card (CAC) or Personal Identification Verification (PIV) card. Set up certificates to automate and simplify the process of filling, reviewing, and signing a document online.
Assign a custom signing domain for CAC/PIV digital signatures -- Improve signing traffic management by assigning a custom domain for CAC/PIV digital signatures by setting an optional system property to override the default glide.servlet.uri setting.
Property value for digital signature -- Specify the method that will be used to identify and validate the user who has signed the PDF using the com.snc.pdfsigning.validation.method property.
Sign document templates for PDF documents -- Use the PDF document template to initiate digital signing, review, and generate a filled PDF document using a Common Access Card (CAC) or Personal Identification Verification (PIV) card.
Create from references -- Link document references to any record directly from the References list. You can easily see all documents linked to tables and target records.
Linking documents to a parent record -- Documents can be linked to records referred to as "parent records." You can create a document version and reference it through a parent record. You can also view, edit, download, or delete document references in the parent record.
Unlink documents -- Remove and unlink documents from a parent record when they are no longer relevant.
Delete a document -- Delete documents directly from a parent record.
Document Management lists -- Lists are a collection of template documents you can use to create documents that are linked to other target records. Only users with the admin role can access lists.
Include document actions -- Include document actions in an activity stream to view and track updates to attached documents in a record.
Redact sensitive data from documents -- Manually mask sensitive content or data from your PDF documents. Data redaction is available in configurable workspaces.
Redact data from documents -- Redact sensitive data from PDF documents by either searching keywords or selecting text.
Configure system properties to access files and folders from external content providers -- Configure system properties to enable access to files and folders from external content providers like Microsoft OneDrive V3.1 and Google Drive V3.1 when using the sn-document-explorer-connected component in Document Management with Personal authentication.
Attach a document from an external provider -- Attach documents from an external cloud like Microsoft OneDrive, Microsoft SharePoint, or Google Drive to Document Management.
Upload to a cloud -- Upload documents from Document Management to an external cloud like Microsoft OneDrive, Microsoft SharePoint, or Google Drive.
Document Management in Workspace -- With Document Management in workspaces you can organize documents into folders, manage document versions, control sharing permissions, and attach files from multiple sources to any ticket or record. The Documents component appears in the side panel of workspace record views and provides a centralized location for managing documents associated with a specific record.
Add documents in Workspace -- Use the file picker to add documents from the documents repository, external cloud storage providers, or your local desktop to records.
Manage document files and folders in Workspace -- Manage folders and documents from the Documents component to download, rename, manage permissions, track versions, add reviewers and approvers directly in the record within the workspace.
References -- The following sections describe the installed components and roles for Document Management, along with domain separation and supported browser information.
Domain separation and Document Management -- Domain separation is supported for Document Management. Domain separation enables you to separate data, processes, and administrative tasks into logical groupings called domains. You can control several aspects of this separation, including which users can see and access data.
Granular admin roles in Document Management -- Granular admin roles enable organizations to assign specific administrative permissions based on functional responsibilities, replacing broad admin access with targeted role assignments. Use the new admin roles to grant users administrative capability without using the admin role.
Document Viewer -- Document Viewer enables you to view documents directly in the ServiceNow AI Platform rather than having to download them.
Enable Document Viewer -- Enable Document Viewer to view documents directly rather than download them to view them in their native applications.
Plugins -- With Document Viewer, you can view documents directly in the ServiceNow Platform rather than having to download them. Two new plugins enhance the experience and provide more options for document viewing. You can collaborate with other people, copy, delete, restore, and view version history directly in a ServiceNow instance.
Enable accessibility features for DOCX to PDF conversion -- Enable the com.snc.document.conversion.accessibility_enabled system property to enable accessibility features for DOCX to PDF conversion. If the DOCX files have accessibility support, then accessibility support is retained in the Document Viewer while viewing the files.
View attachments with Document Viewer -- View documents within the platform using Document Viewer rather than having to download them to your own file system.
Disable Document Viewer -- Disable Document Viewer at the instance level to disable it or at table level to disable it for specific tables within the instance.
PDF generation and accessibility -- PDF generation settings support accessibility features such as accessibility tags for screen readers, customizable export formats, and image retrieval timeouts for optimized HTML to PDF conversion.
Export to PDF -- Export an individual record or list of records into a PDF format that supports accessibility. When this feature is enabled, accessibility tags are available in the PDF tag tree to help users who rely on-screen readers to navigate, understand, and interact with the generated PDF documents.
Guardrails for PDF generation and accessibility -- Static and dynamic guardrails are safeguards that help maintain stability during PDF generation. Static guardrails enforce fixed limits like maximum PDF size, while dynamic guardrails monitor real-time memory usage and terminate exports when memory pressure exceeds a defined threshold.
Managed Documents -- Use the ServiceNow Managed Documents application to control electronic documents within your instance.
Features -- Managed Documents is a lightweight, ITIL-based solution for creating and managing electronic documents within your instance.
Concepts -- The following concepts explain Managed Documents: Managed Document, Document Collection, Document Revisions, and Document Parameters.
Defining Document Workflow -- In the base system, all managed documents use the Managed Documents workflow after the Active check box is selected.
Defining Document Parameters -- Before using the Managed Documents application, the user with the document_management_admin role needs to set the parameters that define the kinds of documents to be managed through the application. Managed Documents provides both base and custom parameter options.
Defining Approval Rules -- To define a new approval rule, navigate to Managed Documents Administration Approval Rules and click New.
Defining Audiences -- To define a new audience, navigate to Managed Documents Administration Audience and click New.
Defining Name Formats -- The name format automatically generates a name for a document revision by arranging name components in a standard code to match naming conventions.
Domain separation and Managed Documents -- Domain separation is unsupported in Managed Documents. Domain separation enables you to separate data, processes, and administrative tasks into logical groupings called domains. You can control several aspects of this separation, including which users can see and access data.
Plugin -- This page describes the applications and modules, database table structure, scripts, and roles.
Install plugin -- The Managed Documents plugin is available for activation by users with the admin role.
Knowledge Document plugin -- The Knowledge Document plugin extends the Managed Documents plugin by providing the functionality for managed documents to be published to the Knowledge Base.
Link documents to Knowledge articles -- Manage a document and access the latest version of the document from an article by linking the document to a Knowledge article.
Create a document -- After Managed Documents parameters have been set by the administrator, documents can be created, requested, checked out, edited, checked in, copied, and, if necessary, rolled back to an earlier version.
Document approval -- During the approval process, the approver approves or rejects the document. A document goes through the approval process after the review process.
Review process -- During the review process, the reviewer approves or rejects the document. Sometimes a document will have multiple reviewers.
Enable electronic signature for approval -- Enabling electronic signatures for approval. Electronic signatures are helpful if you must obtain a digital signature for compliance or auditing purposes.
Create or request a new document -- Once an administrator has set parameters for the Managed Documents application, you can create or request new documents.
Specify an approver -- You can specify approvers for a document record after you save it.
Check in a document -- Check in the document after you revise it so other users can check out the document.
Copy a document -- A document can be duplicated at any time. This is useful if you have an existing document that you want to use as a base for a new document.
Deactivate a document -- To change the document state to Inactive, deactivate the document. This is useful when changes to a document have been put on hold. An inactive document can be reopened at any time.
Roll back a document -- A document can be rolled back to an earlier revision at any time. Before rolling back to an earlier revision, ensure that the document is not checked out and that you have Editor or Owner permissions for the document.
Cancel a document -- Change the document state to Cancelled when no more changes will be made to the document.
Check out a document -- Documents in the Managed Documents application can only be revised by one user at a time. Check out the document to revise it.
Create a document collection -- A document collection is a set of individual documents. After documents have been uploaded into Managed Documents, organize the documents by grouping them into collections.
Upload a document -- Upload a document into a saved record. You can upload text files, spreadsheets, presentations, PDF files, and more.
Check out a document to make changes -- After a document is added to a managed document record, check the file out to make changes. Checking documents in and out keeps a record of document changes and ensures that only one person at a time is editing the document.
Send a document out for review and approval -- When a document is ready, send it out for review and approval. If a reviewer or approver is not identified in the document record, the document is moved directly to the publishing stage.
Multi Provider Document Services Framework -- Enable your team to collaborate in real time and add versions, store, copy, delete, restore, and upload documents by integrating document providers with your ServiceNow instance.
Activate Multi Provider Document Services Framework -- You can activate the Multi Provider Document Services Framework plugin (com.snc.multiprovider_documents) for Document Services if you have the admin role. If the application does NOT include demo data or it does NOT install related applications and plugins, delete or revise the following sentence:
Integrate with Document Services -- Integrate Microsoft OneDrive, Microsoft SharePoint, and Google Drive with Document Services.
Document Service Framework -- Integrate the Document Services Framework with Microsoft OneDrive. Also reuse this short description in the release notes.
Setup Microsoft OneDrive for Document Services -- Integrate the ServiceNow instance and Microsoft OneDrive for Document Services by creating a custom OAuth application in Document Services to authenticate ServiceNow requests.
Google Drive integration with Document Services -- Use Google Drive to manage and sync your documents, and get version actions on documents directly in your ServiceNow instance. You can also collaborate on documents and manage attachments hosted within Google Drive.
Document service Framework -- Integrate the Document Services with Google Drive.Also reuse this short description in the release notes.
Set up Document Services framework -- Integrate a ServiceNow instance and Google Drive spoke for Google Drive by using Google Drive credentials to authenticate ServiceNow requests.
Personal authentication -- Personal authentication enables individual users to authenticate with their personal accounts within ServiceNow using a secure connection between the user's identity and their corresponding Microsoft OneDrive or Google Drive account, allowing users to access, view, and manage their personal files directly from ServiceNow.
User [mp_document_user] -- Multi Provider Document Services Framework Framework is installed with these roles.
Now Assist in Document Management -- Use ServiceNow Now Assist in Document Management to get key insights from the document through interactive Q&A, and auto- generated common questions. You can enable your agents to understand the documents so that they can give quick insights.
Explore -- Now Assist in Document Management uses generative AI to extract key insights from documents through seamless conversational interactions, reducing manual effort while improving accuracy and consistency.
Configure -- If you have the admin role, you can configure Now Assist in Document Management in the application enabling the use of its generative AI skills within the application workspace.
Configure the smart documents skill -- The smart documents skill is activated by default on all the tables. Configure it to customize access control, specify which tables use it, or adjust display preferences to get document insights through conversational interactions.
Activate the smart documents skill -- Activate the smart documents skill to get document insights through conversational interactions by using Now Assist in the Document Management application.
Use -- If you have a sn_nowassist_admin.nsa_admin role, you can use Now Assist in Document Management to quickly summarize documents and get insights.
Generate a document summary -- Generate a document summary to get quick insights into key information from documents by using Now Assist in Document Management.
Generate summary and ask questions -- Generate summary and ask questions to gain quick insights from your documents by using Now Assist in Document Management.
Knowledge Management -- The ServiceNow Knowledge Management (KM) application enables the sharing of information in knowledge bases. These knowledge bases contain articles that provide users with information such as self-help, troubleshooting, and task resolution.
Exploring Knowledge Management -- Learn more about Knowledge Management with a sample workflow and review the benefits it can provide for different users in your organization.
I18N - Knowledge internationalization -- The optional knowledge internationalization features enable knowledge users to view articles in multiple languages.
Scoped knowledge bases -- To protect knowledge bases containing sensitive articles, use a scoped knowledge base. Even system administrators and knowledge administrators can't administer scoped knowledge bases unless explicitly authorized through user criteria.
Predictive Intelligence for Knowledge Management -- The Predictive Intelligence for Knowledge Management capability uses machine-learning algorithms to provide various Knowledge Management capabilities, such as similar articles and knowledge demand insights.
Knowledge article templates -- Article templates have pre-defined fields structured in a specific order. These templates help create a consistent structure for knowledge articles.
Knowledge blocks -- Knowledge blocks are reusable pieces of content secured by customizable user criteria that you can add to knowledge articles in a knowledge base. The user criteria determine which user roles can or can’t read the block content in an article, enabling only relevant content to be visible to that user.
Knowledge subscriptions -- Subscribe to knowledge bases and knowledge articles to receive email notifications about new articles and article revisions or comments.
Knowledge demand insights -- Identify knowledge gaps and improve content of your knowledge base using the Knowledge Demand Insights feature.
Self-Service Analytics -- The Self-Service Analytics framework enables you to gather information about user activities and deflection outcomes related to those activities.
Translation management -- Knowledge articles are authored and published in many languages and translating these articles to languages other than the language they are authored in requires creating translation tasks. Translation management enables you to manage these translation tasks.
Knowledge-Centered Service configuration -- Knowledge-Centered Service (KCS) is a method for the creation and continuous improvement of knowledge based on the experience of agents and the patterns observed by knowledge reuse.
Article quality index for knowledge management -- Assess the quality of knowledge articles with the article quality index (AQI). The AQI helps maintain consistent quality of knowledge articles attached to a knowledge base where articles are written by various authors.
Article versioning -- Use the Knowledge Management article versioning feature to create and maintain multiple versions of a knowledge article.
Ownership groups -- Configure ownership groups and associate them with knowledge articles to maintain article quality, manage approvals, and for timely resolution of feedback.
Automating feedback management to improve content -- Manage high volumes of article feedback by enabling task generation for negative feedback. When an article is rated poorly or marked as unhelpful, a feedback task is generated.
Migrate to Knowledge Management v3 -- When you migrate to Knowledge Management v3 from v2, you must migrate legacy knowledge content and any customizations you have made to the Knowledge Base applications.
Migration from workflow to flow -- Migration from Workflow to Flow in Knowledge Management includes migration of publishing and retiring workflows to the flow designer framework.
Enhancements to knowledge article view page -- Enhancement to the UI components on the article view page improves their visibility and utility. The mobile responsive UI has been built to enhance the visual experience for those using Knowledge Management on a mobile device.
Knowledge Management setup guide for admins -- Before users in your organization can start creating knowledge bases and knowledge articles, you must set up Knowledge Management. Work with stakeholders to define requirements for setting up Knowledge Management effectively to meet the needs of users.
Activate knowledge blocks -- You can activate knowledge blocks [com.snc.knowledge_blocks] if you have the admin role. This plugin includes demo data and activates related plugins if they are not already active.
Enable knowledge blocks for each knowledge base -- Enable the knowledge blocks feature for each knowledge base where you plan to use the blocks. Once enabled, you can create knowledge blocks to add to knowledge articles within a knowledge base.
Activate translation management -- You can activate the Knowledge Management Advanced (com.snc.knowledge_advanced) and I18N:Knowledge Management Internationalization Plugin v2 (com.glideapp.knowledge.i18n2) plugins for translation management if you have the admin role.
Activate Knowledge Management KCS Capabilities -- You can activate the Knowledge Management KCS Capabilities plugin (com.snc.knowledge_kcs_capabilities) to enable the use of certain KCS roles and KCS article states.
Enable languages for a knowledge base -- Select the languages you want enabled at a knowledge base level. Users can then create articles only for selected languages.
Configure the Knowledge Management Service Portal -- The Knowledge Management Service Portal enables users to perform the same operations that are available with the Knowledge Management V3 plugin. From the portal, users can view knowledge bases and articles, search for information, sort and filter search results, and provide feedback.
Knowledge Management Service Portal widgets -- The Knowledge Management Service Portal uses a number of widgets to enable searches, display search results, and display articles, related articles, and related items.
Activate the Knowledge Management Service Portal plugin -- The Knowledge Management - Service Portal plugin (com.snc.knowledge_serviceportal) is active by default for customers on Madrid and later releases. Existing customers on release versions prior to Madrid can activate the plugin, if required.
Configure search widget instance options -- Configure widget instance options for the search widgets on the Knowledge Management Service Portal homepage and search results page.
Configure sort widget instance options -- Configure widget instance options for the knowledge sort widget on the Knowledge Management Service Portal search results page.
Configure article helpful widget instance options -- Configure the Knowledge Article Helpful widget instance options for the Knowledge Management article view page in the Knowledge Management Service Portal.
Configure article comments instance options -- Configure the Knowledge Article Comments widget instance options for the Knowledge Management article view page in the Knowledge Management Service Portal.
Configure related catalog item widget instance options -- Configure the Related Catalog Item widget instance options for the Knowledge Management article view page in the Knowledge Management Service Portal. These options relate to the list of catalog items mapped to an article.
Configure knowledge related articles widget instance options -- Configure the Knowledge Related Articles widget instance options for the Knowledge Management article view page in the Knowledge Management Service Portal. These options relate to the list of related articles mapped to an article.
Create a knowledge base -- Create a knowledge base to provide a self-service platform for users to store, share, and manage content. Configure knowledge bases into product or service categories and manage user access based on permissions. Customize workflows for publishing and retiring articles in the knowledge base.
Configure knowledge bases for a portal -- Select which knowledge bases are displayed in a portal to view the associated knowledge articles. If no knowledge bases are configured, users can view articles from all knowledge bases in the portal.
Configure knowledge subscriptions -- Configure knowledge subscriptions by activating the Knowledge Management Advanced plugin and setting the subscription properties.
Configuration tasks for knowledge managers -- Having multiple knowledge bases allows an organization to spread management responsibilities across multiple users, known as knowledge managers.
Add a knowledge article to featured content -- Add a knowledge article to appear in the Featured content section of the knowledge homepage and at the top of knowledge search results page.
Configure Self-Service Analytics -- Configure the Self-Service Analytics framework so you can use the generated metrics in a dashboard.
Activate Self-Service Analytics -- Activate the Self-Service Analytics Core plugin (com.snc.self_service_analytics_core) if you have the admin role. This plugin activates related plugins if they are not already active.
Configure pattern element groups for Self-Service Analytics -- Define a logical combination of two pattern elements, pattern element group, or both and how many times the combination occurs. Each pattern element group is implemented as regular expressions.
Activate Knowledge Management - Add-in for Microsoft Word -- Activate the Knowledge Management - Add-in for Microsoft Word plugin (com.snc.knowledge.ms_word) if you have the admin role. This plugin activates related plugins if they are not already installed.
User criteria diagnostics for Knowledge Management -- Manage user access to a knowledge base or an article using user criteria diagnostics. Understand what access users have to a knowledge base or an article and determine which user criteria define those permissions.
Collect knowledge usage metrics -- Capture metrics such as article views, page views, and portal searches to track aggregated knowledge usage by users.
Generate SEO information for articles using article templates -- Improve the searchability of knowledge articles by using the content in an article template field to generate SEO tags for articles created using that template. Search Engine Optimization (SEO) optimise searches in public search engine.
Integration with external knowledge sources -- Use the external content integration feature to integrate content from various external sources and enable unified knowledge search results.
Activate the External Content Integration plugin -- The External Content Integration feature is activated with the Knowledge Management - External Content Integration plugin (com.snc.knowledge.external_integration).
Define an external knowledge source -- Before you import content, create and configure the connection between the a Web Distributed Authoring and Versioning (WebDAV) - compliant external knowledge source and the ServiceNow knowledge base into which you want to import content. Define import parameters for the external knowledge source.
Open knowledge search results in source system -- While search results are aggregated within your instance, your users can also utilize features available in the source system (being able to edit in Microsoft SharePoint, for example). To open knowledge search results in a host system, configure the URL to the external source system to open articles from search results directly in the source system.
Sample configuration for integrating external knowledge content -- You can integrate content from multiple external sources so your users can acquire and search knowledge from a single location. Use this sample configuration to create a connection to your external account, configure external knowledge sources, and import content to enable search results for unified content.
Integrate external knowledge sources into the Knowledge Management application -- You can integrate content from multiple external sources so your users can acquire and search knowledge from a single location. Use this sample configuration to create a connection to your external account, configure external knowledge sources, and import content to enable search results for unified content.
Create a custom knowledge homepage -- As a system administrator, you can create a module allowing users to open a knowledge homepage for a specific knowledge base or category.
View knowledge logs -- Knowledge logs display information about which users have viewed knowledge articles, what they looked for, and where.
Use extension points for Knowledge Management -- Use UI extension points to add knowledge article headers and footers to knowledge articles and to customize the email template for notifications when a knowledge article is commented on. Use scripted extension points to customize the feedback object used in the email template for notifications when a knowledge article is commented on.
Enable actionable knowledge feedback -- The actionable knowledge feedback feature is available when the Knowledge Management Service Portal (com.snc.knowledge_serviceportal) plugin is activated and the actionable knowledge feedback properties are enabled.
Enable creating an article from a customer service case -- You can enable authors to reuse information in a case by copying case details into an article template. Use the pre-defined customer service source case table to article template target table configuration or create custom configurations between the two tables to copy information from a case to an article.
Configure Knowledge Demand Insights -- Configure the Knowledge Demand Insights feature to identify which topics are missing knowledge articles and creating actionable knowledge gaps for missing topics.
Configure solution definitions to find gaps in a knowledge base -- The Knowledge Demand Insights feature finds knowledge gaps by comparing knowledge bases with existing tasks. To enable comparing knowledge bases with a task type, you must first configure similarity and clustering solution definitions.
Configure the mapping of solution definitions with task tables -- Configure the combination of the task table and similarity and clustering solution definitions that are processed in a scheduled job for a task type. You can create another demand insights configuration or modify an existing configuration to define a scheduled job for demand insights.
Using Knowledge Management -- Use Knowledge Management to search and find information on self-help, troubleshooting, and task resolution in knowledge bases.
Knowledge Management Service Portal homepage features -- The Knowledge Management Service Portal homepage displays knowledge articles organized by knowledge base and category, as well as featured content and popular articles. Learn how to navigate the homepage to search for and find useful and relevant information quickly.
Using search in Knowledge Management Service Portal -- View a list of search results as well as options for sorting and filtering the items in the list. You can also use knowledge search in other Service Portals.
Knowledge Management Service Portal article view page features -- The knowledge article view page in Knowledge Management Service Portal displays the knowledge article details, including the article number, short description, and article content. You can also give feedback or comment on an article.
Knowledge article URL parameters -- You can add parameters to an article URL to view the latest version and an existing translation.
Using the homepage of Knowledge Management v3 -- The Knowledge Management v3 homepage displays knowledge articles organized by knowledge base and category, as well as featured content and popular articles.
Search using Knowledge Management v3 -- Search for knowledge articles from the knowledge homepage using the search bar on the Knowledge Management v3 homepage.
Request a knowledge base -- If existing knowledge bases do not fit your needs, you can request a new knowledge base through the service catalog. If the request is approved, you are added as the owner of the new knowledge base.
Using Now Mobile for Knowledge Management -- Access knowledge articles from anywhere using the Information applet on the Now Mobile app. You can view recently viewed and most popular articles, search for articles, browse articles by category, and provide feedback for articles.
View an article in the Now Mobile Information applet -- You can view the author, published date, number of views, and the overall rating details of the article in the Now Mobile Information applet. In addition, you can respond to and evaluate articles and view related items and related articles.
Manage ownership groups -- Create ownership groups and associate them to knowledge articles. Knowledge group managers or knowledge administrators can edit ownership groups.
Use article versioning -- Use article versioning to create and maintain multiple versions of a knowledge article.
Manually update customized files -- If you have customized any of the files that are updated as part of the Knowledge Management Advanced Installer plugin, these files are skipped during plugin activation and must be updated manually.
View all versions of an article -- View a list of all available versions for a selected knowledge article and then view the selected version in a new tab.
Retire a versioned article -- You can retire the latest published version of a knowledge article. Retiring a knowledge article doesn’t create a version. It simply marks the article as Retired.
Using knowledge blocks -- Use knowledge blocks to simplify knowledge authoring for writers and knowledge consumption for readers.
Create a knowledge block -- Create or modify a knowledge block to define a reusable piece of content that can be inserted into knowledge articles in a knowledge base. The knowledge block is secured by user criteria, which controls what users, groups, roles, companies, locations, or departments can read or not read the content in an article or search, enabling users to more easily view content that is relevant to them.
Select user criteria for a knowledge block -- Control which users can read or not read knowledge block content within an article in a knowledge base by setting user criteria at the knowledge base and knowledge block level. As a knowledge contributor, you can apply user criteria at the knowledge block level.
Retire a knowledge block -- You can retire a published knowledge block so that it's no longer available for users to view or search.
Add knowledge blocks to a knowledge article -- You can insert one or more knowledge blocks into a knowledge article within a knowledge base. Each knowledge block is secured by user criteria, which controls who can read or not read the content in an article.
Preview a knowledge article with knowledge blocks -- Preview knowledge articles by user or date. For unpublished articles, impersonate different users to see how blocks display based on user criteria. For published articles, preview by user and date to see past versions.
Create a knowledge block in Agent Workspace -- Create a knowledge block for a knowledge base in Agent Workspace to reuse a piece of content in knowledge articles in that knowledge base.
Edit a knowledge block in Agent Workspace -- Edit knowledge blocks within a knowledge base in Agent Workspace to update the reused content across articles within the knowledge base.
KBPortalServiceImpl - Global -- The KBPortalServiceImpl API is included with Knowledge Management V3 [com.snc.knowledge3] as a script include. It provides methods to use with knowledge, such as integration with a custom search.
KBPortalServiceImpl - KBPortalServiceImpl() -- The KBPortalServiceImpl API is included with Knowledge Management V3 [com.snc.knowledge3] as a script include. It provides methods to use with knowledge, such as integration with a custom search.
KBPortalServiceImpl - getResultData(Object request) -- The KBPortalServiceImpl API is included with Knowledge Management V3 [com.snc.knowledge3] as a script include. It provides methods to use with knowledge, such as integration with a custom search.
KBBlock - Global -- The KBBlock API is included with knowledge blocks [com.snc.knowledge_blocks] as a script include. It provides methods to use with the knowledge blocks feature, such as integration with a custom knowledge article viewer.
KBBlock - KBBlock() -- The KBBlock API is included with knowledge blocks [com.snc.knowledge_blocks] as a script include. It provides methods to use with the knowledge blocks feature, such as integration with a custom knowledge article viewer.
KBBlock - getArticleContent(GlideRecord knowledgeRecord) -- The KBBlock API is included with knowledge blocks [com.snc.knowledge_blocks] as a script include. It provides methods to use with the knowledge blocks feature, such as integration with a custom knowledge article viewer.
Use knowledge subscriptions -- Use knowledge subscriptions to receive email notifications about new articles and article revisions or comments.
Subscribe to a knowledge base -- Subscribe to a knowledge base and receive notifications when articles are added to that knowledge base.
Subscribe to a knowledge article -- Subscribe to a knowledge article within a knowledge base to receive email notifications about new articles and article revisions or comments.
Create translation assignments for knowledge articles -- Assign knowledge articles to language experts to ensure accurate translations. Identify the language experts and create assignment rules so that translation tasks are automatically assigned to language experts and groups.
Auto-create translation tasks -- Auto-create translation tasks in specified languages to avoid having to manually create translation tasks after an article is published. The available languages are determined by the language plugins that have been installed on your instance.
Bulk Translation for knowledge articles -- Perform bulk translations of knowledge articles in multiple languages using the Localization Framework application.
Translate knowledge blocks within an article -- If a selected article indicates that a knowledge block is missing a translation, you must translate the knowledge block before you can translate the article.
Delete questions from an AQI checklist -- Deleting a question in a checklist deletes the text in the question of previously performed AQI reviews that use the checklist. Deleting an AQI question from a checklist will not affect the score of the previously performed AQI reviews. However, the text of the question will not be displayed in the checklist.
Knowledge content migration from v2 to v3 -- To use the new functionality available in knowledge v3 with legacy articles, you must migrate these articles out of the default knowledge base.
Creating and maintaining articles -- Share your ideas and experience by creating a knowledge article. Review and provide feedback on knowledge articles, and resolve issues yourselves rather than contacting customer service or an internal helpdesk.
Create a knowledge article -- Knowledge contributors can create and edit knowledge articles within a knowledge base to share information across your organization.
Edit a knowledge article -- Edit knowledge articles within a knowledge base to update information shared across your organization.
Accessibility checker in the toolbar -- Accessibility checker in the toolbar enables you to identify and resolve accessibility related issues in a Knowledge article.
Map related articles -- Discover similar information across articles on a topic while viewing an article. You can manually map related articles or have the application automatically present related articles using machine learning (ML) algorithms.
Map catalog items related to an article -- Manually map catalog items related to a knowledge article to enable employees to request the related product or service.
Retire a knowledge article -- Initiate the retirement workflow to retire a knowledge article. Knowledge base owners and managers can view articles after they are retired but cannot search for retired articles on the Knowledge homepage and portal.
Select a knowledge article category -- Knowledge articles within a knowledge base are grouped by category. These groups can help you define the knowledge base taxonomy, and can help users find articles within that knowledge base.
Provide feedback for a knowledge article in Agent Workspace -- Provide feedback on a knowledge article by rating the article, marking the article as helpful or not helpful, and posting and replying to comments for the article in Agent Workspace.
Map a related article in Agent Workspace -- Discover similar information across articles on a topic while viewing a knowledge article. You can manually map related articles or have the application automatically present related articles using machine learning (ML) algorithms.
Map a related item in Agent Workspace -- Manually map catalog items related to a knowledge article in Agent Workspace to enable employees to request the related catalog item.
Work on a feedback task in Agent Workspace -- Start working on a feedback task, request clarifications, and resolve or close the feedback task in Agent Workspace. You can view all feedback tasks assigned to you or your ownership group.
Create a knowledge article from a feedback task in Agent Workspace -- When working on a knowledge article feedback task, if the current knowledge article doesn't address the issue, you can create another knowledge article from within the task. A feedback task is created for a knowledge article when the article is flagged, marked as not helpful, or rated low, or a knowledge gap feedback task is created on a topic.
Edit a knowledge article from a feedback task in Agent Workspace -- When working on a knowledge article task, you can edit the knowledge article from within the task. A feedback task is created for a knowledge article when the article is flagged, marked as not helpful, or rated low, or a knowledge gap feedback task is created on a topic.
Knowledge Management reference -- Reference topics provide additional information that you can use to configure and administer Knowledge Management.
Domain separation and Knowledge Management -- Domain separation is supported in Knowledge Management. Domain separation enables you to separate data, processes, and administrative tasks into logical groupings called domains. You can control several aspects of this separation, including which users can see and access data.
Additional plugins for Knowledge Management -- After Knowledge Management is activated, you can activate additional plugins that provide access to various additional Knowledge Management features.
Components installed with Knowledge Management Core -- Several types of components are installed with activation of the Knowledge Management Core plugin (com.glideapp.knowledge) including user roles and tables.
Knowledge Management properties -- As an administrator, you can configure the look and functionality of many knowledge base features with Knowledge Management properties.
Knowledge portal properties -- As an administrator, you can configure the look and functionality of many knowledge base features with Knowledge Management properties.
Knowledge search properties -- As an administrator, you can configure the look and functionality of many knowledge base features with Knowledge Management properties.
Knowledge article view properties -- As an administrator, you can configure the look and functionality of many knowledge base features with Knowledge Management properties.
Knowledge homepage properties -- As an administrator, you can configure the look and functionality of many knowledge base features with Knowledge Management properties.
Other knowledge properties -- As an administrator, you can configure the look and functionality of many knowledge base features with Knowledge Management properties.
Article versioning properties -- As an administrator, you can configure the look and functionality of many knowledge base features with Knowledge Management properties.
Knowledge subscription properties -- As an administrator, you can configure the look and functionality of many knowledge base features with Knowledge Management properties.
Article quality index properties -- As an administrator, you can configure the look and functionality of many knowledge base features with Knowledge Management properties.
External Content Integration Properties -- As an administrator, you can configure the look and functionality of many knowledge base features with Knowledge Management properties.
Actionable Knowledge Feedback Properties -- As an administrator, you can configure the look and functionality of many knowledge base features with Knowledge Management properties.
Group ownership properties -- As an administrator, you can configure the look and functionality of many knowledge base features with Knowledge Management properties.
Quick start tests for Knowledge Management -- Validate that Knowledge Management still works after you make any configuration change, such as apply an upgrade or develop an application. Copy and customize these quick start tests to pass when using your instance-specific data.
Knowledge Flow -- The publishing and retirement processes for a knowledge article are controlled by flows defined for the Knowledge Base that the article belongs to.
Knowledge Management Service Portal properties -- Knowledge Management Service Portal properties determine how information is displayed on the Knowledge portal. You must have the admin role to set configuration properties.
Article versioning changes -- Article versioning introduces new actions that allow knowledge users to create and revise versions of existing articles. It also introduces new fields and related lists to the Knowledge form, new columns to the Knowledge list, and updates to Knowledge dashboard reports.
Feedback on article versions -- With the article versioning feature, users can view and contribute to feedback on the current versions of knowledge articles.
Knowledge article version numbers -- Knowledge article version numbers follow a specific pattern. Increments to the version number depend on the revision type.
Validity of a knowledge article -- Knowledge article validity is the date a knowledge article expires. Articles do not appear in search results after the Valid to date or if the Valid to date is blank.
Knowledge article states -- Knowledge article versions can be in one of several states as it progresses through the creation cycle.
Knowledge workflows -- The publishing and retirement processes for a knowledge article are controlled by workflows defined for the knowledge base that the article belongs to.
Knowledge Management Platform Analytics Solutions -- Platform Analytics Solutions contain preconfigured dashboards. These dashboards contain actionable data visualizations that help you improve your business processes and practices.
Knowledge Management dashboard -- The Knowledge Management dashboard helps knowledge content owners and managers to determine the usage and quality of their knowledge content. It helps confirm that the proper processes and procedures are being followed for content creation.
Knowledge Management Overview dashboard -- The Knowledge Management Overview dashboard provides an overview of various usage metrics associated with knowledge articles. You can view and track knowledge usage and views and direct the efforts of content owners more efficiently.
Pareto chart for Knowledge Demand Insights -- The Pareto chart for Knowledge Demand Insights enables you to visualize candidate knowledge gaps and prioritize the order in which knowledge gaps should be resolved.
Demand Insights for Cases dashboard -- The Demand Insights for Cases dashboard enables you as a customer service case manager to identify which cases have no or insufficient knowledge coverage. You can then create feedback tasks for knowledge gaps to deflect such cases.
Demand Insights for Incidents dashboard -- The Demand Insights for Incidents dashboard enables you as an incident manager to identify which incidents have no or insufficient knowledge coverage. You can then create feedback tasks for knowledge gaps to deflect such incidents.
Demand Insights for HR Cases dashboard -- The Demand Insights for HR cases dashboard enables you as an HR agent to identify which HR cases have no or insufficient knowledge coverage. You can then create feedback tasks for knowledge gaps to deflect such HR cases.
Knowledge Center -- The ServiceNow Knowledge Center (KC) is designed to simplify the discovery and oversight of the organizational knowledge.
Exploring Knowledge Center -- The Knowledge Center Knowledge Center helps in the effective management of knowledge articles by using an intuitive interface. Beyond traditional knowledge bases, the Knowledge Center provides actionable insights and identifies gaps so that your content stays relevant and accurate.
Knowledge Center home page -- Knowledge Center is a plugin within Knowledge Management that helps in the effective management of knowledge articles by using an intuitive interface.
Knowledge Center article editor -- The Knowledge Center article editor has editing tools that help in formatting knowledge article content such as text, images, and media.
Knowledge Center Article Optimization -- Article Optimization is an automated system designed to improve the quality and health of knowledge articles, providing actionable feedback to authors and managers.
Potential knowledge gaps -- Potential knowledge gaps represent areas where you frequently encounter issues but lack supporting articles. Managing these gaps promotes better coverage and improved user experience.
Knowledge blocks in Knowledge Center -- Knowledge blocks are reusable pieces of content secured by customizable user criteria that you can add to knowledge articles in a knowledge base. The user criteria determine which user roles can or can’t read the block content in an article, enabling only relevant content to be visible to that user.
Knowledge Health Score -- The Knowledge Health Score measures the quality of knowledge articles and your knowledge bases using weighted scan metrics, so you can identify and resolve content gaps that affect discovery and user trust.
Article health score -- Track and improve the quality of your knowledge articles using the article health score. Scan results highlight specific issues to fix, and improvements automatically roll up to your Knowledge Base and instance scores.
Configuring Knowledge Center -- Configure the knowledge content recommendation skill to enable agents to utilize the context menu to elaborate or shorten a knowledge article in the TinyMCE. With the new enhance content editor available with Knowledge Center, agents can create and update the knowledge article with custom instructions.
Configuring Article Optimization jobs -- Article Optimization jobs are used to define a schedule to run scans along with their conditional settings, if any. Each job will have one or more scans associated with it.
Enable knowledge blocks in the Knowledge Center -- Enable the knowledge blocks feature for each knowledge base where you plan to use the blocks. Once enabled, you can create knowledge blocks to add to knowledge articles within a knowledge base.
Enable article health score calculation -- Activate article health score calculation so Knowledge Management assesses and displays quality scores for knowledge articles. Enabling this property activates the health score calculation engine, without which health scores aren't computed or displayed for knowledge articles.
Integrate Box in Knowledge Center -- Configure a Box application and connect it to your ServiceNow instance so that knowledge authors can use Box as an external content source for knowledge article creation using Now Assist.
Configure Box application -- Configure a Box application and connect it to your ServiceNow instance so that knowledge authors can use Box as an external content source for knowledge article creation using Now Assist.
Configure Application Registry for Box integration -- Configure a Box application and connect it to your ServiceNow instance so that knowledge authors can use Box as an external content source for knowledge article creation using Now Assist.
Using Knowledge Center -- Learn how to manage and enhance your knowledge base using the powerful tools and workflows available in Knowledge Center.
Search knowledge article -- Use the search function to find articles you want to work on and then filter and sort your results as needed.
Check Knowledge Center insights -- Learn how to access detailed views for gaps, duplicates, or article optimization from the Insights section in the Knowledge Center.
Address items that requires attention -- Learn how to review and manage items that need your attention, such as expiring articles, flagged content, and feedback tasks.
Generate and edit articles with the article editor -- The Knowledge Center (KC) Article Editor delivers an intuitive experience for creating and managing content. Featuring blocks, responsive previews, and AI-powered assistance, it simplifies article design while verifying accessibility and search engine optimization compliance. Backward compatibility with existing templates guarantees a smooth transition for authors and administrators.
Article optimization with article length scan -- The article length scan is a script‑based, non‑AI scan that runs in the background while authors work on articles. When the scan detects a length issue, an article length card appears in the Article Optimization panel.
Review and optimize articles with Article Optimization -- The Knowledge Center Article Optimization feature provides automated, actionable feedback to improve content quality, accessibility, and search engine optimization, with configurable scans to identify and fix issues.
Article Optimization with Reading Ease scan -- The Reading Ease scan runs as part of Article Optimization. The scan is triggered each time you save an article or when the scheduled job runs, or both. When the scan detects readability issues with a knowledge article, review and resolve the findings to improve the readability of the article that scored below the acceptable threshold.
Create knowledge articles using Now Assist and Box -- Use Box to create knowledge articles from content stored in an external Box account. When you initiate article creation and select Box as the source, Now Assist searches the connected Box account for files relevant to the prompt, then generates an article based on the results.
View the Knowledge Health Score dashboard -- View the instance-level health score gauge on the Knowledge Management homepage and navigate to the knowledge base health view to identify content that needs attention.
Add a knowledge block to a knowledge article -- Insert one or more knowledge blocks into a knowledge article within a knowledge base. Each knowledge block is secured by user criteria, which controls who can read or not read the content in an article.
Create a knowledge block in the Knowledge Center -- Create a knowledge block to define a reusable piece of content that can be inserted into knowledge articles in a knowledge base. The knowledge block is secured by user criteria, which controls what users, groups, and roles, can read the content in an article, allowing display of content that is relevant only to them.
Now Assist in Knowledge Management -- Use ServiceNow Now Assist in Knowledge Management to generate a new knowledge article for a case or incident via the Now Assist panel, classic environment, or the respective configurable workspace. Agents can use these articles to propose quicker resolutions to customers.
Explore Now Assist in Knowledge Management -- Now Assist in Knowledge Management enables agents to generate, edit, and publish knowledge articles from a case or incident using the Now Assist panel, classic environment, and configurable workspace.
Configure Now Assist in Knowledge Management -- If you have the admin role, you can configure the Now Assist in the Knowledge Management application, enabling agents to use its generative AI skills within their application workspace and the classic environment.
Configure the KB generation skill -- Configure the KB generation skill that agents can use to draft a knowledge article with Now Assist.
Configure skill for context menu -- Configure the knowledge content recommendation skill so that the agents can use the Now Assist context menu to expand or shorten a knowledge article in TinyMCE. With the new content editor available in the Knowledge Center, agents can create and edit knowledge articles using custom instructions.
Guidelines for creating prompts -- The guidelines help to write prompts for Out-of-Box (OOB) and custom knowledge article templates. Follow these instructions to create ideal prompts that optimize the use of AI models for generating knowledge articles.
Configure skill to identify duplicate articles -- Configure the Knowledge content management skill to enable admins and managers to activate the Now Assist Identify duplicate articles skill.
Configure Article Optimization skill and prompts -- Create custom prompts for the default Article Optimization (AO) skill in the Knowledge Center application and prompts using standalone custom skills.
Activate Article Optimization skill -- Activate the Knowledge Center Article Optimization skill to enable use of article optimization features for generating knowledge articles in the Knowledge Center.
Configure custom AI-based scans for Article Optimization -- The Out-of-Box (OOB) Knowledge Center settings provide default configurations for article optimization scans. However, you can customize scans for article optimization.
Configure Now Assist Skills for potential gaps -- The Potential Gaps also known as the knowledge gaps feature identifies missing knowledge articles. This functionality is available only when the Knowledge Gaps skill is activated in Now Assist Admin. Configuring this skill is necessary when working with gaps.
Configure Now Assist skills for merging articles -- To merge the duplicate knowledge articles, activate Now Assist skills for merging the duplicate articles. Once configured, these skills enable the system to merge duplicate articles effectively, ensuring consistent and streamlined content management.
Enable multilingual service in Now Assist -- Enable multilingual service in Now Assist Admin for Knowledge Management to support different languages in various third-party AI model providers. Select the languages that you want enabled for each of the AI model providers and enable native and dynamic translation support.
Enable article optimization recommendations -- Enable article optimization recommendations in Now Assist to activate AI-powered improvement suggestions for knowledge articles.
Use Now Assist in Knowledge Management -- Now Assist in Knowledge Management enhances the agent experience by using artificial intelligence (AI) to generate a new knowledge article based on the resolution provided to a case or an incident.
Generate article with multi-language -- Now Assist in Knowledge Management provides multi-language support for Knowledge article generation. Generate knowledge articles in multiple languages with the Now Assist multi-language support for Knowledge Management. As an agent, you can generate articles from incidents, cases and other task types that are documented in languages other than English by using a language selector configured by the admin.
Edit article with context menu -- Elaborate or shorten content within a Knowledge article using the Now Assist context menu feature that enables agents to leverage the generative AI capabilities of Now Assist in Knowledge Management.
Supported tags in content recommendation -- Elaborate or shorten content within a Knowledge article using the Now Assist context menu feature that enables agents to leverage the generative AI capabilities of Now Assist in Knowledge Management.
Create knowledge articles using Now Assist and Box -- Use Box to create knowledge articles from content stored in an external Box account. When you initiate article creation and select Box as the source, Now Assist searches the connected Box account for files relevant to the prompt, then generates an article based on the results.
Article Optimization with Reading Ease scan -- The Reading Ease scan runs as part of Article Optimization. The scan is triggered each time you save an article or when the scheduled job runs, or both. When the scan detects readability issues with a knowledge article, review and resolve the findings to improve the readability of the article that scored below the acceptable threshold.
Identify and review articles -- Review duplicate Knowledge articles using the Now Assist Identify and review duplicate articles feature.
Merge duplicate articles -- Merge multiple duplicate knowledge articles into a single, consolidated article using Now Assist in Knowledge Management. This task helps knowledge managers reduce redundancy, preserve source article traceability, and verify readers access the most accurate and recent information.
Response templates -- Resolve cases or support issues faster and more efficiently with response templates. Response templates (formerly known as templated snippets) are reusable messages that can be copied to case or task forms to provide quick and consistent messages to users, or to display standard chat response messages to requesters in Agent Chat.
Activate -- You can activate response templates (formerly known as templated snippets) [com.sn_templated_snip] if you have the admin role. This plugin includes demo data and activates related plugins if they are not already active.
Components installed with response templates -- Several types of components are installed with activation of the Templated Responses (com.sn_templated_snip) plugin, including tables and user roles.
Create a response template -- Create or modify a response template (formerly known as a templated snippet) to define a reusable message that can be copied to case or task forms or used in Agent Chat sessions to provide quick and consistent messages to users.
Manage service capabilities -- Give your customers tailored catalogs for products, and create portals for service requests, using the ServiceNow Service Catalog app.
Self-service -- The Self-Service application gives supported end users a clean, simple front end to their IT support organization.
Self-Service -- The Self-Service application gives supported end users a clean, simple front end to their IT support organization.
Add new request items -- Use ServiceNow's web-based interface to add new items to a request.
Amazon EC2 instance request from the Service Catalog -- Users can request the provisioning and deletion of virtual computers (Linux or Windows) in the Amazon EC2 virtual computing environment through the ServiceNow Service Catalog.
Request an instance -- Request the provisioning of a new Amazon EC2 instance through the service catalog.
Terminate an instance -- Shut down an Amazon EC2 instance through the service catalog.
Check-out redirect property -- A property called One-step checkout redirect (glide.vm.checkout_redirect) controls the view presented to virtual machine requesters in the service catalog.
Delete request items -- Use ServiceNow's web-based interface to delete items from a request.
Place a request -- Use ServiceNow's web-based interface for ordering predefined goods and services.
Create incidents and change requests from a requested item -- You can quickly open an incident or a change request from a requested item. It also maintains a relationship between the requested item, and its associated incidents or change requests.
View request status -- View the status of a request to see its progress, and determine when it may be fulfilled.
Service Delegation -- Service delegation is the ability to designate other users to view and interact with approvals sent or tasks assigned to you, and to receive copies of all email notifications sent to you.
Assessments and Surveys -- The Assessments and Surveys application helps you create, send, and collect responses for surveys. The application also helps you evaluate, score, and rank records from any table in the system.
Explore Assessments and Surveys -- The Assessments and Surveys application helps you create, send, and collect responses for surveys. The application also helps you evaluate, score, and rank records from any table in the system. Create questionnaires that you can assign to one or more users to assess their knowledge of any subject.
Use surveys -- Survey administrators—users with the survey_admin role—create and maintain surveys and configure how they are distributed and published. Surveys on Service Portal are also supported.
Survey questionnaires -- All surveys that are assigned to you appear in your personal assessment and survey queue.
Take a survey -- Take an assigned survey that appears in your assessment and survey queue.
Survey responses and results -- There is a metric result record for each user response to each question on every survey instance. Survey results for each question and category are calculated automatically based on the metric result records.
View results for all surveys -- You can view the survey responses that are stored on the Metric Result [asmt_metric_result] table.
View the results for a survey -- You can view the responses for one survey definition. Survey results are stored on the Metric Result [asmt_metric_result] table.
View a survey scorecard -- A survey scorecard provides a visual breakdown of survey responses by category, based on the way questions were answered.
Survey scorecard category results -- The Category Results view is a stacked bar chart showing survey results for all questions in an individual category or all categories by respondent count.
Survey scorecard question results -- The Question Results filter displays the result of all questions or an individual question using charts or lists. For the String, Attachment, Date, Date/time, Reference, and Ranking data types, the results are displayed in the list view. The results of all other data types are displayed in the pie chart view.
Survey scorecard average ratings -- The Average Ratings view displays the weighted average rating for each survey question in an individual category or all categories.
Survey scorecard history -- The History view compares the current ratings for the categories and their questions with ratings from the previous three years or four quarters.
Request translations for surveys -- Request translations for surveys to localize them into one or more languages. Localization requested items that are created for the selected surveys in all the selected languages.
Edit translations for surveys -- Edit the translations for surveys, and after you make the changes, you can publish the translation.
Survey responses in a database view -- You can view survey responses in a database view for reporting purposes. For each survey instance, you can view the instance as a single row and the answers to each survey question (metric) in the corresponding columns. Analyze the responses easily and, if you want, export the survey responses.
Survey administration -- Survey administrators—users with the survey_admin role—create and maintain surveys and configure how they are distributed and published. Surveys on Service Portal are also supported.
View survey reports -- Use the Survey Overview dashboard to view various survey reports, such as Surveys by Metric Type and State.
Survey designer -- Users with the survey_admin role can use the survey designer. The survey designer lets you create survey categories and questions, configure the details, and publish the survey to specific users or groups.
Survey categories -- Survey categories provide a way to group questions of a similar theme for a given survey.
Create a category in the survey designer -- A category represents a theme for evaluating a specific element of the survey topic and contains questions pertaining to that theme.
Create a survey category -- You can modify an existing survey to add one or more survey categories.
Create a question in the survey designer -- You can create multiple questions for each category in the survey designer, but each question can only be associated with one category.
Survey question data types -- You must choose a data type for each survey question. The data type determines the format of the question and the kind of data that is collected on survey questionnaires.
Create custom metric type -- Create your own custom metric type if you don’t find the metric type that you want in Survey Designer while designing surveys.
Configure category weights for a survey -- You can assign a weight to each category in a survey. The system calculates results from the weight that you configure.
View a survey instance -- A survey instance represents one questionnaire assigned to one user. You view an instance to verify that survey instances were created, to check the state of a survey instance, or to reassign a survey instance.
Survey users and groups -- Survey users and survey user groups help survey administrators control who can take a survey.
Create a survey user group -- Survey user groups are groups that have the Type field set to survey and display only the information most relevant to surveys. You can assign survey groups or any user group to surveys.
Allow recipients to retake a survey -- You can configure a survey to allow recipients to resubmit their answers as many times as they like, up to the survey's due date.
Copy a survey -- Create a copy of a survey with at least one category to reduce the effort of creating another survey with similar data.
Publish a survey -- You must publish a survey to enable people to receive and complete survey instances.
Customize the appearance of a survey -- As an assessment and survey administrator, set properties to customize the color of various elements on the questionnaires.
Survey definitions -- A survey definition is the root record upon which a survey is built.
Survey question data types -- You must choose a data type for each survey question. The data type determines the format of the question and the kind of data that is collected on survey questionnaires.
Survey question template -- Question templates define reusable sets of answer options for survey questions.
Update min and max values to match templates -- If you use survey result calculation data, ensure that the Min and Max values for a question that uses a template are equal to the smallest and largest template definition Value.
Add a metric category and metric in the question bank for surveys -- Reuse the question categories (metric categories) and questions (metrics) added in the question bank for surveys. You can add metric categories or metrics from the question bank to a survey, or from the survey to a question bank.
Create or modify answer options -- You must create answer options, called metric definitions, for survey questions that have Data type set to Choice or Likert Scale.
Trigger condition example -- You can send out auto-triggered surveys when an incident is closed or resolved.
Survey distribution -- There are several ways for survey administrators to distribute surveys to users.
Email notifications for surveys -- When an administrator creates a survey and assigns it to a user, an email notification is sent to the user. Selecting the survey link in the email notification redirects the user to the survey page, where the user can take the survey. This type of survey is called a non-triggered survey.
Send survey invitations to users -- You can send survey invitations using the Assign Survey or Send Invitations buttons on the Survey Definition form.
Define a recipients list for surveys -- Use a recipients list to define targeted set of users for whom the survey invite can be sent. You can use a recipients list for multiple surveys.
Embed a survey within the Outlook email client -- Embed an interactive survey in the email notification sent to a user. The user can answer the survey questions and submit the survey from the email client instead of opening the survey in a new browser tab.
Survey URLs -- You can distribute a survey by giving survey users a survey URL.
Distribute a general survey URL -- You can distribute a general survey URL to allow any eligible user to open a survey questionnaire.
Deactivate auto-notification for surveys -- Deactivate an auto-notification to avoid a problem that causes a second system-generated email notification being sent to a user.
Obtain a survey instance URL -- You can distribute a survey instance URL to allow the assigned user to open a survey questionnaire.
Test a survey URL -- When there are survey users associated with a survey, the survey is restricted so only those users can use the survey URL. You can test the survey URL to ensure it is restricted.
Outlook Actionable Messages -- Outlook actionable messages plugin enables users to respond to the survey from within the Microsoft Outlook application.
Sentiment analysis for surveys -- You can use sentiment analysis to determine whether user responses for a survey are considered positive, negative, or neutral.
Configure a sentiment connector -- Specify the service URL and other configuration information for third party APIs that are used for sentiment analysis.
Sentiment analysis property -- You can use the sentiment analysis property to customize the Sentiment Analysis module.
Sentiment analysis results -- The sentiment analysis results view contains a bar chart that displays the percentage of positive, negative, and neutral results, along with the instance count for each category.
Surveys in Service Portal and the Now Mobile app -- If you've installed Service Portal, you can use the My Assessments and Surveys widget in Service Portal. Users can view surveys in Service Portal. Service Portal also supports surveys for users on mobile devices that have the Now Mobile app installed. The My Assessments and Surveys widget is available by default on the Service Portal home page.
Surveys in ITSM Virtual Agent -- You can use surveys in ITSM Virtual Agent to collect survey responses from users through conversational questionnaires (pre-chat and post-chat surveys) in the chat client.
Legacy survey migration -- Users with the survey_admin role can migrate legacy survey data to create copies of legacy surveys and their related records in assessment tables. The Survey Management application, which is built on the assessment engine, is available as an alternative to legacy surveys.
Migrate a legacy survey -- Migrate a legacy survey and its related records to take advantage of a more powerful feature set.
Survey question migration -- Before you migrate a legacy survey, understand that some legacy survey questions cannot be migrated due to incompatible question types.
Migrated components -- When you migrate a survey, the system maps records from survey tables to assessment tables.
Migrated question review -- To maintain accurate result calculations, you may need to make minor adjustments to some of the migrated survey records to ensure results are calculated correctly.
Surveys reference -- Reference topics provide additional information about the forms, fields, and properties you use while working with surveys.
Survey roles -- The Survey application uses the following roles.
Key survey terms -- These survey terms are used throughout the documentation to describe survey management functions and capabilities.
Survey Overview dashboard -- The Survey Overview dashboard displays various survey reports, such as Surveys by Metric Type and State.
Metric Result form -- Description of the field values for the Metric Result form.
Normalized value for an assessment -- The normalized value is calculated based on a linear equation and the scale definition of the metric. This value can be used for risk assessment.
Domain separation in Surveys -- Domain separation is supported in Surveys. Domain separation enables you to separate data, processes, and administrative tasks into logical groupings called domains. You can control several aspects of this separation, including which users can see and access data.
Recipients List form -- Description of the field values for the Recipients List form.
Assessments -- Use assessments to evaluate, score, and rank records from any table in the system.
Using assessments -- Before you create assessments, assign the assessment_admin role to the appropriate users in your organization and determine your objectives for the assessment.
Assessment administrator tasks -- Before you create assessments, assign the assessment_admin role to the appropriate users in your organization and determine your objectives for the assessment.
Configure an assessment -- You can create a new assessment on a selected assessable records to evaluate, score, and rank records from any table in the system. Then create a metric category and assessment metrics for the assessment, publish the assessment, and assign it to the selected users.
Assessment generation -- In the Assessments application, administrators or assessment administrators can trigger the system to generate scheduled assessments or on-demand assessments when all the prerequisite steps are completed.
Assessment groups -- An assessment group is a container for assessment instances and assessment results generated in a single occurrence.
View an assessment metric category -- View assessment metric categories that are used with assessment metric types and assessment metrics in generating the bubble charts on the Demand Workbench. The bubble charts help the demand managers to assess the demands visually.
Assessment metric categories -- In the Assessments application, a metric category represents a theme for evaluating assessable records in a given metric type.
Create a category for assessable records -- After you create a metric type and generate assessable records, create categories for the themes you are interested in using to evaluate the assessable records.
Assessable record associations -- Only the assessable records associated to a category can be evaluated using metrics in that category. Manage which assessable records you evaluate for each category by creating and removing the associations.
Manage an assessable record automatically -- Define at least one filter condition in the Metric Category form to automatically associate assessable records with the category.
Manage an assessable record manually -- You can manually create and remove assessable record associations for a category using a related list on the Metric Category form.
Delete a category -- When you delete a category, the system also deletes the associated category users and stakeholders.
Assessment metrics -- In the Assessments application, a metric is a trait or value used to evaluate assessable records.
Create an assessment metric definition -- Metrics with Choice or Likert Scale data types must have metric definitions defined to represent answer options on questionnaires.
Change the order of an answer -- By default, the order of answer options is established when a question is created with a data type of Choice or Likert Scale.
Metric types and assessable records -- In the Assessments application, assessment administrators create and administer metric types and assessable records.
Delete a metric type -- Deleting a metric type entails deleting many related records.
Export an assessment -- You can share assessments between ServiceNow instances by exporting an assessment and then importing the assessment on another instance.
Import an assessment -- Share assessments between ServiceNow instances by importing a previously exported assessment.
Create an assessment signature -- A signature on an assessment questionnaire contains assertions that can communicate directions, a legal statement, or any text that you want the recipient to consider.
Assessable records -- An assessable record links a source record you want to evaluate, such as the company record for Amazon or the user record for a sales representative, to a metric type, such as vendors or employees.
View an assessable record -- View the Assessable Record form to edit preferences and perform various actions.
Enforce a condition to delete an assessable record -- By default, the system does not delete assessable records, even if you change the table or conditions for the type and the existing assessable records no longer match.
Delete an assessable record -- When you delete an assessable record, the system deletes any stakeholders for the record.
Add a metric category and metric in the question bank for assessments -- Reuse the question categories (metric categories) and questions (metrics) added in the question bank for assessments. You can add metric categories or metrics from the question bank to an assessment, or from the assessment to a question bank.
Update a metric minimum and maximum value to match a template -- For assessment results to be properly calculated, the Min and Max values of a metric that uses a template must be equal to the smallest and largest template definition Value, respectively.
Category users and stakeholders -- Users who take assessments are individuals in your organization who have specific knowledge of the assessment categories and the records being assessed.
Create a category user -- Create category users by associating users in the system to metric categories.
Create stakeholders automatically -- You can configure the system to create stakeholders automatically from all category users and assessable records associated with a category using the Create stakeholders check box on the Metric Category form.
On-demand assessments -- On-demand assessments can be generated for metric types with the Schedule type field set to On demand.
Generate an on-demand assessment -- Use on-demand assessments to familiarize yourself with the basic assessment process and test your questionnaires using minimal configuration.
Generate an on-demand assessment for one assessable record -- When you generate an on-demand assessment from the Assessable Record form, the resulting assessment contains questions from the categories associated to the assessable record.
Generate an on-demand assessment for multiple assessable records -- When you generate an on-demand assessment from the Assessment Metric Type form, the resulting assessment contains questions from all categories associated to any assessable records for the metric type.
Scheduled assessments -- The system generates a unique scheduled job for each metric type with the Schedule type field set to Scheduled.
Schedule an assessment -- After you have evaluated your questionnaires using on-demand assessments, edit your categories and metrics as needed, reset your metric type record, and select the users who are qualified to evaluate the assessable records.
Schedule types -- You can schedule assessments for preconfigured users or send them to any user on demand.
Assessment trigger conditions -- A trigger condition tells the system who to send a designated assessment to and when, based on specific conditions.
Enable manager notifications -- Users with the assessment_admin role can enable the Notify manager assessment is overdue email notification.
Assessment notifications -- You can configure the system to send email notifications for assessments.
Assessment notification workflow -- The system sends assessment notifications according to the Notify assessment user workflow. Users with the workflow_admin, workflow_creator, or workflow_publisher roles can view workflows.
View a metric result -- Metric results contain values that represent an evaluated record's performance for a specific metric, based on a single evaluation from one user or from the execution of a script. Metric results contain actual values as well as calculated values. The system uses values from metric results to calculate category results.
Assessment results -- In the Assessments application, when the system processes completed questionnaires or gathers values returned from scripted metric queries, it generates assessment result records called metric and category results.
Assessment Overview dashboard -- The Assessment Overview dashboard displays various assessment reports, such as Assessable Records by Type, Total Metrics by Metric Type, and Assessments by State.
View assessment reports -- Use the Assessment Overview dashboard to view your assessment reports.
View a bubble chart for assessments -- Assessment administrators can view bubble charts to compare the relative standing of assessable records in three metric categories.
Bubble charts for assessments -- A bubble chart is a dynamically updated graph that plots assessment results for multiple assessable records.
Create a bubble chart -- Assessment administrators can create bubble charts to compare the relative standing of assessable records in three metric categories.
Bubble chart components -- The X- and Y-axes each represent a different metric category. Assessable records are plotted on the chart as circular markers, or bubbles, which vary in size according to scores for the third category.
View an assessment scorecard -- The Assessments application prepares printable scorecards. A scorecard displays easy-to-interpret assessment results, in which the current calculated ratings for an assessable record are compared to previous ratings or to the ratings of other records.
Create a link to a scorecard -- Users with the admin role can create UI actions that allow users to view scorecards from tables.
Assessment scorecard averages -- The Averages view compares the current ratings for an assessable record in each metric category with the average, minimum, and maximum values from all assessable records in the filter. All ratings are from assessments generated over the trailing twelve months (TTM).
Assessment scorecard categories -- The Categories view displays a bar chart showing the average ratings for each category in the selected time interval.
Assessment scorecard category metrics -- The Category Metrics view displays the weighted average results for each metric within a category. Use this view to learn how individual metrics affect the overall rating for the category.
Assessment scorecard head-to-head compare view -- The Head to Head Compare view allows you to compare the ratings of two assessable records of the same type. Select an assessable record from the choice list to compare against the current record's trailing twelve month (TTM) ratings.
Assessment scorecard history -- The History view compares the current ratings for each category with ratings from the previous three years or four quarters.
Live feed view of assessable records -- The Live Feed view displays Live Feed conversations that apply to the assessable record. Users can view the group feed, including tagged comments, and add comments of their own.
Assessment scorecard ratings -- The scorecard ratings section displays various ratings for the assessable record.
Create a decision matrix -- The name and labels on a decision matrix are closely linked to the categories you choose for the axes. For that reason, first select the metric type and define the X and Y axes before you fill in other fields on the Decision Matrix form.
Decision matrixes -- Assessment results obtained by questionnaires and scripted metrics can be mapped to decision matrixes.
Take an assessment -- Take the assessments assigned to you from the assessment and survey queue.
Assessments in Service Portal and the Now Mobile app -- If you've installed Service Portal, you can use the My Assessments and Surveys widget in Service Portal. Users can view and take assessments in Service Portal. Service Portal also supports assessments for users on mobile devices that have the Now Mobile app installed. The My Assessments and Surveys widget is available by default on the Service Portal home page.
Assessment questionnaires -- In the assessment process, users complete assessment questionnaires on topics of interest to provide subjective data for future business decisions.
Metric types and assessable records -- In the Assessments application, assessment administrators create and administer metric types and assessable records.
Delete an assessable record -- When you delete an assessable record, the system deletes any stakeholders for the record.
View an assessable record -- View the Assessable Record form to edit preferences and perform various actions.
Assessments reference -- Reference topics provide additional information about the forms, fields, and properties you use while working with assessments.
Data types for assessments -- Metric data types have functions that depend on the method that you select.
Assessment Metric form -- Description of the field values for the Assessment Metric form.
Metric Category form -- Description of the field values for the Metric Category form.
Assessment Metric form for a category -- Description of the field values for the Assessment Metric form. Use the fields when you create an assessment metric for a category.
Domain separation and Assessments -- Domain separation is supported for Assessments. Domain separation enables you to separate data, processes, and administrative tasks into logical groupings called domains. You can control several aspects of this separation, including which users can see and access data.
Quick start tests for Assessments and Surveys -- Validate that Assessments and Surveys still works after you make any configuration change such as apply an upgrade or develop an application. Copy and customize these quick start tests to pass when using your instance-specific data.
Quizzes -- Quizzes are questionnaires that you can assign to one or more users to assess their knowledge of any subject. The quiz functionality is built on the assessment engine and provides many of the same features as assessments and surveys.
Data types for quizzes -- You need to choose a data type for each quiz question. Various data types helps you collect and analyze different kinds of data.
View quiz reports -- Use the Quiz Overview dashboard to view various reports on data such as Quizzes by State, Questions by Data Type, and Number of Correct Answers.
Quiz designer -- The quiz designer provides a single interface that users with the assessment_admin role can use to create, edit, and distribute quizzes.
Create a quiz -- When you create a quiz, you can create one or more categories and then add questions to each category.
Create quiz categories -- Create quiz categories, which represent a theme for evaluating a specific element of the quiz topic and contain questions pertaining to that theme.
Create quiz questions -- Create multiple questions for each category. Each question can be associated with only one category.
Select a quiz recipient -- When the system distributes a quiz, it sends email notifications to the category users and their managers.
Publish a quiz -- When you publish a quiz, the system sends email notifications to the recipients and to their managers. A card in each recipient's My Assessments & Surveys portal displays a link to the quiz.
Copy a quiz -- Create a copy of a quiz with at least one category to reduce the effort of creating another quiz with similar data.
Edit a quiz -- You can update a quiz after the quiz has been distributed.
Configure a scored question -- Only scored questions are considered when calculating category and quiz results.
View an assessment category result -- Category results contain values that represent an evaluated record's performance in a specific metric category. Each category result record stores data from one assessment group. Category result values are calculated based on category and metric weights and from metric result values for the same category.
Quiz scorecards -- The Quizzes application prepares printable scorecards.
Category results -- The Category Results view is a stacked bar chart of responses to all questions in a category.
Question results -- The Question Results view shows the results for all questions in a quiz.
Average ratings -- The Average Ratings view displays a bar chart of the weighted average rating for each question in a category.
Scorecard history -- The History view compares the current ratings for the categories and their questions with ratings from the previous three years or four quarters..
Modify the weight of a category -- View category results stored in the Assessment Category Result [asmt_category_result] table, which display the overall ratings for each category based on the weighted value for each scored question, and edit the default Weight value.
Take a quiz -- All available quizzes assigned to you appear in your personal assessment and survey queue. When you submit a quiz, the system stores your responses. If a quiz allows retakes, you can resubmit it as many times as you like until its due date.
View a quiz instance -- View an instance to verify that quiz instances were created, to check the state of a quiz instance, or to reassign a quiz instance. A quiz instance represents one questionnaire assigned to one user.
Add a metric category and metric in the question bank for quizzes -- Reuse the question categories (metric categories) and questions (metrics) added in the question bank for quizzes. You can add metric categories or metrics from the question bank to a quiz, or from the quiz to a question bank.
Create quizzes with forms -- As an alternative to the Quiz Designer, you can create a complete quiz using records in the Assessment application.
Set up a category -- A category represents a theme for evaluating a specific element of the quiz topic and contains questions pertaining to that theme.
Quiz reports -- Quizzes provide several global reports so that assessment administrators can view important statistics.
Classic approvals -- Classic approvals are a legacy process to require authorization on tasks before the work is done. In earlier releases, you could create approval records to define approval tasks and associate users or groups to approve or reject them.
Approval engines -- The differences in the way that companies handle their approvals, as well as the differences between approvals for the various applications (such as Service Catalog Requests and Change Management), calls for supporting flexibility in setting up approvals within applications.
Set up an approval engine -- To manage the approvals for each of the Task tables in the system, set up an approval engine.
Approval rules -- Many organizations rely on an approval process to ensure that requests are reasonable and fit an organization's budget.
Set automatic approval rules -- Approval rules can automatically set the approval state to something other than Not yet requested. As a result, an approval rule can create a set of approvers. You can also start the approval process by setting the approval state to Requested.
Gating approvals -- A gating approval acts as a gate through which a request must pass before it can start.
Process approvals -- Once a request has passed its gating approvals, any relevant execution plans are initiated.
Approve with a process guide -- Process guides work similarly to approval rules in that their execution is controlled via a condition.
Schematic of a hypothetical approval process -- In the diagram below of a hypothetical approval process, the gating approval is color coded blue and an in-process approval is orange.
Approval summarizer formatter -- The approval summarizer formatter creates the summary at the bottom of an approval form.
Summarizers -- Approval summarizers are stored in the Macro [sys_ui_macro] table.
Create a new custom approval summarizer -- After you add a new table that has approvals to an instance, you can add a custom activity formatter by creating a new UI macro and then add it to the appropriate form.
Approval with e-signature -- Approve or reject an approval record by re-entering your login credentials. See the history of an approval from its activity stream or its audit history.
Activate Approval with e-Signature plugin -- The Approval with e-Signature plugin (com.glide.e_signature_approvals) allows users to approve requests by re-entering their login credentials.
Select an approval table -- By default, activating the Approval with E-signature plugin enables e-signature for all tables for which an approval exists.
Approval status -- The approval status of a change request is determined by looking at the current status of all the approvers.
Generate an approval using approval rules -- The system can automatically generate an approval request to individuals or groups when specific criteria are met. The automatic generation of approval requests is driven using the System Policy feature.
Generate approvals using Workflow flows -- Workflow Studio flows are a powerful and flexible method of generating approvals. Use workflow flows to create group approvals and user approvals.
Multiple approvers -- With multiple approvers, all approvers must authorize the request before the status will change to "Approved".
Receive notifications -- Individuals who are designated approvers automatically receive approval notifications, including approval status updates.
Embed an approval request within the Outlook email client -- Embed an interactive approval request for service catalog requests in the email notification sent to a user. The user can accept or reject the approval request from the email client.
Dynamic approval forms -- When you are looking at an approval request, the form has a context-appropriate summary of the item to be approved.
Scripts and engines execution order -- Scripts, assignment rules, business rules, workflows, escalations, and engines all take effect in relation to a database operation, such as insert or update. In many cases, the order of these events is important.
State flows -- State flows enable an administrator to customize transitions from one state to another in tables derived from the Task [task] table and configure the system to perform work during transitions to specific states.
State flow cleanup -- The business rules, client scripts, and UI actions that the system creates automatically to perform custom transitions exist only while the state flow records that use them are present.
Work notes -- Work notes are an important part of the state flow process and are used to communicate information about state transitions.
Domain separation and State Flows -- Domain separation is unsupported in State Flows. Domain separation enables you to separate data, processes, and administrative tasks into logical groupings called domains. You can control several aspects of this separation, including which users can see and access data.
Geolocation -- The geolocation feature uses Google Maps to track users, plan efficient routes between locations, and assist in finding accurate travel times for applications that require this information, such as Work Management.
Geolocation Google key -- Geolocation functions in the ServiceNow AI Platform require a Google Maps API for Business license, or a Google Maps Javascript API Key, to enable use of Google Maps.
Geolocation history -- The Geolocation History [geo_history] table contains the history of each tracked user's location over time.
Location tracking -- Geolocation adds the Geolocation tracked field to the User form. In the default view of a user record, select the Geolocation tracked check box to enable location tracking for the user.
Service Catalog -- Use the ServiceNow Service Catalog application to develop comprehensive service catalogs that empower customers with self-service capabilities. Tailor portals to enable customers to request a range of catalog items, including services and product offerings. Additionally, you can standardize request fulfillment processes to ensure the accuracy and availability of items within the catalogs.
Explore -- You can use Service Catalog to customize portals where your customers can request catalog items such as service and product offerings. You can also standardize request fulfillment to ensure the accuracy and availability of the items in the catalogs.
Explore Catalog Builder -- The Catalog Builder experience enables you to delegate the creation and maintenance of catalog items.
Record Producer -- A record producer is a specific type of catalog item that allows end users to create task-based records, such as incident records, from the service catalog.
Create a record producer -- You can create a record producer for tables and database views that are in the same scope as the record producer. Also for tables that allow create access from applications in other scopes.
Populate record producer data -- You can enter data for all records created by the record producer, and redirect an end user to a particular page after the record producer is submitted.
Order guides -- Order guide submits a single service catalog request that generates several items.
Create an order guide -- You can create an order guide with a two-step or three-step ordering process.
Configure a sequence -- Configure a sequence in Playbooks to fulfill items in order guides. Once you define a sequence, you don't have to manually check whether required items have been fulfilled before fulfilling their dependent items.
Request an order guide -- Once created, order guides present the customer with a three-step ordering process by default.
Review an order guide -- Once created, order guides present the customer with a three-step ordering process by default.
Create an item variable assignment -- Create an item variable assignment that enables the catalog admin set up a default value mechanism in the order guide context so that the user can focus only on required values.
Cascade an order guide variable -- Cascading enables values entered for variables in the initial order form to be passed to the equivalent variables in the ordered catalog items.
Use a variable set -- Cascading enables values entered for variables in the initial order form to be passed to the equivalent variables in the ordered catalog items.
Hide cascaded variables -- Cascading enables values entered for variables in the initial order form to be passed to the equivalent variables in the ordered catalog items.
Avoid enforcement -- You can avoid enforcing a mandatory field within tabs.
Run order guides automatically -- You can run an order guide automatically from within a workflow or a server script, passing parameters to that order guide to define variable values.
Define a content item -- A content item is a service catalog item that provides information instead of goods or services.
Configure a default width -- Configure the default width for variables on a catalog item page to specify what percentage of the screen size that it can span.
Create or edit catalog item -- Define individual catalog items using Service Catalog. You can create, edit, and copy catalog items.
Edit a catalog item -- Define individual catalog items using Service Catalog. You can create, edit, and copy catalog items.
Copy a catalog item -- Define individual catalog items using Service Catalog. You can create, edit, and copy catalog items.
Accessibility checker in the -- Define individual catalog items using Service Catalog. You can create, edit, and copy catalog items.
Add a catalog item -- Service Catalog enables you to add a catalog item to multiple catalogs and categories.
Share catalog items across -- You can share a catalog item, enabling users to order that item from different catalogs. For example, you can share a Password Reset item across catalogs serving different teams.
Cart layout -- Service catalog enables catalog administrators to configure the layout and functionality of the service catalog cart used in your organization to place requests for catalog items.
Configure the cart layout -- Configure cart layout records to define functionality for widgets or screens in the shopping cart.
Cart layout considerations -- Configure cart layout records to define functionality for widgets or screens in the shopping cart.
Configure widget and column macros -- Configure cart layout records to define functionality for widgets or screens in the shopping cart.
Create macros for cart layout -- Configure cart layout records to define functionality for widgets or screens in the shopping cart.
Configure Service Catalog preview screens -- You can configure shopping cart preview screens for the one-step and two-step carts, for the wish list, and for the Classic Mobile app.
Configure the wish list screen -- You can configure shopping cart preview screens for the one-step and two-step carts, for the wish list, and for the Classic Mobile app.
Configure Classic Mobile shopping cart screen -- You can configure shopping cart preview screens for the one-step and two-step carts, for the wish list, and for the Classic Mobile app.
Configure a one-step shopping cart screen -- You can configure shopping cart preview screens for the one-step and two-step carts, for the wish list, and for the Classic Mobile app.
Configure a two-step shopping cart screen -- You can configure shopping cart preview screens for the one-step and two-step carts, for the wish list, and for the Classic Mobile app.
Migrating to cart layouts -- Service catalog enables you to configure cart layouts to add, remove, or change elements of the service catalog shopping cart. Before you migrate your system to use cart layouts, familiarize yourself with existing configurations for catalog content and decide whether to discard or retain these configurations.
Legacy flexible checkout and delivery forms -- ServiceNow includes several options that provide administrators some control over content in service catalog template-driven forms.
Requester search results -- In the final checkout step, a summary screen provides a list of all items and services ordered.
Modifications in the checkout form -- You can modify the checkout form to use an alternate description field or to add request item number for each line.
Define item quantity choices -- In the Service Catalog, the default quantity choices are 1–10. You can configure the quantity selector with additional choices. This configuration is also applicable in Service Portal.
Remove item restrictions -- Service Catalog enables you to remove or apply restrictions on all order guides, record producers, and wizard launchers.
Using variables for price setup -- You can define a price for every service catalog item. The price or recurring price of a catalog item can be modified with variables, increasing the base price for that item.
Reference -- You can define a price for every service catalog item. The price or recurring price of a catalog item can be modified with variables, increasing the base price for that item.
Lookup select box -- You can define a price for every service catalog item. The price or recurring price of a catalog item can be modified with variables, increasing the base price for that item.
Set recurring price -- A catalog item can have a recurring price in addition to an initial price.
Extend the pricing model -- The pricing model is useful if you want the price or recurring price to be dynamically calculated based on how a user completes the ordering form. You can extend the pricing model of a catalog item by editing the item price or the recurring price.
Hiding prices in the service catalog -- Administrators can configure options to hide catalog item prices in the service catalog for listings of specific items, for specific types of items, or for all items.
Hide prices globally -- Administrators can configure options to hide catalog item prices in the service catalog for listings of specific items, for specific types of items, or for all items.
Hide prices for specific items -- Administrators can configure options to hide catalog item prices in the service catalog for listings of specific items, for specific types of items, or for all items.
Create up to ten copies of a Service Catalog request -- Clone a request to create up to ten copies (clones) of the same Service Catalog request, for different users, without having to enter the same information multiple times. For example, you can request a new piece of equipment for several specified people, generating multiple individual requests quickly from a single initial request.
Create scripts -- Service Catalog enables you to use certain scripts.
Create a custom cart -- Administrators with a knowledge of Jelly can customize the look and feel of service catalog carts, either globally or for specific catalog items, using the UI macro capability.
Link a cart to an item -- Administrators with a knowledge of Jelly can customize the look and feel of service catalog carts, either globally or for specific catalog items, using the UI macro capability.
Service catalog home page configuration -- The home page for a service catalog provides the primary front end for ordering items within that catalog. You can configure various elements of the pages within the Service Catalog.
Configure search and navigation -- You can use service catalog properties to configure search and navigation within the service catalog homepage.
Refine search results -- Use properties to refine search results in Service Catalog.
Configure keyword search for catalog items -- When you search for a catalog item by a keyword in Service Catalog, the search results are displayed by considering a few fields of the catalog table.
Configure AI-based catalog search experience -- Improve employee engagement with an AI-based catalog search experience in Service Portal and Now Mobile. Intelligent query features enable users to quickly and easily find the answers they need.
Configure preview -- Configure the number of items that have the Preview section expanded to display item details. You can also change the default number (5) of items and categories that display, and hide the Exists in categories information.
Set number of items and categories to preview -- Configure the number of items that have the Preview section expanded to display item details. You can also change the default number (5) of items and categories that display, and hide the Exists in categories information.
Hide the existing categories in the categories display -- Configure the number of items that have the Preview section expanded to display item details. You can also change the default number (5) of items and categories that display, and hide the Exists in categories information.
Create a renderer -- Create or modify renderers using UI macros to provide the rendering instructions. Renderers define a specific look and feel for a catalog or category.
Select a renderer for a catalog -- Create or modify renderers using UI macros to provide the rendering instructions. Renderers define a specific look and feel for a catalog or category.
Select a renderer for a category -- Create or modify renderers using UI macros to provide the rendering instructions. Renderers define a specific look and feel for a catalog or category.
Customize a catalog homepage -- Customize a catalog homepage to provide end users with access to catalogs from one homepage.
Display subcategories in a panel -- Customize a catalog homepage to provide end users with access to catalogs from one homepage.
Customize the multi-catalog homepage -- Customize the multi-catalog homepage to provide end users with access to multiple catalogs from one homepage.
Show item details in sections or pop-ups -- By default, a service catalog category displays the first two items with the preview section expanded to show item details. You can change the number of items that are previewed, or change the preview to appear in a pop-up window.
Configure Classic Mobile devices -- When you configure Service Catalog on a Classic Mobile device, you can define the layout and presentation of catalogs. You can then perform actions such as ordering products and services, submit incidents and problems using record producers.
Define the mobile layout -- You can configure the Classic Mobile layout for categories within a service catalog.
Manage catalogs in CMS sites -- When your organization uses the content management system (CMS) as well as Service Catalog, you can select which catalogs are supported within the CMS sites.
Set up catalog portal pages -- The Catalog Portal Page [sc_catalog_view_mtom] table links catalogs to CMS portal pages and defines the default catalog to portal page combination used by URLs.
Manage catalog portal pages -- Multiple service catalogs enable your organization to offer different sets of services to different teams within the organization, such as IT services, human resources, and facilities management.
Customization vs configuration -- There are important differences between customizing and configuring ServiceNow applications. The ServiceNow platform is built to embrace customization and configuration but how you do so can have significant impacts on ServiceNow support, upgrading to future ServiceNow platform versions, and the functionality of the ServiceNow platform.
Service Catalog for managers and end users -- Every user with a login can view and order items from the Service Catalog from departments within your organization. These catalog items can include goods, services, and information.
Service Catalog home page -- The home page for a service catalog lists the goods and services available to order from that catalog.
Searching a service catalog -- The home page for a service catalog lists the goods and services available to order from that catalog.
Service Catalog request screens -- To place a request from a service catalog, navigate to the catalog home page and select the item to order.
Clone a request -- You can clone a request for up to 10 users on the notification list.
View catalog item audit history -- You can view the audit history of changes to items you requested. For example, you can view changes to variable values to find out who made the changes. Fulfillers and administrators can view history for any requested item.
Service Catalog items -- The overall catalog is made up of a collection of discrete catalog items.
Specify related items and articles for a catalog item -- Specify related items and articles for a catalog item to provide alternatives and additional information. These items and articles are displayed in the catalog item page in Service Portal and Now Mobile.
Add an ordered item link to an item -- Use ordered item links to provide a link on the ordered item screen that provides more information about an item.
Translation of Service Catalog items -- You can translate Service Catalog items into multiple languages using the ServiceNow Localization Framework.
Monitoring aggregated catalog item data -- Monitor aggregated catalog item data like fulfillment automation coverage, translation coverage, and conversational coverage using the Service Catalog Overview dashboard.
Configuring Service Catalog -- Service Catalog enables users with the Catalog Administrators role (catalog_admin) to set up the service catalog.
Service catalog categories -- Categories organize service catalog items into logical groups. Administrators and catalog administrators can create and configure categories, defining their characteristics and adding content such as catalog items to them.
Create a category -- Administrators and catalog administrators can create or edit a category.
Configure dynamic categories -- Dynamic categories let you organize and display commonly requested items and knowledge articles. Dynamic categories appear on the right side of the service catalog homepage by default.
Service catalog setup -- Service Catalog enables users with the Catalog Administrators role (catalog_admin) to set up the service catalog.
Set up a service catalog -- To set up a Service Catalog, plan the way your organization defines and maintains Service Catalog items, and how it fulfills them.
Multiple service catalogs setup -- Multiple service catalogs enable your organization to offer different sets of services to different teams within the organization, such as IT services, human resources, and facilities management.
Create a catalog -- Multiple service catalogs enable your organization to offer different sets of services to different teams within the organization, such as IT services, human resources, and facilities management.
Manage items in a catalog -- Multiple service catalogs enable your organization to offer different sets of services to different teams within the organization, such as IT services, human resources, and facilities management.
Manage catalog portal pages -- Multiple service catalogs enable your organization to offer different sets of services to different teams within the organization, such as IT services, human resources, and facilities management.
Catalog site records -- Administrators and catalog administrators must consider these points before they upgrade to multiple service catalogs.
Service Catalog scoping -- Scoping support is available to define the limits of entities in Service Catalog.
Scriptable service catalog variables -- You can use scripting to reference any request item variable from a table in scoped and non-scoped environment.
Define filters for My Requests -- Define request filters to filter incidents, requests, or tasks under the Self-Service My Requests module in ServiceNow AI Platform, the My Requests widget in Service Portal, and the My Requests applet in the Now Mobile app.
Delegated request experience -- You can request a catalog item on behalf of another user or multiple users using the Requested For variable.
Service Catalog request fulfillment -- When a user orders a catalog item, a request is created that follows a fulfillment process. A fulfillment process defines the steps to request approval, assign fulfillment tasks, and fulfill requests. Workflow Studio flows, workflows, or execution plans are used to define fulfillment processes.
Service catalog workflows -- Two service catalog workflows are provided in the base system. Use the Graphical Workflow Editor to modify the default workflows or to create additional service catalog workflows. Service catalog workflows support domain separation.
Create a catalog workflow -- Create service catalog workflows when the default workflows are not appropriate for a fulfillment process.
Add an activity to a catalog workflow -- You can add activities to a workflow to perform tasks such as running a script, sending notifications, or requesting approvals. Activities can succeed or fail, which can result in actions performed by other activities.
Execution Plans -- An execution plan describes how a catalog item is procured, configured, and installed.
Create an execution plan -- Administrators and catalog administrators can create and manage execution plans and the associated variable tasks.
Add catalog item variables to a task -- Administrators and catalog administrators can create and manage execution plans and the associated variable tasks.
Execution plan tasks -- An execution plan contains one or more execution plan tasks, such as for obtaining approval. Execution plan tasks are assigned to a fulfillment group.
Set up an execution plan approval task -- An execution plan contains one or more execution plan tasks, such as for obtaining approval. Execution plan tasks are assigned to a fulfillment group.
Set up a fulfillment group -- An execution plan contains one or more execution plan tasks, such as for obtaining approval. Execution plan tasks are assigned to a fulfillment group.
Delivery information for tasks -- An execution plan contains one or more execution plan tasks, such as for obtaining approval. Execution plan tasks are assigned to a fulfillment group.
Skipped tasks -- An execution plan contains one or more execution plan tasks, such as for obtaining approval. Execution plan tasks are assigned to a fulfillment group.
Creating execution plan tasks -- An execution plan contains one or more task templates. Each task template defines work that can be completed by a specific fulfillment group.
Define task templates -- An execution plan contains one or more task templates. Each task template defines work that can be completed by a specific fulfillment group.
Conditions to run execution plan tasks -- An execution plan contains one or more task templates. Each task template defines work that can be completed by a specific fulfillment group.
Condition scripts to run tasks -- An execution plan contains one or more task templates. Each task template defines work that can be completed by a specific fulfillment group.
Service Catalog checkout models -- The service catalog defaults to one-step checkout model, but also allows two-step checkout. Administrators and users with the catalog_admin role can enable and configure the two-step checkout model and control how the delivery address is populated.
Enable the two-step checkout process -- The service catalog defaults to one-step checkout model, but also allows two-step checkout. Administrators and users with the catalog_admin role can enable and configure the two-step checkout model and control how the delivery address is populated.
Specify requester location -- The service catalog defaults to one-step checkout model, but also allows two-step checkout. Administrators and users with the catalog_admin role can enable and configure the two-step checkout model and control how the delivery address is populated.
Create a catalog request from another flow -- You can create a catalog request to join the Service Catalog flow from a different flow. For example, from an incident flow, you can create a request, and associate the request with the incident. It helps you in tracking the requests associated with an incident and vice versa.
State closure in the request fulfillment execution plan -- The state closure in the request fulfillment process of a catalog item depends on the status of the associated catalog tasks, request items, and the request. It is applicable only for execution flows.
View request notifications -- View request notifications that are sent during specific events in a catalog request life cycle. These notifications are sent to various recipients including the Employee Center and ITIL users.
Service Catalog security -- Service Catalog enables you to set the security for catalog with user criteria.
Set security for items and categories -- An administrator can control access to content in the service catalog by creating and applying user criteria records.
Apply user criteria to items -- Apply a user criteria record to items and categories, either from the item or category form or from the user criteria form.
Apply user criteria to categories -- Apply a user criteria record to items and categories, either from the item or category form or from the user criteria form.
Extend user criteria -- Extend the user criteria table when the available user criteria fields are not sufficient. User criteria references various user fields (fields from the User [sys_user] table), such as department, company, and groups. You can extend user criteria with a custom field to include any other user reference field (field from the User [sys_user] table) of interest.
User criteria migration -- Service catalog user criteria records provide access control for service catalog items and categories.
Data structure differences -- Service catalog user criteria records provide access control for service catalog items and categories.
Legacy service catalog access controls -- Service catalog supports several ways to control access to a catalog item or category. These controls are also known as catalog entitlements.
Restrict access -- Service Catalog enables an administrator to grant or deny access to a service catalog item or category by company, department, group, user, or location.
Restrict access by role -- Service Catalog enables an administrator to grant or deny access to a service catalog item or category by company, department, group, user, or location.
Restrict access by a script -- Service Catalog enables an administrator to grant or deny access to a service catalog item or category by company, department, group, user, or location.
Service Catalog and CSDM -- The Service Catalog lets you create other catalogs (such as the Request Catalog and the Product Catalog) that provide self-service opportunities in the channel you want to use, such as the self-service portal, the mobile app, or the Virtual Agent.
Service Catalog and CSDM tables -- Service Catalog manages and uses CSDM tables. Several ServiceNow products benefit from and add value to Service Catalog.
Service Catalog use case -- You can create customized catalogs where you can request items such as a specific service or product. With this use case, CSDM provides Service Catalog connection to the service offerings and services.
Associate a catalog item with a taxonomy topic in Employee Center -- Associate your existing and new catalog items, knowledge base articles, and quick links to the appropriate taxonomy topics so that the catalog items are available in the Employee Center as content in the topics or child topics.
Save a draft of a catalog item -- Save a draft of a catalog item while requesting it on the Employee Center, Service Portal, and Now Mobile.
Service Catalog in Service Portal -- Use Service Portal to configure an improved version of Catalog. You can customize Service Portal where your customers can request catalog items such as service and product offerings. You can use the Service Catalog widgets to build a catalog for your portal.
Request an order guide from Service Portal -- Use the SC Order Guide widget on Service Portal to request an order guide with several catalog items for a specific purpose.
Service Catalog in mobile -- You can use a mobile and track request and approval flows of Service Catalog.
Fulfiller experience in Mobile Agent -- Approve catalog requests, requested items, or change requests from anywhere using the ITSM ServiceNow Agent application.
Manage a catalog request approval -- Manage your assigned catalog request or requested item by approving or rejecting it from anywhere using your mobile device.
Request experience in Now Mobile -- You can enable users to request for an item or service, and track or approve requests on mobile using the Now Mobile app.
Configure catalogs -- Enable your users to view and request their associated items in the Now Mobile app. If no catalogs are selected, users can view and request items from all catalogs in the system. By default, the app uses Service Catalog.
Submit and track a request -- Submit a request for an item or service and track the progress of your request with the Now Mobile app.
Create a quick action in your mobile applications -- Provide easy access to an important item by creating a quick action. For example, you can create a quick action that opens a Service Catalog item.
Service Catalog configuration for Universal Request -- You can configure a catalog item or record producer to create a universal request when a request is submitted. The associated requested item (for catalog item) or task-based record (for record producer) becomes the primary ticket for that universal request.
Standard ticket page for a requested item -- To display the related information, you can configure the standard ticket page for requested items on the various portals. This configuration verifies a consistent experience when viewing submitted requests in portals.
Generative AI summarization on the standard ticket page -- On the standard ticket page, requesters can quickly access a generative AI summary of the ticket and its recent activity at the top. To display this summary, make sure the Summary fields is set up on the Ticket configuration page and that the Now Assist in Standard Ticket Page skill is enabled.
Service Catalog Reference -- Reference topics provide additional information about the lists and forms.
Service Catalog terms and roles -- The Service Catalog application uses these roles to manage different aspects of the application.
Administrator [admin] -- The Service Catalog application uses these roles to manage different aspects of the application.
Domain separation and Service Catalog -- Domain separation is supported in Service Catalog. Domain separation enables you to separate data, processes, and administrative tasks into logical groupings called domains. You can control several aspects of this separation, including which users can see and access data.
Request for domain separation in Service Catalog -- Enable domain separation in Service Catalog by requesting for the activation of the Service Catalog - Domain Separation plugin (com.glideapp.servicecatalog.domain_separation).
Sample ATF tests for Service Catalog in Service Portal -- Validate the continued functionality of Service Catalog after any configuration change such as an upgrade or after developing an application. All test suites and tests should pass on a default implementation. To validate a custom implementation, copy the automated tests and configure them for your customizations.
Service catalog variables -- Service catalog variables capture and pass on information about choices a customer makes when ordering a catalog item. Variables help define the structure of a catalog item form that is displayed to the customer.
Types of service catalog variables -- Variables allow you to specify questions for a catalog item. Several types of service catalog variables are provided. Some variable types accept variable attributes.
Attachment -- When submitting a catalog item request, this variable lets you upload an attachment for a question of the item.
Break -- The break variable displays a horizontal line across the form.
Check box -- The check box variable lets you enable and disable options by selecting and clearing it.
Email -- The email variable creates a widget to enter and select an email address.
HTML -- The HTML variable lets you provide content with advanced formatting, including images, for a catalog item.
IP Address -- Use the IP address variable to specify the IPv4 and IPv6 data for a catalog item.
Label -- The label variable displays a label across the form. Labels are formatting elements. No data is collected.
List collector -- The list collector variable creates an interface that lets you select and add multiple records from a table.
Lookup multiple choice -- The lookup multiple choice variable creates radio buttons using data from a table. Its functionality is similar to the lookup select box variable, which creates a choice list from queried data.
Lookup select box -- The lookup select box variable creates a choice list using data queried from a table. Its functionality is similar to the lookup multiple choice variable, which creates radio buttons from queried data.
Custom and Custom with label -- The custom variable inserts a UI macro into the catalog item. Custom with label variable inserts a UI macro with a label.
Masked -- The masked variable inserts a field that masks the text entered.
Multi-line text -- The multi-line text variable creates a field that lets you enter multiple lines of text.
Multiple choice -- The multiple choice variable creates radio buttons for question choices.
Numeric scale -- The numeric scale variable creates a set of radio buttons for a range of options, like a Likert scale.
Reference -- A reference variable references a record in another table. For example, a variable named point_of_contact references the User [sys_user] table.
Requested for -- Before submitting a catalog item request, this variable helps you specify who this request can be submitted for.
Rich Text Label -- This variable displays a formatted label on a catalog item form.
Select box -- The select box variable creates a list from predefined question choices.
Single-line text -- The single-line text variable creates a field to enter a single line of text.
UI page -- The UI page variable inserts a UI page into the catalog item.
URL -- The URL variable creates a widget for users to enter URLs.
Wide single-line text -- The wide single-line text variable creates a field that spans the form, letting users enter longer lines of text.
Yes/No -- The Yes or No variable creates a choice list with Yes and No as options.
Create a service catalog variable -- Create service catalogs variables to gather information from users ordering a catalog item, for example, to ask users which options they want for the item.
Service Catalog variable attributes -- There are a few Service Catalog variables support specific attributes to define the behavior and restrictions for variables.
Service catalog data lookup -- The Data Lookup and Record Matching Support for Service Catalog plugin offers similar features to the general Data Lookup and Record Matching Support plugin.
Troubleshooting -- You can create a custom table to store lookup data.
Audit service catalog variables -- Audit the variables so that the audit history records all changes to the named variables.
Service Catalog variable editors -- Variable editor displays variable values in fulfiller forms. A requester, while requesting the item, specifies these variable values in the catalog item questions.
Configure the default variable editor for other tables -- After you configure the default variable editor for a task-extended table, you can view and edit the values of questions specified by the requester in the record producer. Applicable only for records generated by a record producer.
Service catalog variable sets -- Administrators and catalog administrators often define multiple catalog items that use the same group of service catalog variables. Catalog managers and catalog editors can attach a variable set for items to which they are assigned. However, catalog managers and catalog editors cannot create a variable set.
Variable set layout -- Variable sets can have one of many layouts. You can define the order of the variables for each item.
Set an item-specific order -- Variable sets can have one of many layouts. You can define the order of the variables for each item.
Examples of variable set orders -- Variable sets can have one of many layouts. You can define the order of the variables for each item.
Service Catalog parameters -- You can use the Service Catalog parameters to identify the parent mapping configuration for a request, and join the service catalog flow from any other flow. For example, from an incident flow, you can create a request, and associate the request with the incident.
Catalog Wizard form -- Description of the fields for the Catalog Wizard Step, Catalog Wizard Section, Variable, and Catalog Wizard Question forms in Service Catalog wizards.
Order guide form -- Description of the fields on the Order guide form.
Catalog Item form -- Description of the fields on the Catalog Item form.
Service Catalog topic blocks in Virtual Agent powered by NLU -- You can design a topic conversation in the Virtual Agent powered by Natural Language Understanding (NLU) by including reusable topic blocks to perform request submission tasks.
Debugging Service Catalog -- Debug user criteria of catalog items, UI customizations for Service Catalog pages, actions on catalog item variables, performance diagnostics of a catalog item, and so on.
Debug actions on catalog item variables -- Analyze the client-side actions affecting the state and values of all variables. You can also get insights into the performance of each script working on the variables.
Debug UI customizations for a Service Catalog page -- Perform the health check of a Service Catalog page. The UI Page Customization Diagnostics window displays the UI macros applicable for the Service Catalog page and their corresponding states. For issues on a Service Catalog page due to customized UI macros, you can identify the source of broken functionality.
Debug performance diagnostics of a catalog item -- Analyze the impact of the variable setup in a catalog item on its runtime performance, and identify any issues. You can review the processing time of the catalog item and its variables based on the triggered SQL queries.
Debug a Service Catalog variable -- Monitor changes in the state and the value of a Service Catalog variable due to catalog client scripts, catalog UI policies, and catalog data lookups. You can diagnose and resolve issues related to such changes, and track client-side scripting errors on this tab.
Item diagnostic report -- For a catalog item data and configuration, you can identify possible violations from the ServiceNow recommended practices.
Run the Item Diagnostic Results report -- Identify the catalog items that are not designed per ServiceNow recommended practices to run your catalog efficiently.
Catalog Builder -- You can create or edit a catalog item (catalog item or record producer) using a visual and guided experience along with specified restrictions. The Catalog Builder experience enables you to delegate the creation and maintenance of the catalog.
Create a service fulfillment step type -- Expand the coverage of service fulfillment use cases beyond those supported by step types in base system. Using a service fulfillment step type, catalog item owners can define multiple steps that are part of the request fulfilment process.
Creating or editing catalog item template -- Pre-specify values or provide restrictions for attributes such as catalogs, categories, variable types, and portal settings, which are applicable during the catalog item creation or editing process. You can create a template for a catalog item or record producer.
Add advanced capabilities to a catalog item -- Add advanced capabilities, such as catalog client scripts, data lookup rules, and advanced reference qualifiers to a catalog item.
Create UI policies in Catalog Builder -- Configure catalog UI policies with scripts and multiple catalog UI policy actions in Catalog Builder to facilitate the creation of complex catalog items.
Create client script in Catalog Builder -- You can create client scripts to customize the catalog item, such as to control the behavior of the catalog items after they're published.
Catalog client script form -- Use client-side scripts to define dynamic behavior or validations on this catalog item.
Discard a catalog item -- Discard a catalog item that’s in the Draft state in Catalog Builder.
Transfer catalog items using update sets -- Transfer catalog items published through Catalog Builder from one instance to another easily by using update sets automatically created for the catalog item. For example, you can transfer catalog items created by a business user from a non-production to production instance.
Localization Framework integration with Catalog Builder -- The Translation Status tab in the Catalog items tab on the Catalog Builder dashboard enables you to view the translation status of catalog items, and translate catalog items on the fly using manual or machine translation methods.
Now Assist in Catalog Builder -- Use ServiceNow Now Assist in Catalog Builder to create catalog items of your choice in Catalog Builder by giving text inputs.
Exploring Now Assist in Catalog Builder -- Learn how the Now Assist in Catalog Builder application helps you to create catalog items by simply describing them. Now Assist generates catalog items with more detailed descriptions and question labels.
Install Now Assist in Catalog Builder -- Install the Now Assist for Creator application from the ServiceNow Store to get Now Assist in Catalog Builder.
Creating a catalog item conversationally using Now Assist -- Create a catalog item conversationally using Now Assist and make the item available in Service Catalog for catalog item requests. You can also define dynamic behavior for your catalog item and apply auto-populate settings.
Edit already published catalog items using Now Assist -- You can edit published catalog items conversationally using Now Assist. If you’ve already started editing a published catalog item, you can still use Now Assist to edit the draft of that published catalog item. You can edit variables and UI policies in this mode.
Catalog item generation reference -- Reference topics provide additional information about configuration properties, roles, and more.
Now Assist: Location, catalog, category, and topic functions -- When creating or editing a catalog item, you can use plain language to assign values for catalog, category, or topic. If the value you provide matches an existing entry, Now Assist automatically applies it to the item. This streamlines the process and reduces manual data entry.
Now Assist: Fulfillment, access, and portal setting functions -- In addition to catalogs, categories, and topics, Now Assist allows you to set three other key fields for a catalog item: Access, Fulfillment flow, and Portal settings. You can configure these simply by describing your requirements in plain language.
Suggestions to describe catalog items -- Now Assist uses the description that you write to generate a catalog item for you. If you're using Now Assist for creating a catalog item, use these suggestions to describe your catalog item.
Catalog item standards for catalog item generation -- The Catalog Item Standards knowledge base contains a knowledge base article. This article called Catalog Best Practices, has best practices that help Now Assist provide guidance during catalog item creation in Catalog Builder.
Catalog Item Standards scope and examples -- This reference describes the in-scope best practices that can be used for catalog item generation. It provides examples of in-scope and out-of-scope best practices and documents the rules for how best practices are applied.
Catalog item generation skill -- Use the Catalog item generation skill to create catalog items of your choice using Now Assist.
Refine content skill -- Use the refine content skill to shorten, elaborate, rephrase, or generate content in the fields by using Now Assist.
Conversational Catalog Request -- Now Assist in Conversational Catalog Request provides a conversational, generative AI-powered experience for submitting catalog item requests through Virtual Agent.
Catalog Agent for Premium chat -- The Catalog Agent for Premium chat uses AI Agent conversation through Now Assist to guide requesters through a conversational catalog request.
LLM topic block for Conversational Catalog Request -- The LLM topic block is a Virtual Agent topic component that connects a conversational catalog request to Now Assist. It enables generative AI to interpret requester input during the conversation.
Catalog item request approaches -- Catalog items can be requested conversationally, depending on how your admin has configured Virtual Agent and which approach is in use. The available approaches help you select the appropriate method for your environment.
Configure Now Assist in Conversational Catalog Request -- Speed up and provide a conversational and streamlined experience based on generative AI while submitting a catalog item request in Virtual Agent. Your organization can increase self-service and reduce operating costs.
Catalog Agent -- Use this reference to understand the Catalog Agent capabilities, supported request types, constraints, and key considerations when deploying conversational catalog requests.
LLM topic blocks -- Use this reference to understand the LLM topic blocks capabilities, supported request types, constraints, and key considerations when deploying conversational catalog requests.
Catalog Conversational Coverage -- ServiceNow Catalog Conversational Coverage provides a dashboard to view a high-level overview of the conversational and non-conversational status of catalog items configured for the LLM topic block.
Conversational catalog overview dashboard -- ServiceNow Catalog Conversational Coverage provides a dashboard to view a high-level overview of the conversational and non-conversational status of catalog items configured for the LLM topic block.
Catalog item conversational details page overview -- ServiceNow Catalog Conversational Coverage provides a dashboard to view a high-level overview of the conversational and non-conversational status of catalog items configured for the LLM topic block.
View the Overview dashboard using the ServiceNow AI Platform -- ServiceNow Catalog Conversational Coverage provides a dashboard to view a high-level overview of the conversational and non-conversational status of catalog items configured for the LLM topic block.
View the Overview dashboard using Catalog Builder -- ServiceNow Catalog Conversational Coverage provides a dashboard to view a high-level overview of the conversational and non-conversational status of catalog items configured for the LLM topic block.
Guidelines for slot filling in catalog request -- Now Assist in Conversational Catalog Request uses a large language model (LLM) to extract variable values from a requester's input and pre-fill catalog item questions, a capability known as slot filling.
Prefill in conversational catalog request -- The generalized prefill capability for conversational catalog request automatically populates catalog item form fields using data sourced from the requesting user's profile and from the active chat conversation history. This reduces manual data entry for requesters, improves form completion accuracy, and accelerates time-to-submission for service requests raised through the conversational interface.
Fulfillers can request catalog items for others -- The experience for fulfillers streamlines the process of making catalog requests on behalf of others. This tailored workflow leverages parent context, such as incidents or cases, to improve efficiency, accuracy, and traceability of requests.
Request catalog item through Now LLM -- You can design a topic conversation in Virtual Agent powered Now LLM by including reusable topic blocks to perform request submission tasks.
Hermes Messaging Service -- The Hermes Messaging Service enables you to integrate your Apache Kafka environment with your ServiceNow instance.
Explore -- Learn about the Hermes Messaging Service and how it helps you manage the flow of data between your Kafka environment and your instance.
Exchange data -- Produce and consume Kafka messages in your ServiceNow instance using the Hermes Messaging Service.
Advanced High Availability transfer -- Learn how messages are produced and consumed in Hermes during normal operation, Advanced High Availability (AHA) transfer, and failover scenarios.
Hermes Settings page -- The Hermes Settings page is a centralized interface that enables Hermes administrators and maintenance users to monitor and control the configuration properties that govern the Hermes Messaging Service.
Encryption at rest -- Encryption at rest for Hermes topics protects message data stored on broker disks from unauthorized access. Hermes supports both ServiceNow-managed keys and keys you provide using the Bring Your Own Key (BYOK) model.
Configure -- Learn how the Hermes Messaging Service is activated. Set up a secure connection to the Hermes Messaging Service.
Activating Hermes -- The Hermes Messaging Service is enabled when the Glide Hermes Message Queue plugin (com.glide.hermes) is activated.
Set up a secure connection -- Secure your Kafka topics by generating a ServiceNow instance-signed certificate.
Revoke a certificate -- Revoke a ServiceNow instance-signed certificate so that it can't be used in secure connections to the Hermes Messaging Service.
Prepare Kafka -- Install the Apache Kafka binaries on your Unix or Windows client machine.
Create a test topic -- Create a topic for sending and receiving test messages in the Hermes Kafka cluster.
Produce test messages -- Produce test messages to a Hermes topic by configuring a producer client.
Consume test messages -- Consume test messages from a Hermes topic by configuring two consumer clients.
Manage namespaces and topics -- Organize and manage namespaces and topics in the Hermes Kafka cluster using the Hermes Messaging Service.
Managing namespaces -- Group Kafka topics together for simplified topic management and access control specification using namespaces.
Create a namespace -- Organize your Kafka topics by creating a namespace.
Delete a namespace -- Prevent topics from being added to a namespace by deleting the namespace in Hermes.
Managing topics -- Manage topic records in your instance and Kafka topics in the Hermes Kafka cluster using the Hermes Messaging Service.
Create a topic -- Create a topic from within ServiceNow. Creating a topic from your instance adds a topic record to the Kafka Topics [sys_kafka_topic] table and adds a Kafka topic to Hermes.
Update a topic -- Update a Kafka topic in Hermes by modifying the topic record.
Delete a topic -- Remove a topic and its messages by deleting it from Hermes. Deleting a topic record deletes it from your instance and from the Hermes Kafka cluster.
Rescan topics -- Synchronize topic records in your instance with topics in the Hermes Kafka cluster by rescanning.
Monitoring topics -- Monitor message processing and view topics in the Hermes Kafka cluster that belong to you using the Hermes Messaging Service topic inspector.
View a message -- View the payload of a message in a Hermes topic using the Hermes Messaging Service topic inspector.
Administer -- Monitor the Hermes Messaging Service by viewing diagnostics and inspecting topics.
Managing Hermes settings -- View, modify, and manage configuration properties that control the behavior of Hermes Messaging Service. You can update property values, manage background job states, or adjust settings where automated detection is unavailable.
View and modify a Hermes property value -- Review and modify the current the Hermes configuration properties to control Apache Kafka integration, topic management, and other messaging behavior.
Manage a background job in Hermes Messaging Service -- Manage background jobs in Hermes Messaging Service to control when and how often scheduled tasks run. You can make a job inactive, re-enable it, or adjust its interval from the Hermes Settings page.
Check status and connection -- Check the status of and test the connection to the Hermes Kafka cluster by sending and receiving test messages.
Tracking message usage -- Message usage through the Hermes Messaging Service is tracked for monitoring and management purposes through the Kafka topic name.
Cloning with Hermes enabled -- To clone your database from one instance to another successfully with Hermes enabled, you must ensure that certain Hermes tables are preserved and excluded. The list of tables in the preserve list should match those in the exclude list and vice versa.
Domain separation -- If any conkeyrefs are broken, re-add them from the doc/source/reuse/domain-separation/domain-separation-overview.dita file.In the short description, edit the first sentence to state whether domain separation is supported or not and add the application name. Keep the conkeyref at the end that describes domain separation.Domain separation is supported for the Hermes Messaging Service. Domain separation enables you to separate data, processes, and administrative tasks into logical groupings called domains. You can control several aspects of this separation, including which users can see and access data.
Password Reset -- The ServiceNow Password Reset application enforces strong and secure passwords by enabling end users to reset or change their passwords either by using the self-service process or by requesting the assistance of a service desk agent.
Exploring Password Reset -- Get an overview of Password Reset, Password Reset Windows Application, and Password Reset for Virtual Agent.
Password Reset -- The Password Reset application enforces strong and secure passwords by enabling end users to reset or change their passwords either by using the self-service process or by requesting the assistance of a service desk agent.
Password Reset for Virtual Agent -- Augment an end-user experience with Password Reset for Virtual Agent that handles common support issues, using pre-built conversations.
Password Reset Windows Application -- The Password Reset Windows Application enables a user, who forgets the password or is locked out of a Windows computer, to reset the password directly from the Windows login screen.
Request to reset the default admin password -- You can request a default instance admin password reset via the Service Catalog, which triggers an automated process to securely complete the reset.
Setting up Password Reset -- The Password Reset application is active by default and includes example verifications. The base system enables connections only to the local ServiceNow instance credential store types.
Set up Microsoft Entra ID for Password Reset -- Set up Microsoft Entra ID for Password Reset by activating the plugin and configuring the Microsoft Entra ID instance. The Microsoft Entra ID plugin is activated with the help of this plugin. Microsoft Entra ID for Password Reset is also available in the ServiceNow store.
Request the Microsoft Entra ID Integration for Password Reset app -- Set up Microsoft Entra ID for Password Reset by activating the plugin and configuring the Microsoft Entra ID instance. The Microsoft Entra ID plugin is activated with the help of this plugin. Microsoft Entra ID for Password Reset is also available in the ServiceNow store.
Set up Microsoft Active Directory for Password Reset -- Enable connections to Active Directory (AD) by activating the Password Reset Windows App and Microsoft AD for Password Reset available in the ServiceNow Store.
Request the Password Reset Windows App plugin -- Enable connections to Active Directory (AD) by activating the Password Reset Windows App and Microsoft AD for Password Reset available in the ServiceNow Store.
Password Reset Windows Application -- Enable connections to Active Directory (AD) by activating the Password Reset Windows App and Microsoft AD for Password Reset available in the ServiceNow Store.
Configuring Password Reset -- The Password Reset application enables an end user to reset or change a password using a self-service process. Alternatively, your organization can implement a process that requires a service desk agent to reset passwords for end users.
Configure your Password Reset process -- To implement the process, you configure credentials, verification methods and settings, and enrollment settings. You also specify to which users the process applies.
Calculating the security score for password reset process -- The security score of the password reset process is a critical metric for the password reset administrators to assess the strength and configuration of the password reset process.
Configure password expiration reminder -- You can configure the password reset expiration reminder feature to send notifications to change or reset a user’s password whenever it is going to expire.
View scheduled jobs -- You can view scheduled jobs for the process that you configured password expiration for. When you configure password expiration for a process, two scheduled jobs are created automatically.
Credential stores for Password Reset -- Credential stores hold user information such as user names and passwords that can be used as login credentials. Examples include the User table [sys_user] or an Active Directory server.
Configure the connection to a credential store for the Password Reset processes -- You create a Password Reset credential store record to configure access to your credential store server while a user is changing or resetting a password. In addition to host connection information, you can specify the password hints that users should see, restrictions on password reuse, the allowed number of failed reset attempts, and other settings.
Credentials Store for Password Reset for Active Directory -- A credential store type is a set of workflows that specify how to connect to a credential store. You can connect to Password Reset Credential Stores to view the list of example credential stores that are based on the base-system types.
Integrate Password Reset with your Active Directory service -- The Password Reset application can change passwords on an Active Directory credential store. The application changes passwords by referencing an Active Directory user role with the appropriate password change privileges.
Configure the connection to an AD credential store -- You can create a Password Reset credential store record to configure access to your Active Directory server while a user is changing or resetting a password. In addition to host connection information, you can specify the password hints that users should see, restrictions on password reuse, the allowed number of failed reset attempts, and other settings.
Credential Store for Password Reset for Microsoft Entra ID -- A credential store type is the set of flows to manage password and account of Microsoft Entra ID user. Navigate to Password Reset Credential Stores to view the list of example credential stores that are based on the base-system types.
Integrate Password Reset with your Microsoft Entra ID -- When the Microsoft Entra ID Integration for Password Reset store app is activated, the Password Reset application can manage passwords of a Microsoft Entra ID application. The application manages passwords by referencing a Microsoft Entra ID user with appropriate roles and password change privileges.
Configure the connection to the Microsoft Entra ID Credential Store -- Create a Password Reset credential store record to configure access to your Microsoft Entra ID server while a user is changing or resetting a password. In addition to host connection information, you can specify the password hints that users should see and other settings.
Test the connection to a credential store -- You should test the connection to a credential store after you configure a new credential store or when users experience problems that might involve the connection.
Delete a connection to a credential store for Password Reset -- Important: Before you delete the connection to a credential store, check all Password Reset processes to ensure that the credential store is not in use. If the credential store is being used by a process, update the process before deleting the credential store.
Password Reset verifications -- Each verification specifies the method and process for verifying the identity of the user that is requesting a password reset.
SMS Code Verification type for Password Reset -- Using the Simple Message Service (SMS) Code Verification type, a user can verify identity with the help of any SMS-enabled device, like a cell phone that accepts text messages. When a user requests password reset, the system sends a numerical code to the device and the user then enters the code on the Password Reset Verification page.
Use Notify to send SMS codes for enrollment and verification -- You can configure the Password Reset application to send SMS codes for enrollment and verification using the ServiceNow Notify application (via the Twilio SMS Messaging system). Notify is tightly integrated with the workflow engine and business rules and delivers a highly configurable and trusted way to deliver SMS messages.
Specify the number of required security questions -- When designing a Security Questions verification for Password Reset, you can specify the number of questions to display when users enroll. You can also specify the number to display when a user is verifying identity while resetting the password.
Configure your Password Reset process to auto-enroll users -- To simplify management, many organizations auto-enroll users in the Password Reset program. Every base-system verification type enables you to specify automatic enrollment for your process.
Enable users to enroll for Password Reset -- To enable users to enroll for the Password Reset program, you specify a UI macro that takes the user through the enrollment process and a script that processes the enrollment data that the user entered. The base system includes a functioning macro and script.
Configure properties -- You can specify properties that configure the Password Reset experience for end users.
Send email to remind users to enroll for Password Reset -- You can automatically send messages that remind users to enrolled in the Password Reset process. You specify the text of the message and can configure the messages to repeat at intervals.
Customize the Password Reset enrollment reminder email -- The email message that reminds users to enroll for the Password Reset process is based on an email template. To customize the message, you can modify the default template or create a custom template.
Configure the required strength for passwords -- The password that a user defines must meet certain requirements — for example, it must contain at least 12 characters, it must include a numeral, and so on. You can configure the requirements as needed for your organization.
Specify lockout for failed login attempts -- The system provides inactive script actions that enable you to specify the number of failed login attempts before a user account is locked and to reset the count after a successful login.
Customizing Password Reset processes -- Password Reset scripts enable you to customize Password Reset by creating your own credential store, verification, and identification types, and extend them by defining extension scripts. You can also create a custom credential store type, custom verification type, or verification.
Customize password reset processes and integrate third-party credential services -- To customize password reset processes or to integrate them with third-party credential services such as Okta or Microsoft Entra ID, use Integration Hub capabilities. Use Workflow Studio to create or modify actions like user unlock, change password, and get user status. Use Workflow Studio to create or modify subflows that perform the actions.
Add a custom question to the Security Questions verification -- To enroll for the 'Security Questions' verification, the user selects several questions and supplies confidential answers that only the user knows. You can add a custom question to the set of questions that are included with the base system.
Create a Password Reset verification from an existing verification -- The Password Reset application includes several example verifications that you can use as they are or as the basis for a custom verification. If the verification types in the base system do not meet your needs, you can create a custom verification type.
Create a custom Password Reset verification type -- Each verification in Password Reset is based on the settings for a verification type. If the verification types in the base system do not meet your needs, you can create a custom verification type.
Create a custom Password Reset verification -- Use a verification type in the base system as a template to design a custom verification. The Password Reset Windows Application does not support custom verifications.
Asynchronous password reset subflow -- When a user requests a password reset, based on the application for which the password reset is requested, the process works either synchronously or asynchronously.
View user requests for password reset -- The Reset Requests module displays the status of each password reset request from the Password Reset Request table [pwd_reset_request].
Unblock a Password Reset user -- If a user is manually banned or is flagged as exceeding max attempts, the user can be blocked (not allowed to use the Password Reset application). You can unblock a blocked user.
Integrate Password Reset with a CMS integration -- You can configure a site in the ServiceNow content management (CMS) application to define a single-site access point that includes the Password Reset service. For example, you can create an employee self-service site that provides Password Reset service.
Installing and configuring Password Reset Windows Application -- Request the Password Reset Windows App (Password Reset Orchestration) (com.glideapp.password_reset_desktop) plugin that enables connections to the Active Directory (AD) credential store types.
Password Reset Windows Application installation requirements -- Activate the Password Reset Windows App (Password Reset Orchestration) (com.glideapp.password_reset_desktop) plugin and activate the Microsoft AD for Password Reset store app to use the Password Reset Windows Application.
Use an MSI file from the command line -- Use the MSI file to install the Password Reset Windows Application on multiple computers over a network. As an alternative to MSI installation, you can also install from the command line.
Use a wizard -- As an alternative to wizard installation, you can run commands directly at the command line.
Configure a proxy server using client credentials method -- If you cannot configure an exception policy, you must configure all Windows clients that use the Password Reset Windows Application to pass valid credentials to the proxy server.
PAC file with registry setting -- In this proxy configuration, the Proxy Auto-Configuration (PAC) file can be configured in Password Reset Windows Application registry settings.
Enroll for the Password Reset program using SMS codes -- To verify your identity while resetting your password, you can use a code (the SMS code) that was delivered to your mobile phone or device. You can enroll on a mobile device.
Enroll for the Password Reset program using questions and answers -- Your organization might ask you to select the questions to use when resetting your password. You select the questions and provide answers that only you know. At another time, when you reset your password, your answers verify your identity. You can enroll on a mobile device.
Reset your password on Windows systems -- If your organization uses the Password Reset Windows Application, you can reset your password directly from your Windows login screen.
Password Reset reference -- Reference topics provide additional information about the lists and forms that you use to configure and administer Password Reset.
Installed with Password Reset -- Tables, roles, business rules, scripts, and workflows are installed with the Password Reset application.
Domain separation and the Password Reset application -- Domain separation is supported in the Password Reset application. A password reset process that you define in any domain is isolated from a process that you create in any other domain. Domain separation enables you to separate data, processes, and administrative tasks into logical groupings called domains. You can control several aspects of this separation, including which users can see and access data.
Password Expiration Configuration form -- The Password Expiration Configuration form allows you to define how frequently users must update their passwords and receive reminder notifications before expiration.
Password Reset script includes -- The Password Reset plugin installs script includes that implement password reset processes. To enable you to extend functionality, each base-system script include provides extension points that you can use to invoke "extension scripts" that you customized.
Example custom scripts for Password Reset -- The example scripts perform a user account lookup and processes an identification form, define a credential store, and create an identification type.
Password Reset extension script categories -- You can use a custom extension script to extend Password Reset functionality for credential store, verification, or identification types.
Password Reset extension scripts -- Extension scripts allow you to extend Password Reset functionality in credential store, verification, or identification types.
Create a Password Reset extension script -- Create extension scripts only from the Password Reset Extension Script form. Do not create extension scripts in the System Definition Script Includes interface.
Notify -- Notify provides support for SMS and voice channels on the ServiceNow platform for communicating internally with team members and externally with customers and contractors. The plug-in also provides APIs and workflow activities to achieve the above. Some customers directly make use of the APIs in their products, and others via products like Major Incident Management, On-Call and CTI Softphone.
Exploring Notify -- Use and integrate Notify with the third-party service providers as a communication channel to meet with the stakeholders to resolve the incidents.
Notify Twilio Direct driver -- The Notify-Twilio integration with the Notify-Twilio Direct driver provides APIs and workflow activities for applications to handle various notification features.
Notify Zoom connector -- The Notify Zoom Connector expands the Notify communication channel by managing and initiating a Zoom meeting directly from any task record such as an incident or a change.
Notify voice and SMS capabilities -- Notify provides support for SMS and voice channels for communicating internally with team members and externally with customers and contractors.
Notify Cisco Webex Connector -- Notify Cisco Webex Connector enables you to manage and initiate a Webex meeting directly from an incident.
Configuring Notify -- Configure and use Notify application with the third-party applications in your environment to resolve the incidents.
Activate Notify -- You can activate the Notify (com.snc.notify) plugin if you are an administrator. This plugin includes demo data and activates related plugins if they are not already active.
Differences between Notify and Legacy Notify -- Describes the differences between the Notify and Legacy Notify applications, including architecture, workflows, Twilio support, and task-initiated conference calls.
Migrating from Legacy Notify -- When migrating to Notify from the Legacy Notify functionality, several changes are made to the instance.
Twilio-Direct callback testing -- Make an outgoing call or send an SMS using Twilio and trigger callbacks to ServiceNow to test whether Twilio can reach the instance. You can also view when the last callback test was run, its status, and the test logs.
Advanced configuration for SMS -- Use the Twilio co-pilot features to improve SMS delivery with phone number like using multiple numbers to send high-volume messages and content intelligence to automatically format every message without writing custom code. Reach large lists of users with one API request.
Advanced configuration for voice -- Configure Answering Machine Detection (AMD) to determine if a human has picked up the call or not.
Disconnect from a Twilio account -- If a Twilio account is already associated with a different system, disconnect the account from the other system before connecting to the current instance.
Amazon Polly -- You can configure Amazon Polly as the default voice by overriding the default voice tone for text to speech.
Configure Notify Zoom connector in Notify -- Configure Notify to receive the event information from Zoom. An event is usually any action that is related to a meeting.
Set up Notify Zoom connector in Zoom -- Use the Notify Zoom connector to expand the Notify communication channel by managing and initiating a Zoom meeting directly from any task record such as an incident or a change.
Disable Zoom meeting password -- Disable Zoom meeting password so that you can join a Zoom meeting without any meeting password.
Configure a provider in Notify -- Configure a conference provider or a phone number to be used as choices for initiating a conference call. For sending SMS, configure preferences for phone numbers.
Configure Notify Cisco Webex Connector -- Configure the Notify Cisco Webex Connector in your environment to be able to use Cisco Webex application for making conference calls.
Install Notify Cisco Webex Connector -- You can install the Notify Cisco Webex Connector application (sn_notify_webex) if you have the admin role.If the application does NOT include demo data or it does NOT install related applications and plugins, delete or revise the following sentence:The application includes demo data and installs related ServiceNow Store applications and plugins if they are not already installed.
Create a Cisco Webex app -- Create an app in Cisco portal to make outbound calls from an incident using Webex.
SMS Statuses -- Every Twilio SMS message request has a status value which describes the current state of the message. Use this information for troubleshooting SMS related incidents/ issues. Here are few descriptions of possible statuses of SMS sent from Notify through Twilio REST API.
Send an SMS with Zoom meeting invite -- Send an SMS with Zoom meeting invite to ensure that the meeting participants or any newly added participant is updated with the meeting details when the meeting host starts the conference or adds a participant to the conference.
Outbound communication requirements -- Outbound communications initiated through Notify, such as phone calls and SMS messages, must satisfy recipient number requirements.
Start a conference call -- Start a conference call from a task or an incident communication plan by inviting one or more users to join a call. The conference will not start until at least two participants join.
Mute or unmute all participants -- As a communications manager or a conference call host, mute/unmute all the conference participants from the workbench.
Viewing conference call information -- Conference calls are listed as system activities in the Activity section of the Incident Communication Plan form and also are listed in the Conference Calls related list.
List of Notify calls -- If you are a Notify administrator, you can view a list of calls and the status of a call made to or from Notify. The call records help in reporting and analytics.
Using Notify with tasks -- Notify allows you to initiate conference calls and send SMS alerts from task records.
Manage conference calls on task -- Add and manage multiple participants on the conference including self-joining in to the conference call and end the conference call when the discussion is over.
Send an SMS alert from a task -- Use Notify to send information related to a call through SMS alerts from a task record.
Join and end conference call -- After a conference call is initiated, join the call to participate in the discussion or end the call when the conference is no longer required.
Send communication updates -- Update users on the latest communication on an incident through selected communication channels.
Using Notify with On-Call Scheduling -- When using both Notify and On-Call Scheduling, you can send On-call escalation notifications as SMS messages, in addition to emails.
Set up Notify with On-Call Scheduling -- You can configure on-call scheduling to use Notify functionality to send SMS alerts and assign users to tasks based on the SMS responses.
Call a user from the WebRTC UI -- Make outbound calls and receive a voice call in the browser through the WebRTC interface from On-Call Schedules landing page, Roster and Escalation Details dialog box and on-call calendar.
Key differences -- There are key differences between on-call scheduling with NotifyNow and on-call scheduling with Notify.
Join a conference call -- You can join an active conference call from an incident to discuss about the resolution of an incident.
Notify reference -- View the additional information about Notify application in this section.
Differences between Notify-Twilio and Notify-Twilio Direct -- Describes the differences between the Notify-Twilio and Notify-Twilio Direct drivers, including architecture, workflows, Twilio support, and task-initiated conference calls.
Call workflow activity -- The Call activity makes outbound phone calls using a Notify workflow. This workflow activity can be added to any table.
Send SMS workflow activity -- The send SMS workflow activity to send short text messages using Notify to users' phones. This workflow activity can be added to any table.
Notify activity event handlers -- Notify workflow activities provide JavaScript functions that are invoked automatically when your telephony provider broadcasts certain events.
Creating Notify activities -- Default Notify workflow generally performs a single action, such as initiating a phone call. You can create custom Notify workflow activities to implement more complex functionality.
Notify languages -- Notify supports multiple languages when using text-to-speech.
Available Notify activity event handlers -- When creating Notify workflow activities, you can use event-handler functions to respond to events from a telephony provider.
Manage people and work capabilities -- Use these applications to help streamline communications, manage work assignments and interactions, and assess employee skills.
Skills Management -- Use Skills Management to associate skills with individual users or groups and assign them to tasks or projects. You can also assess the skills needed for your organization, identify gaps, and implement effective plans for hiring or training of your teams.
Exploring Skills Management -- Use Skills Management to associate skills with individual users or groups and assign them to tasks or projects. You can also assess the skills needed for your organization, identify gaps, and implement effective plans for hiring or training of your teams.
Configuring Skills Management -- Create Skills, identify the Skill Level Type the skill belongs to, and associate Skill Levels for each level type to define a structured skills architecture for your organization.
Define the skill taxonomy -- Organize related skills into categories and subcategories so that you can manage skills and create reports quickly and efficiently.
Define a skill level type -- Define skill levels (for example, beginner, intermediate, advanced) for different skill level types (for example, a language or an IT certification) so you can associate skill levels to users and define skill levels and types required for tasks.
Add a skill -- Create skills to specify the competencies of your users and associate them with users, and configuration items.
Using Skills Management -- Use the Skills Management dashboard to analyze trends in assessing skill gaps in your organization and plan for coaching or training of your employees based on needs. Identify users and teams who have the right skills to work on tasks and projects.
Assigning and Managing skills -- Manage skill assignment efficiently by assigning skills to users and analyze the skill coverage of your teams.
Learn how Skill Determination works -- Use Skill Determination to add skills to incoming work items so that agents with those skills can work on it.
Add a business rule for skill determination -- Set up or enable business rules for agents to manage cases, chat interactions, or work order tasks. These business rules trigger Skill Determination rules, ensuring that the required skills are assigned to relevant work items so agents are properly equipped to handle these responsibilities efficiently.
Create rules to assign skills to work items -- Create Skill Determination rules to identify skills required by agents to work on work items and automatically associate them to those work items.
Qualify and rank users based on skills and skill levels -- Rank users so that you can select the right users based on skills needed to complete tasks. Qualify users to work on tasks such as case, work order task, or chat interaction based on the number of skills and skill levels required to work on those tasks.
Reference for Skills Management -- Validate that Skills Management still works after you make any configuration change such as apply an upgrade or develop an application. Copy and customize these quick start tests to pass when using your instance-specific data.
Domain separation and Skills Management -- Domain separation is supported in the Skills Management app, and configured to apply to all features of the application. Separation of data is configured along with separation of logic and process.
Quick start tests for Skills Management -- Validate that Skills Management still works after you make any configuration change such as apply an upgrade or develop an application. Copy and customize these quick start tests to pass when using your instance-specific data.
Interaction Management -- Interactions provide a centralized location for all communication channels in the platform. Each interaction represents a request for assistance through a given channel, for example, a call or a chat. The purpose of Interaction Management is to help get insights into the channel's effectiveness.
Activating the Interaction Management system -- An administrator can activate the Interaction Logging, Routing, and Queueing plugin (com.glide.interaction) to access the functionality.
Configuring Interaction Management -- You can configure the behavior of an interaction and the types of information that is stored with the record. You can also use interaction wrap up to provide agents with a brief wrap-up period at the end of customer conversations.
Interaction states -- Configure the behavior of an interaction by determining the routine behavior for each state that the interaction goes through during the life cycle.
Interaction context and channel metadata -- Context and channel metadata are document ID fields included as part of interactions. Both types of records store information about the interaction.
Interaction wrap up -- Interaction wrap up provides agents with a brief wrap-up period at the end of customer conversations. Agents can use this time to complete their work before moving on to assist other customers.
Interaction form -- The Interaction form displays information about a customer interaction.
Interaction wrap up timer -- The interaction wrap up timer displays a countdown of the wrap up duration period in CSM Configurable Workspace.
Interaction wrap up scheduled job -- The interaction wrap up feature includes a scheduled job to close any interactions in the Wrap Up state that were not closed either manually by an agent or automatically by the system.
Create interaction wrap-up codes -- Wrap-up codes enable agents to quickly wrap up and close interactions. Agents can select wrap-up codes from the interaction wrap-up modeless dialog.
Enable interaction wrap-up codes -- Enable interaction wrap-up codes and select the wrap-up codes that are available to agents in the interaction wrap-up modeless dialog.
Using Interaction Management -- Most interaction creation takes place in other applications, to control channels. When needed, you can create an interaction from the Interaction application.
Create an interaction -- An interaction is a record of a conversation between a requester and a fulfiller (real or virtual). Though most interaction creation takes place in other applications, if needed, you can create an interaction directly from Interaction Management.
Associate a record with an interaction -- As an agent, you might need to create a record on another table to work on an interaction. You can associate the record with the interaction.
Components installed with Interaction Management -- Several types of components are installed with activation of the Interaction Logging, Routing, and Queueing plugin, including tables and user roles.
Live Feed Core UI -- Live Feed is a social IT application that provides a place to post and share content in a ServiceNow instance.
Exploring Live Feed Core UI -- Live Feed content forms a searchable knowledge source for sharing information within an organization.
Live Feed browser support -- The Live Feed v2 plugin does not support Internet Explorer 7 through 9.
Activating Live Feed -- Live Feed is active for all instances. An administrator can activate the Live Feed plugin if it is not already active.
Administering Live Feed -- Administrators and users with the live_feed_admin role can configure Live Feed security and provide access to Live Feed from content management pages. Administrators can also set up Live Feed table notifications.
Document feeds -- A document feed is a Live Feed group that is associated with a record, such as an incident or change.
Security configuration for document feeds -- Document feeds honor the access control rules (ACLs) for the associated record. Users can only view messages on the document feed if they have access to the same information on the record.
Disable a record feed -- You can disable Live Feed functionality from the form of any table.
Configure record feeds -- Configure a table to support record feeds. You can add the Show Live Feed button in the form header and add the UI actions Follow on Live Feed and Show Live Feed as List and Form.
Disable a record feed -- You can disable Live Feed functionality from the form of any table.
Configure security -- Record feeds honor the access control rules (ACLs) for the associated record.
Live Feed table notifications -- Live feed table notifications generate automatic Live Feed messages. The Live Feed plugin must be activated to use table notifications.
Live Feed table notification examples -- The following examples demonstrate how to set up different types of table notifications that are useful for Live Feed.
Workaround posted -- This example demonstrates a table notification that generates an automatic message on Live Feed whenever a workaround is added to an open problem.
Problem resolved (advanced) -- This advanced example demonstrates a table notification that generates an automatic message on Live Feed whenever a problem is closed.
Opportunity won (non-task) -- This example demonstrates a table notification on a non-task table. It generates an automatic message on Live Feed whenever a sales opportunity is won, if you have activated the Sales Force Automation plugin.
Live Feed security and table access -- By default, administrators and users with the live_feed_admin role can configure live feed security and view all Live Feed tables.
Manage Live Feed message content -- Users can remove their own messages from feeds. If necessary, administrators can remove inappropriate messages that are posted by any user.
Live Feed team security -- You can restrict who can create teams by modifying an access control rule.
Provide access to Live Feed from CMS pages -- You can provide access to Live Feed from pages built in the Content Management System (CMS). For example, allow an end user to access your company feed via the ESS portal.
Using Live Feed -- Live Feed provides many methods you can use to share content with others in your organization.
Use hashtags in Live Feed -- Hashtags are words marked with a hash symbol (#) in messages. Hashtags are a way to categorize messages by keyword or topic for improved search results.
Tag messages -- To tag a keyword or topic in a message, enter a # symbol before the word. A link to the hashtag is added beneath the message and all feed users can search and filter by the hashtag to find the message.
Change a hashtag name and merge a hashtag -- Over time, users may create many hashtags with similar names, such as competitive, competitor, and competition. To combine hashtags for better searching and filtering, change the names of similar hashtags to a standard name.
Add an image to a hashtag -- You can add an image at the domain level of already defined hashtags if you have the admin role.
Follow and unfollow a hashtag -- You can view all postings assigned a specific hashtag by following the hashtag. You can also unfollow the hashtag if you no longer want to view those postings.
Subscribe a team to feed notification -- A team administrator can subscribe a team to specific feeds so the members of the team receive email notifications.
Leave a team -- You can give up membership to a team by leaving that team.
Modify a team -- If you are team administrator, you can modify an existing team.
Manage a membership request -- When a user requests membership to a private team, the team administrator receives an email.
Delete a team -- If you are the team administrator, you can delete a team.
Add Live Feed to a homepage -- Add Live Feed to a homepage so it is the first thing you see when you log in.
Modifying and deleting document feeds -- The user who creates a record feed becomes the group administrator, which allows the user to modify the following record feed properties.
Working with record feeds -- When a user follows a record, the user becomes a member of a private group for the record.
Follow a record feed from a form -- You can follow records that have a record feed associated with them from within the record form.
Follow a record feed from a list -- You can follow records that have a record feed associated with them when viewing a list of records. This method allows you to select multiple records to follow.
Create a group feed -- Group feeds are created by users so that members with similar interests can find that information in one place. Individual users or teams can join group feeds.
Create record feeds -- When a user views a record on a table that has Live Feed enabled, such as the Incident [incident] table, the user can click the Show Live Feed button at the top of the form to automatically create a record feed.
Subscribe to a feed -- Direct members of a feed can subscribe and unsubscribe to the feed in order to receive email notifications whenever any activity in the feed occurs, such as new messages being posted, replies, likes, polls, and @mentions.
Navigate between Live Feed and other modules -- If you are participating in a feed and navigate to another module, when you return to Live Feed it displays the feed you were previously viewing if it is public or if it is a private feed that you are a member of.
Leave a feed -- Members can choose to leave a group feed.
Delete a feed -- If you are a feed administrator, you can delete the feed.
Live Feed UI overview -- The Live Feed user interface provides many methods you can use to share content with others in your organization.
Update your Live Feed profile -- Your profile information includes a photo or image, and tabs for different types of information including messages, feeds, teams, followers, and those who are following you. You can update your profile information and picture at any time.
Work with Live Feed messages -- This portion of the UI gives the user access to various types of messages and tools for grouping and categorizing messages. Also included are methods for identifying which user feeds you are following and which users are following you.
View another Live Feed user -- When a requester user, one that has no ServiceNow role, is viewing a feed and points to another user's picture, information for the user appears from the Business Card view of the User [sys_user] table.
Select feeds -- A feed is a stream of related messages. You can use the feed selector to switch between feed types and to view specific group feeds and record feeds.
Follow feeds -- You can view users who are following you or other users you are following.
Bookmark feeds and hashtags -- The Live Feed interface uses the standard bookmarking functionality for feeds and hashtags.
Post content in Live Feed -- In Live Feed, you can post new messages and replies to existing messages for all users in the feed. You can also send a reply message to a team or record.
Reply to a Live Feed message -- To participate in an existing thread of a feed, you can compose and submit a reply message. By default, the message is visible to all members of the feed.
Attach a file to a post or reply -- You can attach files to a post by dragging a file into a post or pasting an image from the clipboard.
Copy an image from the clipboard -- In addition to adding files to a message, you can also copy images to the clipboard and paste them into a message or reply.
Add a poll to a message -- When you are posting a message, you have the option of creating a poll in order to record your viewers' opinions. As users take the poll, their feedback statistics are displayed within the feed.
Add mentions to a message -- An @mention is any posted update that contains @username anywhere in the body of the message.
Like a message -- Like a message to provide feedback to the author.
Delete a message -- Users can delete any of their own posts or replies. A conversation administrator can also delete messages.
Live Feed reference -- Topics in this section describe domain separation in Live Feed, as well as the various components that are installed with it.
Domain separation in Live Feed -- This is an overview of domain separation and Live Feed. Domain separation enables you to separate data, processes, and administrative tasks into logical groupings called domains. You can control several aspects of this separation, including which users can see and access data.
E-signature -- Sign electronic documents from any desktop or mobile device with e-signature. E-signature is a scoped application that enables users to sign managed documents or knowledge articles with their typed or drawn e-signature, credentials, or as an acknowledgment.
Activating e-signature -- You can activate the e-signature plugin (com.snc.esign) if you have the admin role. This plugin includes demo data and activates related plugins if they are not already active.
Using e-signature -- Users with the assigned e-signature roles can create templates for documents that require an electronic signature.
Create or modify an e-signature template -- Create or modify an e-signature template to define an electronic document and signature configuration for use in task forms.
Using e-signature template for non-HR tasks -- Create or modify an e-signature template to define an electronic document and signature configuration for use in non-HR task forms.
E-signature reference -- Activating the e-signature plugin installs additional roles and tables.
ServiceNow Voice -- Integrate a third-party phone system with your ServiceNow Voice instance to drive the efficiency of your call center without having to navigate through multiple systems while attending a call. Help managers analyze the calls and view call metrics at one place.
Exploring ServiceNow Voice -- Use ServiceNow Voice to facilitate inbound and outbound telephone calls by integrating your ServiceNow instance with a third-party phone system such as Amazon Connect.
Setting up ServiceNow Voice -- Enable ServiceNow Voice and integrate it with a third-party phone system such as Amazon Connect.
Install ServiceNow Voice applications -- You can install the ServiceNow Voice applications if you have the admin role. The application includes demo data and installs related ServiceNow Store applications and plugins if they are not already installed.
Domain separation and ServiceNow Voice -- If any conrefs are broken, re-add them from the doc/source/reuse/domain-separation/domain-separation-overview.dita file. In the short description, edit the first sentence to state whether domain separation is supported or not and add the application name. Keep the conref at the end that describes domain separation.Domain separation is supported for ServiceNow Voice. Domain separation enables you to separate data, processes, and administrative tasks into logical groupings called domains. You can control several aspects of this separation, including which users can see and access data.
Configuring a phone PIN -- You can set up or reset a phone PIN that can be used for caller authentication during a call with an agent.
Reset the phone PIN for a caller -- You can set up or reset a phone PIN that can be used for caller authentication during a call with an agent.
Set or reset the phone PIN -- You can set up or reset a phone PIN that can be used for caller authentication during a call with an agent.
Configure the E.164 format for a consumer phone number -- Ensure that all the necessary information for a phone number is included and properly formatted to successfully route an international call over a territory's public telephone network. Provide the E.164-compliant formatting and validation for phone number.
Scripting for operation handlers -- You can use the APIs in the ServiceNow Voice framework to create a seamless voice call experience for your callers and agents.
Provider configuration in Voice -- For both inbound and outbound calls, a provider configuration contains settings about the involved components and message transformers for a specific third-party phone system provider. Any request from that phone system provider is handled within ServiceNow based on these settings.
Extension points in Voice -- Using extension points, you can call the custom scripts to extend the functionality of ServiceNow Voice. While integrating a third-party phone system with ServiceNow Voice, you can invoke extension points using the CTI API to handle events in ServiceNow Voice.
Using Voice -- Agents can use ServiceNow Voice to receive inbound calls and make outbound calls with a seamless voice call experience. Managers can use this application to monitor and analyze calls.
Receiving inbound calls in ServiceNow Voice -- Agents can use ServiceNow Voice to receive inbound calls and make outbound calls with a seamless voice call experience. Managers can use this application to monitor and analyze calls.
Initiating outbound calls with ServiceNow Voice -- Agents can use ServiceNow Voice to receive inbound calls and make outbound calls with a seamless voice call experience. Managers can use this application to monitor and analyze calls.
Transferring a call to an agent or queue -- Agents can use ServiceNow Voice to receive inbound calls and make outbound calls with a seamless voice call experience. Managers can use this application to monitor and analyze calls.
Integrating Voice with other applications -- You can extend the capabilities of ServiceNow Voice for inbound and outbound calls by integrating with other applications.
Integrate ServiceNow Voice with Amazon Connect -- Connect ServiceNow Voice of your ServiceNow instance with the Amazon Connect instance to provide a seamless inbound and outbound voice call experience for your callers and agents.
Amazon Connect SSO integration with ServiceNow -- Single Sign-On (SSO) integration between Amazon Connect and ServiceNow eliminates duplicate authentication by using a shared identity provider (IdP) to authenticate agents automatically when they open the Amazon Connect softphone.
Configure SSO for Amazon Connect -- Configure Single Sign-On (SSO) between Amazon Connect and ServiceNow so that agents authenticated through a shared identity provider (IdP) are automatically signed into the Amazon Connect Softphone without a second login.
Configure a Virtual Desktop Infrastructure (VDI) for voice calls with Amazon Connect -- Contact centers commonly use Virtual Desktop Infrastructure (VDI) to optimize agent usage of browser applications. This feature enables agents to use ServiceNow and the Amazon Connect Contact Control Panel (CCP) within a VDI environment, taking both inbound and outbound calls without disruption. Administrators can configure groups of agents to use either VDI or non-VDI browsers based on OpenFrame configuration values.
Integrating ServiceNow Voice with ITSM -- Route calls coming through the ServiceNow Voice to specific phone queues based on user preference, utterances, or any other ServiceNow data to optimize incident resolution.
Install ServiceNow Voice for ITSM -- You can install the ServiceNow Voice for ITSM application (sn_cti_itsm_cnt) if you have the admin role. This plugin installs the ITSM content for integration between ServiceNow Voice and a third-party phone system.
Real time transcriptions for ServiceNow Voice for IT Service Management -- Agents can see a transcript of voice calls while interacting with customers. Real time transcription allows agents to better understand caller issues, and allows managers to gain insights into caller trends and agent training gaps.
Integrating ServiceNow Voice with CSM -- Access the CSM -specific contact flows and operation handlers when you integrate the ServiceNow Voice application with the Customer Service Management application.
Install ServiceNow Voice for CSM -- You can install the ServiceNow Voice for CSM application (sn_cti_csm_cnt) if you have the admin role. The application installs related ServiceNow Store applications if they are not already installed.
Real time transcriptions for ServiceNow Voice for Customer Service Management -- Agents can see a transcript of voice calls while interacting with customers. Real time transcription allows agents to better understand customer issues, and allows managers to gain insights into customer trends and agent training gaps.
Integrating ServiceNow Voice with Virtual Agent -- ServiceNow Voice with Virtual Agent allows you to use the ServiceNow Virtual Agent conversation as an IVR (Interactive Voice Response) in phone and to use the existing ServiceNow Advanced Work Assignment to find an agent in case of an escalation and allows agents to work in ServiceNow Workspace to manage the incoming cases on the queue.
Integrating ServiceNow Voice for HR -- The ServiceNow Voice for HR Agent Workspace provides seamless interactive voice response (IVR) and calling experiences for your employees and agents by integrating a cloud contact center provider with the robust capabilities of the Agent Workspace for HR Case Management.
Install ServiceNow Voice for HR -- You can install ServiceNow Voice for HR if you have the admin role. The application includes demo data and installs related ServiceNow Store applications and plugins if they are not already installed.
Add Interaction Related Records to HR Agent workspace -- ServiceNow Voice for HR creates an interaction record for every call between an employee and an HR agent, which contain related lists of details relating to the employee and interaction. To maximize the full feature capability, add the Interaction record to the HR Agent workspace.
ServiceNow Voice reference -- Reference topics provide additional information about components installed with ServiceNow Voice.
Components installed with ServiceNow Voice Core -- Several types of components are installed with activation of the ServiceNow Voice Core application (sn_cti_core), including user roles, plugins, and operation handlers.
Activate Connect -- Connect is active by default on new instances. For upgraded instances, you can activate the Connect plugin (com.glide.connect) if you have the admin role.
Properties installed with Connect -- Connect is active by default on new instances. For upgraded instances, you can activate the Connect plugin (com.glide.connect) if you have the admin role.
Activate Connect Support -- The Connect Support plugin (com.glide.connect.support) is no longer available.
Connect interface -- Users can work in a compact view of Connect, which overlays the standard user interface, or in a full-screen workspace.
Connect overlay -- The Connect overlay appears over the standard user interface. It consists of the Connect sidebar, which is the primary interface for Connect Chat and Connect Support, and any Connect mini windows that are open. Each mini window contains a header, a conversation area, and a message field.
Connect sidebar -- The Connect overlay appears over the standard user interface. It consists of the Connect sidebar, which is the primary interface for Connect Chat and Connect Support, and any Connect mini windows that are open. Each mini window contains a header, a conversation area, and a message field.
Connect mini windows -- The Connect overlay appears over the standard user interface. It consists of the Connect sidebar, which is the primary interface for Connect Chat and Connect Support, and any Connect mini windows that are open. Each mini window contains a header, a conversation area, and a message field.
Connect workspace -- The Connect workspace is a full-screen view of all your Connect Chat and Connect Support conversations in one place. It contains the conversation pane, which displays the conversation header and an expanded version of the mini window, and the conversation tools area.
Conversation pane -- The Connect workspace is a full-screen view of all your Connect Chat and Connect Support conversations in one place. It contains the conversation pane, which displays the conversation header and an expanded version of the mini window, and the conversation tools area.
Connect conversation tools -- The Connect workspace is a full-screen view of all your Connect Chat and Connect Support conversations in one place. It contains the conversation pane, which displays the conversation header and an expanded version of the mini window, and the conversation tools area.
Enable or disable Connect notifications globally -- You can edit your Connect notification settings globally to enable or disable mobile, desktop, email, or audio notifications for all your Connect Chat and Connect Support conversations.
Connect notification browser support -- You can edit your Connect notification settings globally to enable or disable mobile, desktop, email, or audio notifications for all your Connect Chat and Connect Support conversations.
Upload a profile picture -- You can upload a profile picture in your Live Feed profile to use as an avatar in Connect Chat and Connect Support conversations.
Drag a file into a Connect conversation -- Drag and drop functionality in Connect Chat and Connect Support provides an easy way to share external attachments and links or items from within your instance.
Connect administration -- Administrators can configure various performance settings and features that impact both Connect Chat and Connect Support.
Properties for Connect -- The Connect Properties page provides several configuration options for Connect.
Configure the polling interval -- The polling interval determines how frequently the system polls for new Connect messages.
Disable the Connect overlay -- The Connect overlay is enabled by default and is integrated with the standard user interface. You can disable the Connect overlay.
Administer Connect actions -- You can create or modify Connect actions to provide custom functionality in Connect Chat or Connect Support conversations.
Configure the fields on a record card in Connect -- When a record is either linked to or created from a Connect Chat conversation, the details of the record display as a card in the chat window.
Disable specific URLs for Connect -- Prevent users from accessing certain websites by disabling linking to specific Top-Level Domains (TLDs).
Connect Chat -- Connect Chat is a real-time messaging tool that enables users to chat with individuals and groups, quickly share files, and collaborate on any record by connecting with the right people instantly.
Connect Chat use -- All users have access to Connect Chat, a convenient way to stay updated on all the people and documents you work with in a familiar chat interface.
Follow a record in Connect -- You can follow a record in Connect Chat to track activity as it happens, in a familiar chat interface. When you follow a record, you become a member of a record conversation.
Edit basic conversation details -- In Connect Chat, you can customize the avatar, name, and description for a group or record conversation.
Add or remove conversation members -- In Connect Chat, any member of a group or record conversation can add or remove other conversation members. In a direct conversation with only two people, you cannot add members to the conversation after you create it.
Disable Connect Chat -- Administrators can configure various performance settings and features of Connect Chat.
Connect Support -- Connect Support is a real-time messaging tool that enables support agents to easily track their support cases, find solutions, and resolve problems quickly.
Share knowledge in a Connect Support conversation -- The support view of the Connect workspace has a built-in knowledge tool that makes it easy to search for knowledge articles and share them in a conversation.
Escalate a Connect Support conversation -- If an escalation path is defined for a Connect Support conversation, you can use a shortcut to escalate a Connect Support conversation to a different queue.
Connect Support administration -- Administrators can configure various performance settings and features of Connect Support.
Migrate from legacy chat to Connect Support -- Connect Support is an extension of Connect. Users designated as support agents have access to the support tab of the connect sidebar. Do not use Connect Support concurrently with legacy chat.
Properties for Connect Support -- The Connect Support Properties page provides several configuration options specifically for Connect Support.
Administer Connect Support queues -- You can define the support agents, default messages, schedule, and escalation path for each Connect Support queue.
Add a scripted extension point for Connect Support chats -- Implement the ConversationServerInteractionService extension point, which enables you to create custom scripts that use context variables from pre-chat surveys presented to requesters in the Agent Chat client.
Connect Support metrics -- Optional plugins provide a homepage and Performance Analytics dashboards, which contain helpful Connect Support metrics.
Use the Connect Support homepage -- Optional plugins provide a homepage and Performance Analytics dashboards, which contain helpful Connect Support metrics.
Use the Connect Support dashboards -- Optional plugins provide a homepage and Performance Analytics dashboards, which contain helpful Connect Support metrics.
Configure the add support users property -- To enable support agents to add users to a Connect Support conversation, add the glide.connect.support.add_members property.
Service Desk Chat Platform Analytics Solutions -- Platform Analytics Solutions contain preconfigured dashboards. These dashboards contain actionable data visualizations that help you improve your business processes and practices.
Connect Support and Service Portal -- Use Connect Support in your portal to allow your users to ask questions or submit requests to support agents. You configure the instance options to control the appearance of your widget and how it functions.
Configure Connect Support widget instance options -- Use Connect Support in your portal to allow your users to ask questions or submit requests to support agents. You configure the instance options to control the appearance of your widget and how it functions.
Classic Orchestration -- ServiceNow Orchestration extends the workflow engine to manage processes and to automate things outside of a ServiceNow instance.
Introduction to Orchestration -- Orchestration automates simple or complex multi-system tasks on remote services, servers, applications, and hardware.
Domain separation and Orchestration -- Domain separation is supported in Orchestration. Domain separation enables you to separate data, processes, and administrative tasks into logical groupings called domains. You can control several aspects of this separation, including which users can see and access data.
Activate Orchestration -- The Orchestration (com.snc.runbook_automation) plugin is available within a separate subscription from the rest of the ServiceNow platform.
Orchestration Runtime plugin -- The Orchestration – Runtime plugin enables other applications on the ServiceNow platform to automate tasks, without requiring an Orchestration subscription.
Reactivate a deprecated activity -- Orchestration activities that were converted to activity packs are deprecated for upgraded and new instances but can be reactivated for use in new workflows.
SOAP Message workflow activity -- The SOAP Message activity uses SOAP messages defined in the System Web Services plugin and can call the messages using a MID Server.
Probes used by Orchestration -- Certain probes, controlled by MID Servers, perform Orchestration tasks on remote computers, such as restarting a server or creating virtual machines from templates.
PowerShell activities -- PowerShell is built on the Windows .NET Framework and is designed to control and automate the administration of Windows machines and applications.
Legacy Run PowerShell activity -- PowerShell is built on the Windows .NET Framework and is designed to control and automate the administration of Windows machines and applications.
HResult codes -- PowerShell is built on the Windows .NET Framework and is designed to control and automate the administration of Windows machines and applications.
SSH activities -- SSH activities allow workflows to perform operations on Linux and Unix computers.
Run Command activity -- SSH activities allow workflows to perform operations on Linux and Unix computers.
Run SCP activity -- SSH activities allow workflows to perform operations on Linux and Unix computers.
Orchestration ROI -- The Orchestration ROI application allows you to estimate and compute cost savings for tasks in your system that could be automated with Orchestration.
Create Orchestration ROI labor rate cards -- Before calculating your Orchestration ROI, you must create labor rate cards for the manual work that would be required to complete the tasks correlated to the ROI calculations.
Create an Orchestration ROI automation entry record -- The ROI automation entry record couples the cost of performing a task with the specific workflow that automates the task, for the purpose of calculating the resulting savings.
Create an Orchestration ROI correlated task rule -- The correlated task rule applies configurable conditions to fields in a selected table that tell the instance which manual tasks correspond to an automation entry record.
Roles installed with Orchestration ROI -- Several types of components are installed with the Orchestration - ROI plugin (com.snc.runbook_automation.roi).
Orchestration ROI reports -- Orchestration ROI provides a collection of standard and premium reports to help you calculate savings from automating services in your organization.
Orchestration ROI standard reports -- The dashboard of standard ROI reports provides summaries, estimated costs, and calculated costs for automated processes. To access the ROI standard dashboard, navigate to Orchestration ROI Reports Dashboard .
Schedule Orchestration ROI calculations for standard reports -- The dashboard of standard ROI reports provides summaries, estimated costs, and calculated costs for automated processes. To access the ROI standard dashboard, navigate to Orchestration ROI Reports Dashboard .
Client Software Distribution -- The Client Software Distribution (CSD) application allows administrators to distribute software from the service catalog using third-party management systems.
Request client software distribution -- Client software distribution requires the Orchestration - Client Software Distribution plugin (com.snc.orchestration.client_sf_distribution), which is available by request with a subscription to Orchestration.
Create licenses and counters for distributed software -- Licenses and software counters are associated with the software model and must be created if you want to track the license for software deployed by client software distribution (CSD).
Client software distribution ordering process -- Licenses and software counters are associated with the software model and must be created if you want to track the license for software deployed by client software distribution (CSD).
Extend a software lease -- Users of software deployed by Client Software Distribution (CSD) can request the extension of a lease window, if the software is revocable by a software distribution system.
Client software distribution from SCCM -- You can use Client Software Distribution (CSD) to deploy and revoke software deployments from Microsoft System Center Configuration Management (SCCM) and manage distributions on SCCM hosts.
Configuring SCCM -- Follow the SCCM configuration procedures in the order shown.
Configure the Application Administrator role on the SCCM server -- To deploy software using ServiceNow Client Software Distribution (CSD), ensure that an SCCM administrative user has the correct permissions to deploy software and that PowerShell is properly configured.
Configure the MID Server for SCCM activities -- To use a MID Server with Microsoft System Center Configuration Management (SCCM) activities, configure it to communicate with the SCCM server.
Create Windows credentials for SCCM deployments -- Microsoft System Center Configuration Manager (SCCM) requires the appropriate credentials to deploy applications using the Client Software Distribution application.
Set up a software model for an SCCM application -- Using the applications discovered on the SCCM server, set up a software model used by the Software Asset Management application to manage licenses.
Define an SCCM configuration -- To create catalog items for SCCM software deployment or to configure your instance to revoke software through SCCM, you must first associate that software with a collection through an SCCM configuration.
Create a catalog item for an SCCM application -- Using the applications discovered on the SCCM server, create a catalog item for an application you want to offer for distribution from the service catalog.
SCCM deployment -- Ordering an SCCM application from a client software distribution (CSD) catalog item in the service catalog triggers the Order Client Software workflow.
SCCM software revocation -- An administrator can revoke software without any user interaction using Microsoft System Center Configuration Manager (SCCM) if the software configuration specifies an SCCM uninstall collection, even if the software was installed by some other process or user.
Revoke software deployed through the service catalog -- An administrator can revoke software without any user interaction using Microsoft System Center Configuration Manager (SCCM) if the software configuration specifies an SCCM uninstall collection, even if the software was installed by some other process or user.
Revoke unentitled software -- An administrator can revoke software without any user interaction using Microsoft System Center Configuration Manager (SCCM) if the software configuration specifies an SCCM uninstall collection, even if the software was installed by some other process or user.
SCCM software revocation workflow -- An administrator can revoke software without any user interaction using Microsoft System Center Configuration Manager (SCCM) if the software configuration specifies an SCCM uninstall collection, even if the software was installed by some other process or user.
Client software distribution extension framework -- Client software distribution (CSD) provides built-in extension points for integrating a ServiceNow instance with client software distribution providers, such as Casper, Altiris, or LANDesk.
Client software distribution extension keys -- Client software distribution (CSD) extension keys allow you to customize the deployment and revocation of software from distribution providers.
Client software distribution extension points -- The client software distribution (CSD) extension points create the customization code for the specific provider and the extension keys.
Orchestration examples -- These examples demonstrate how Orchestration can be used to automate common tasks.
Active Directory automation example -- A set of six Orchestration Active Directory activities enables organizations to automate their on-boarding/off-boarding processes with auditable, self-documenting workflows that save time and eliminate mistakes.
Update Active Directory with Orchestration -- A set of six Orchestration Active Directory activities enables organizations to automate their on-boarding/off-boarding processes with auditable, self-documenting workflows that save time and eliminate mistakes.
Orchestration activity packs -- The base Orchestration system includes packs of custom activities you can use to automate typical IT and business processes in your network.
Use an activity pack -- The Packs tab of the Workflow Editor contains any activity packs downloaded from the ServiceNow Store and any activity packs that you create.
Active Directory activity pack -- The Active Directory (AD) activity pack enables an administrator to create, delete, and manage objects in Windows Active Directory, such as users, groups, and computers, using a ServiceNow Orchestration workflow.
Change AD User Password activity -- The Change AD User Password activity changes the password for an Active Directory user account.
Create AD Object activity -- The Create AD Object activity creates an object in Windows Active Directory.
Disable AD User Account activity -- The Disable AD User Account activity disables a Windows Active Directory user account, making it inactive.
Enable AD User Account activity -- The Enable AD User Account activity enables a Windows Active Directory user account, making it active.
Is AD Account Locked activity -- The Is AD Account Locked activity determines whether an Active Directory user account is locked.
Query AD activity -- The Query AD activity retrieves entries from the Windows Active Directory based on an LDAP search filter and stores the results as a JSON string that can be used in the data bus.
Remove AD Object activity -- The Remove AD Object activity deletes an object from Windows Active Directory.
Reset AD User Password activity -- The Reset AD User Password activity resets the password of a user account in Windows Active Directory.
Unlock AD Account activity -- The Unlock AD Account activity unlocks a locked Active Directory user account.
Update AD Object activity -- The Update AD Object activity updates an object in Windows Active Directory.
Azure AD activity pack -- The Azure AD activity pack enables an administrator to automate employee onboarding and offboarding functions on Azure AD and manage Office 365 licensing.
Create Address List activity -- The Create Address List activity creates a new address list that acts as an alias for emailing all users in the group.
Delete Address List activity -- The Delete Address List activity removes an existing address list from an Exchange server.
Get Address List activity -- The Get AddressList activity retrieves all attributes from the specified Exchange address list.
Move Address List activity -- The Move Address List activity moves a Microsoft Exchange address list to another location in the address hierarchy.
Set Address List activity -- The Set Address List activity modifies a Microsoft Exchange address list.
Update Address List activity -- The Update Address List activity adds or removes users from the specified address list and immediately applies any cached address list changes to the server.
Create Mailbox activity -- The Create Mailbox activity creates a new Active Directory user, if that user does not already exist, and a Microsoft Exchange mailbox for that user.
Delete Mailbox activity -- The Delete Mailbox activity deletes the Microsoft Exchange mailbox of an Active Directory user.
Disable Mailbox activity -- The Disable Mailbox activity disables the mailbox associated with a specified Active Directory account.
Enable Mailbox activity -- The Enable Mailbox activity creates a new mailbox for an existing Active Directory user.
Get Mailbox activity -- The Get Mailbox activity gets the mailbox for the specified user or all mailboxes on a Microsoft Exchange server.
Set Mailbox activity -- The Set Mailbox activity modifies the settings of an existing Microsoft Exchange mailbox.
F5 Network Management activity pack -- Orchestration provides custom activities for configuring elements of an F5 load balancer, including pools, pool members, and the virtual servers contained in the pool.
Modify F5 Virtual Server activity -- The Modify F5 Virtual Server activity configures a virtual server assigned to an F5 load balancer pool with irules and a vlan.
Infoblox workflows -- The Infobox DDI activity pack includes two default workflows, one that reserves and registers IP addresses and another that releases IP addresses.
Infoblox roles and permissions -- Define the roles and permissions that the Infoblox activities need to access the various resources on the Infoblox server.
Infoblox DHCP activities -- The Infoblox DHCP activities manage the IP addresses reserved for DHCP in your network.
PowerShell activity pack -- PowerShell is built on the Windows .NET Framework and is designed to control and automate the administration of Windows machines and applications.
PowerShell activity designer -- PowerShell activities are configured to return data to a workflow from a host using Microsoft PowerShell.
PowerShell protocols and troubleshooting -- PowerShell uses the Windows Management Instrumentation (WMI) and Windows Remote Management (WinRM) protocols to enable Orchestration activities to run commands on remote Windows hosts.
MID Server PowerShell files -- PowerShell functions are stored in script files (.ps1) that use a PowerShell Script module (.psm1) file name extension.
PowerShell troubleshooting -- Authentication and access denied errors can prevent PowerShell activities from running a command on a target host.
Change Service State activity -- The Change Service State activity starts or stops a Windows service on a remote system.
Restart Windows Server activity -- The Restart Windows Server activity stops and then restarts a Windows server using Powershell.
Uninstall Windows App activity -- The Uninstall Windows App activity uninstalls an application from a Windows target machine.
Probe activity pack -- Orchestration provides an activity pack customized using the ServiceNow activity designer that runs probes on target hosts to return specific information.
Resolve DNS Name activity -- Orchestration provides an activity pack customized using the ServiceNow activity designer that runs probes on target hosts to return specific information.
SNMP Query activity -- Orchestration provides an activity pack customized using the ServiceNow activity designer that runs probes on target hosts to return specific information.
SCCM activity pack -- The Microsoft System Center Configuration Management (SCCM) activity pack provides Orchestration activities you can use to manage software deployments and collections on an SCCM server.
Request SCCM activities -- The Orchestration - System Center Configuration Manager plugin installs the SCCM activity pack that deploys software from an SCCM host and manages user and device collections.
Configure the MID Server for SCCM activities -- To use a MID Server with Microsoft System Center Configuration Management (SCCM) activities, configure it to communicate with the SCCM server.
Add to Device Collection activity -- The Add to Device Collection activity adds the specified device into a Microsoft System Center Configuration Manager (SCCM) device collection.
Add to User Collection activity -- The Add to User Collection activity adds a user to a Microsoft System Center Configuration Manager (SCCM) user collection.
Get Applications activity -- The Get Applications activity returns a list of all the applications available on a Microsoft System Center Configuration Manager (SCCM) server.
Get Deployments activity -- The Get Deployments activity returns the list of deployments performed by Orchestration using a Microsoft System Center Configuration Manager (SCCM) server.
Get Device Collections activity -- The Get Device Collections activity returns the list of available device collections on a Microsoft System Center Configuration Manager (SCCM) host.
Get User Collections activity -- The Get User Collections activity returns the list of available user collections on a Microsoft System Center Configuration Manager (SCCM) server.
Remove from Device Collection activity -- The Remove from Device Collection activity removes a device from a Microsoft System Center Configuration Manager (SCCM) device collection.
Remove from User Collection activity -- The Remove from User Collection activity removes a user from a Microsoft System Center Configuration Manager (SCCM) user collection.
SFTP File Transfer activity pack -- Use the SFTP File Transfer activities to manage files and directories on an SFTP server and to move files from one SFTP server to another.
SFTP File Transfer workflow -- The SFTP File Transfer activity pack includes a scoped workflow that uses multiple activities to manage files on SFTP servers.
Copy File activity -- The Copy File activity copies a file from an SFTP server (source host) to another SFTP server (target host).
Create Directory activity -- The Create Directory activity creates a new directory on an SFTP server.
Get File List activity -- The Get File List activity returns a list of files from a given directory and its subdirectories on an SFTP server (source host).
Remove File or Directory activity -- The Remove File or Directory activity removes a file or a directory on an SFTP server, including subdirectories, when configured.
Rename File or Directory activity -- The Rename File or Directory activity renames a file or directory to a new name on an SFTP server.
Set File Attributes activity -- The Set File Attributes activity sets common file attributes, such as timestamps, size, permissions, and UID/GID, for a file or directory on an SFTP server.
SSH activity pack -- Orchestration provides an activity pack of SSH activities that were customized using the ServiceNow activity designer.
Secure Copy activity -- The Secure Copy activity copies a file from one host to another, without storing the copied file on the MID Server.
Files Compare activity -- The Files Compare activity compares two files on a Linux or UNIX computer.
File Read activity -- The File Read activity reads a file on a Linux or UNIX computer.
File Write activity -- The File Write activity writes a file on a Linux or UNIX computer.
File Copy activity -- The custom File Copy activity copies a file on a Linux or UNIX computer.
File Replace String activity -- The File Replace String activity finds and replaces a string in a file on a Linux or UNIX computer.
Global activities -- Global activities are Orchestration activities created in the global scope.
Test Server Alive activity -- Global activities are Orchestration activities created in the global scope.
Orchestration activity designer -- The Orchestration activity designer enables a user with either the workflow_admin or activity_creator and workflow_creator roles to construct reusable activities that suit an organization's business needs.
Using Connection and Credential Alias with Orchestration -- All application integrations in Orchestration require connection information, credentials, and connection and credential aliases to their respective applications to access resources.
Using credentials with Orchestration -- All application integrations in Orchestration require connection information, credentials, and connection and credential aliases to their respective applications to access resources.
Connections with Orchestration -- All application integrations in Orchestration require connection information, credentials, and connection and credential aliases to their respective applications to access resources.
Create an output variable -- The Outputs form in the designer contains a variable builder for creating data structures of objects and arrays.
Activity designer template outputs -- The Outputs form in the designer contains a variable builder for creating data structures of objects and arrays.
Map an output field -- The Outputs form in the designer contains a variable builder for creating data structures of objects and arrays.
Create a parsing rule -- Populate output variables defined in a custom activity with payload data returned from an inputs test on an external host or endpoint.
Activity designer parsing sources -- Populate output variables defined in a custom activity with payload data returned from an inputs test on an external host or endpoint.
Activity designer parsing rule example -- Populate output variables defined in a custom activity with payload data returned from an inputs test on an external host or endpoint.
Activity conditions -- Create the exit conditions for your activity in the Condition column and set the order for each..
Orchestration custom activity templates -- Orchestration provides customizable activity templates to create and manage custom activities in the Workflow Editor.
Create a JDBC activity -- Create a custom JDBC activity to automate SQL commands and stored procedure calls to relational databases from workflow.
Auto-map JDBC activity output variables -- Create a custom JDBC activity to automate SQL commands and stored procedure calls to relational databases from workflow.
JDBC stored procedure parameters -- Create a custom JDBC activity to automate SQL commands and stored procedure calls to relational databases from workflow.
Test JDBC activity template inputs -- Create a custom JDBC activity to automate SQL commands and stored procedure calls to relational databases from workflow.
Auto-map SOAP activity output variables -- The ServiceNow activity designer allows you to map parameter values in a SOAP test payload to variables in the Outputs stage automatically.
Configure the SOAP execution command -- Use the input variables you created to configure the command that Orchestration executes on the SOAP endpoint.
SOAP template execution parameters -- You use execution parameters to create the input process script in the Pre processing form of the activity designer.
Activity scoping -- Custom activities run in their own scope, even if it is different from that of the workflow.
Publish a custom activity -- When a user creates a custom activity and saves or submits it, that activity appears in the Custom and Packs tabs of the designer palette, but is visible only to the user who created it.
Return a locked activity to a published state -- When a user creates a custom activity and saves or submits it, that activity appears in the Custom and Packs tabs of the designer palette, but is visible only to the user who created it.
Copy a custom activity -- You can copy activities for reuse from the Custom tab in the global scope.
Orchestration databus -- The databus allows workflow designers to track the flow of data through an Orchestration workflow and provides access to output data that can be consumed by other custom activities.
Reuse data in the activity designer -- The databus allows workflow designers to track the flow of data through an Orchestration workflow and provides access to output data that can be consumed by other custom activities.
MID Servers for Orchestration -- Orchestration automatically selects an appropriate MID Server based on the capabilities that you configure in activities, the IP addresses of target devices, and the application that the MID Server is allowed to use.
MID Server capabilities -- MID Server capabilities define the specific functions of a MID Server within an IP address range.
Configure MID Server capabilities -- MID Server capabilities define the specific functions of a MID Server within an IP address range, allowing an application to select the most appropriate MID Server. Configure capabilities on MID Servers for applications like Orchestration, Cloud Management, and Service Mapping.
Use the Orchestration Usage dashboard -- This dashboard shows an overview of Orchestration usage metrics to show customers how their organization uses Orchestration and to support license compliance.
Task Communications Management -- Task Communications Management (TCM) provides a framework for defining and managing a communication process for any entity that extends the task table.
Task Communications Management process -- Task Communications Management helps you to streamline the process by creating designated communication plans for effective communication during an event. The communication plan, with its defined tasks, helps you to focus on resolving the current issue instead of deciding when to send a communication, what information to share, and whom to inform.
Activate Task Communications Management -- The Task Communications Management plugin (com.snc.task_communication_management) is activated when you activate the Incident Communications Management plugin (com.snc.iam) or the Incident Management - Major Incident Management plugin (com.snc.incident.mim). This plugin includes demo data and activates related plugins if they are not already active.
Working with Task Communications Management -- The section covers topics that help you with a variety of technical concepts related to Task Communications Management such as creating communication plan definition, task definition, channel definition, and contact definition.
Define a communication plan -- Define a communication plan for a task record to specify communication task and contact definitions. When specified conditions for the plan definition are met, the communication plan and its associated records are automatically attached to the task record, eliminating manual effort.
Define a communication task -- Define a communication task for a communication plan. When a plan gets attached to a table, the tasks related to the plan need to be executed to resolve the issue. You can associate multiple tasks with a communication plan.
Define a communication channel -- Define a communication channel for each communication task to determine which mode of communication to use for the task when a plan is attached to a table.
Define a communication contact -- Define the recipients of a particular plan to determine the target audience involved in each communication task and the responsibilities the recipients are expected to handle. A notification for a task is sent to all individuals specified for that task.
Define a recipient list for communication contact -- A recipient list lets you specify a filter to fetch a list of users. Use the recipient list as the contact for a particular communication plan.
Create a plan type -- Create the communication plan type and specify whether the plan type is applicable globally or to a particular table. When you create the communication plan type, it is referenced in the communication plan definition. The type of the communication plan helps you to filter the plan by its type, generate a report of a particular plan type, or create SLAs for any communication plan.
Create a task type -- Create the communication task type and specify whether the task is applicable to a particular table or is globally applicable. The communication task type helps you to filter a task by its type, generate a report of a particular task type, or create SLAs for any communication task.
Define contact responsibilities -- Define the different contacts or target audience involved in the communication process and their responsibility to understand the expectations from those contacts throughout the process.
View communication channel configuration -- View the configuration of different communication channels that are used to contact the target audience in the communication process. By default, the communication channels available are email, SMS, Slack, and conference.
Classic Workflow -- Workflow is a legacy application that provided a drag-and-drop interface for automating multi-step processes across the platform. Each workflow consists of a sequence of activities, such as generating records, notifying users of pending approvals, or running scripts. The graphical Workflow Editor represents workflows visually as a type of flowchart. It shows activities as boxes labeled with information about that activity and transitions from one activity to the next as lines connecting the boxes.
Getting started with workflows -- The graphical Workflow Editor provides a drag-and-drop interface for automating multi-step processes across the platform.
Workflow editor -- The Workflow Editor is an interface for creating and modifying workflows by arranging and connecting activities to drive processes.
Workflow palette -- The default workflow palette contains workflow activities and existing workflows you can use as subflows.
Workflow editor title bar -- When a workflow is opened in the canvas, the title bar displays the workflow title and the workflow status in italics. Possible states are Checked out by and Published.
Workflow editor keyboard navigation -- The platform includes accessibility features that makes the interface accessible to users with disabilities.
Workflow management -- Create, edit, validate, and publish workflows to automate multi-step processes across the platform. Understand workflow activities and variables and how to use them effectively. Take a deeper look at how workflows are constructed, validated, and used.
Create a workflow -- Automate a multi-step process by creating a workflow with the Workflow Editor.
Workflow properties -- In the properties of a workflow, you can configure settings such as its application scope, start conditions, schedule, inputs, stages, and run time metrics. You can also view information such as the workflow author, version, and history.
Create a workflow from a table -- Automate a multi-step process by creating a workflow from the list view of any table that supports workflows.
Ending workflows with multiple branches -- A workflow is complete when it reaches the End activity, even if there are still active branches of the workflow in progress. To ensure that both branches are completed, add a Join activity to resolve the branches.
Work on workflows -- To complete a workflow, you add workflow activities, validate the workflow, and publish it.
Add a workflow activity -- To complete a workflow, you add workflow activities, validate the workflow, and publish it.
Validate a workflow -- To complete a workflow, you add workflow activities, validate the workflow, and publish it.
Publish a workflow -- To complete a workflow, you add workflow activities, validate the workflow, and publish it.
Prepare a subflow -- Review the process of preparing a subflow for use in a parent workflow, and for preparing the parent workflow to use a subflow.
Prepare a workflow to use a subflow -- Review the process of preparing a subflow for use in a parent workflow, and for preparing the parent workflow to use a subflow.
Current variables -- Within workflow there are several different types of variables that are available.
Workflow catalog variables -- Workflows that are associated with the Requested Item [sc_req_item] table have a specific type of workflow input.
Declaration -- Workflows that are associated with the Requested Item [sc_req_item] table have a specific type of workflow input.
Global variable declaration option 2 -- Workflows that are associated with the Requested Item [sc_req_item] table have a specific type of workflow input.
Translate workflow stages -- You can add default stages to use for a table, and stages to existing workflow
Workflow stage sets -- Stage sets are named groups of workflow stages commonly used together. Create a stage set and assign it as a default set to any number of tables. You can import the choice list values of a workflow field as stages for a workflow, and export a stage set to create a new one.
Create a new stage set -- Stage sets are named groups of workflow stages commonly used together. Create a stage set and assign it as a default set to any number of tables. You can import the choice list values of a workflow field as stages for a workflow, and export a stage set to create a new one.
Use a default stage set -- Stage sets are named groups of workflow stages commonly used together. Create a stage set and assign it as a default set to any number of tables. You can import the choice list values of a workflow field as stages for a workflow, and export a stage set to create a new one.
Import stages from a choice list -- Stage sets are named groups of workflow stages commonly used together. Create a stage set and assign it as a default set to any number of tables. You can import the choice list values of a workflow field as stages for a workflow, and export a stage set to create a new one.
Export a stage set from a workflow -- Stage sets are named groups of workflow stages commonly used together. Create a stage set and assign it as a default set to any number of tables. You can import the choice list values of a workflow field as stages for a workflow, and export a stage set to create a new one.
Add a stage set to a workflow -- Stage sets are named groups of workflow stages commonly used together. Create a stage set and assign it as a default set to any number of tables. You can import the choice list values of a workflow field as stages for a workflow, and export a stage set to create a new one.
Create a workflow stage field -- Workflows can provide a summary of workflow progress by updating any field of the Workflow type. If the field is a workflow field, it displays an icon to indicate the workflow stage progress.
Select a stage field -- A Stage field allows the workflow context to show additional workflow information, such as the stage name and the estimated completion time for an activity.
Display approvers in workflow stage fields -- Enable workflow stage fields to display approvers, change the number of approvers to display, or disable displaying approvers.
Workflow validation -- Workflow validation examines different characteristics of a workflow to locate issues that might prevent the workflow from being published or cause it to fail. The validation report summarizes the results of each separate workflow validation.
Workflow validator -- ServiceNow offers several workflow validators for workflow designers to test their workflows.
ValidateTransitionOut -- The ValidateTransitionOut validator finds activity conditions with no exit transitions.
ValidateTransitionIn -- The ValidateTransitionIn validator finds activities that do not have inbound transitions and cannot execute in the workflow.
ValidateDanglingTransition -- The ValidateDanglingTransition validator finds and reports any transitions that do not terminate on an activity.
ValidateSubflows -- The ValidateSubflows validator detects any workflows included as subflows that are either inactive, deleted, or not available as a published workflow for the current user.
ValidateScriptForCurrentDotUpdate -- The ValidateScriptForCurrentDotUpdate validator finds workflow activities with scripts that use the current.update() function.
ValidateLowestCommonTable -- The ValidateLowestCommonTable validator reports the lowest table in the Glide hierarchy that the workflow uses.
ValidateTableChange -- The ValidateTableChange validator reports any activities in the workflow that are invalid given the table associated with the workflow version.
ValidateParentFlow -- The ValidateParentFlow validator reports any workflows that use the workflow as a subflow.
ValidateSingleEnd -- The ValidateSingleEnd validator finds and identifies multiple End activities in a single workflow.
ValidateUpdateSetDependencies -- The ValidateUpdateSetDependencies validator identifies all the subflows called in the current workflow and determines if any of those subflows are being edited in a different (in progress) update set.
ValidateUpdateSetParentDependencies -- The ValidateUpdateSetParentDependencies validator identifies all the workflows that call the current workflow as a subflow and determines if any of those parent workflows are being edited in a different update set that is in progress.
ValidateInputVarUpdateSetDependencies -- The ValidateInputVarUpdateSetDependencies validator examines update sets to ensure that workflow input variables for a given workflow have not been deleted in different update sets than those currently In progress.
ValidateWorkflowEndStages -- The ValidateWorkflowEndStages validator checks that in workflows with stages, the end activity of the workflow has a stage named Complete or Completed.
ValidateWorkflowStageColumn -- The ValidateWorkflowStageColumn validator detects and reports when the stage field (stage column) for a workflow is not correct or is unusable.
ValidateWorkflowStateValues -- The ValidateWorkflowStateValues validator checks a number of stage aspects in workflow activities for correctness.
Workflow concepts -- You can do many things using the Workflow Editor.
Workflow versions -- To prevent users from making changes to a workflow that affect other users of the system, workflows must be checked out before they can be edited.
Workflow scope -- Workflow application scope determines the access that an application has to the information in a workflow, specifically to the data contained in the activities in that workflow.
Workflow scope restrictions -- Workflow application scope determines the access that an application has to the information in a workflow, specifically to the data contained in the activities in that workflow.
Domain separation and Workflow -- Domain separation is supported in the Workflow application. Domain separation enables you to separate data, processes, and administrative tasks into logical groupings called domains. You can control several aspects of this separation, including which users can see and access data.
Workflows and delegated administration -- Domain separation is supported in the Workflow application. Domain separation enables you to separate data, processes, and administrative tasks into logical groupings called domains. You can control several aspects of this separation, including which users can see and access data.
Workflow permissions -- Domain separation is supported in the Workflow application. Domain separation enables you to separate data, processes, and administrative tasks into logical groupings called domains. You can control several aspects of this separation, including which users can see and access data.
Workflows and data separation -- Data separation restricts workflow contexts to users who are either in the same domain of the workflow or are members of a parent domain.
Workflow engine operation order -- The workflow engine runs in a predefined order relative to business rules and database operations. It caches commonly-used published workflows to improve performance.
Workflow caching -- The workflow engine runs in a predefined order relative to business rules and database operations. It caches commonly-used published workflows to improve performance.
Workflow tables -- For full flexibility, workflows store information over a number of different tables.
Workflow roles -- Certain roles are required to use workflows.
Administering workflow contexts -- The workflow context performs the activities and transitions defined in the workflow with the new record as current.
Cancel a workflow -- Canceling a workflow stops the workflow from executing and sets the workflow context State to Canceled. To cancel an executing workflow, you can use the cancelContext(context) script. You can define an onCancel script to clean up unresolved workflow activities.
Cancel a workflow with the cancelContext(context) script -- Canceling a workflow stops the workflow from executing and sets the workflow context State to Canceled. To cancel an executing workflow, you can use the cancelContext(context) script. You can define an onCancel script to clean up unresolved workflow activities.
Define an on-cancel script -- Canceling a workflow stops the workflow from executing and sets the workflow context State to Canceled. To cancel an executing workflow, you can use the cancelContext(context) script. You can define an onCancel script to clean up unresolved workflow activities.
Scheduling a workflow -- In addition to being run based on conditions, workflows can also be scheduled to perform at a particular time, similar to a scheduled job.
Workflow movement with update sets -- The system tracks workflows in update sets differently than other records because workflow information is stored across multiple tables.
Input variable removal -- Deleting workflow input variables, like insert and update actions, creates a customer update record in a user's current update set.
Input variable removal risk -- Deleting workflow input variables, like insert and update actions, creates a customer update record in a user's current update set.
Input variable removal solution -- Deleting workflow input variables, like insert and update actions, creates a customer update record in a user's current update set.
Input variable removal prevention -- Deleting workflow input variables, like insert and update actions, creates a customer update record in a user's current update set.
Avoiding duplicate workflows -- Update sets manage the published state of all versions of a workflow prior to committing the workflow version on a local instance.
Commit a workflow in an update set -- Update sets manage the published state of all versions of a workflow prior to committing the workflow version on a local instance.
Update set migration example -- Update sets manage the published state of all versions of a workflow prior to committing the workflow version on a local instance.
Update set migration risk -- Update sets manage the published state of all versions of a workflow prior to committing the workflow version on a local instance.
Workflow timelines -- The system provides a timeline view of history activities associated with a workflow context.
Use a timeline -- The system provides a timeline view of history activities associated with a workflow context.
Timeline for a selected activity -- The system provides a timeline view of history activities associated with a workflow context.
Workflow error handling -- The personalized JavaScript that users create in workflow activity variables is vulnerable to run-time syntax errors. Available error information is available in a tooltip when you point to a workflow activity in an error state.
Workflow error tracking features -- Error handling provides visual cues within the workflow, such as error descriptions for activities in pop-ups, and detailed log records.
Create an error condition exit -- An administrator can reroute the workflow when a script error occurs by creating an error condition exit for specific activities within the workflow. This allows the workflow to process script errors in a predictable way and not create undesirable results.
Workflow run time metrics -- You can enable the collection of workflow run time metrics to determine whether workflows are performing as expected or consuming additional resources.
Enable workflow run time metrics -- You can enable the collection of workflow run time metrics to determine whether workflows are performing as expected or consuming additional resources.
Outlying workflow run times -- You can enable the collection of workflow run time metrics to determine whether workflows are performing as expected or consuming additional resources.
Workflow estimated run time updates -- You can enable the collection of workflow run time metrics to determine whether workflows are performing as expected or consuming additional resources.
Workflow pause utility -- Workflow Pause Utility provides functionality you can use to pause or resume all workflow contexts, a subset of qualified workflow contexts, or individual workflow contexts. You designate the data and time of day at which the paused workflows should resume, and can manually resume individual workflows as needed.
Request workflow pause utility -- You can request the Workflow Pause Utility plugin (com.glideapp.workflow.pause) if you have the admin role. This plugin may include demo data and activates related plugins if they are not already active.
Pause and resume individual workflows -- Pause individual workflow contexts. Specify the date and time of day at which the workflow context should resume.
Pause and resume all or multiple workflows -- Use Workflow Pause Group Requests to pause, or resume, groups of workflows, or all active workflows. If pausing a group of workflows, use filtering functions to select the workflows. If pausing all active workflows, select the Pause All check box to indicate that all currently active workflows should be paused.
Encrypted workflow scratchpad -- The Encrypted Workflow Scratchpad plugin (com.snc.encrypted.scratchpad) provides encrypted scratchpad support for workflow context and workflow executing activities.
Request encrypted workflow scratchpad activation -- The Encrypted Workflow Scratchpad plugin (com.snc.encrypted.scratchpad) provides encrypted scratchpad support for workflow context and workflow executing activities.
Troubleshoot workflows -- Troubleshooting tools for workflows enable administrators to isolate execution paths, compare contexts, and track incomplete activities.
Execution path troubleshooting in timelines -- Troubleshooting tools for workflows enable administrators to isolate execution paths, compare contexts, and track incomplete activities.
Execution history table -- Troubleshooting tools for workflows enable administrators to isolate execution paths, compare contexts, and track incomplete activities.
Use the Workflow Operations Dashboard -- On the Workflow Operations Dashboard, view and add widgets to help you monitor workflows. Review the performance of workflows and determine which workflows must be improved.
Workflow gauges -- On the Workflow Operations Dashboard, view and add widgets to help you monitor workflows. Review the performance of workflows and determine which workflows must be improved.
Workflow performance timing -- The workflow engine can generate detailed performance timing data that is useful for troubleshooting slow workflows.
Workflow estimated run time properties -- The workflow engine can generate detailed performance timing data that is useful for troubleshooting slow workflows.
Enable workflow performance timing -- The workflow engine can generate detailed performance timing data that is useful for troubleshooting slow workflows.
Approval Coordinator workflow activity -- The Approval Coordinator activity creates an approval whose outcome depends on the outcome of one or more child activities, including one or more Approval - User, Approval - Group, and/or Manual Approval activities.
Generate workflow activity -- The Generate activity immediately creates task or approval records from any task or approval activities placed after the Generate activity in the workflow path. These pre-generated tasks and approvals start when the task and approval activities are reached during flow execution. This allows a task to have a set of associated pre-generated sequential tasks or approvals, but still require them to be completed in order.
Manual Approvals workflow activity -- The Manual Approvals activity watches and manages any approvals that users add manually outside of the workflow process. This activity only selects approvals that are in the Not requested state.
Rollback To workflow activity -- The Rollback To activity transitions directly to the activity specified by the outgoing transition line arrow.
Rollback To behavior -- The Rollback To activity transitions directly to the activity specified by the outgoing transition line arrow.
Rollback To activity -- The Rollback To activity transitions directly to the activity specified by the outgoing transition line arrow.
Condition Workflow activities -- Condition activities provide conditional branching and logical operation functionality for workflows.
If workflow activity -- The If activity checks a condition or script to determine if a Yes or No transition should be taken.
Switch workflow activity -- The Switch activity checks if the value of a passed field or variable is equivalent to one of several case values.
Wait for condition workflow activity -- The Wait for condition activity causes the workflow to wait at this activity until the current record matches the specified condition.
Wait for WF Event workflow activity -- The Wait for WF Event activity causes the workflow to wait at this activity until the specified event is fired.
REST Message legacy workflow activity -- The legacy REST Message activity enables an administrator to override the REST endpoint or supply the variables configured in the REST Message module.
Return Value workflow activity -- The Return Value activity returns a value to a parent workflow, when run from a subflow.
Run Script workflow activity -- The Run Script activity runs the specified script in the scope of the workflow version.
Set Values workflow activity -- The Set Values activity sets values on the current record when the workflow quiesces or ends.
SOAP Message legacy workflow activity -- The legacy SOAP Message activity uses SOAP messages defined in the System Web Services plugin and can call the messages using a MID Server.
Turnstile workflow activity -- The Turnstile activity limits how many times a workflow can pass through the same point.
Unlock workflow activity -- The Unlock activity releases a lock that was previously placed by the Lock activity.
Parallel Flow Launcher example -- This example shows how to use the Parallel Flow Launcheractivity with an array of input values and with a WorkflowCoordinator object.
Using workflow approval activities and rolling back workflows -- When you work with approvals, you need to understand how approval activities interact with approval engines, how to correct a skipped approval workflow activity, and how rollbacks work.
Approval workflow activities and approval engines -- When you work with approvals, you need to understand how approval activities interact with approval engines, how to correct a skipped approval workflow activity, and how rollbacks work.
Correct a skipped workflow approval activity -- When you work with approvals, you need to understand how approval activities interact with approval engines, how to correct a skipped approval workflow activity, and how rollbacks work.
Publish a custom workflow activity -- When a user creates a custom activity and saves or submits it, that activity appears in the Custom and Packs tabs of the designer palette, but is only visible to the user who created it.
Workflow activity pinning -- Workflow administrators can pin a custom activity to prevent the system from automatically updating that activity when a new version is downloaded from the ServiceNow Store.
RaptorDB -- RaptorDB, the new ServiceNow database, optimizes ServiceNow AI Platform workloads, enabling your organization to support more users, workflows, and data on a single platform.
ATF Test Generator and Cloud Runner -- ATF Test Generator and Cloud Runner is a tool that enables you to leverage ServiceNow’s ability to intelligently generate regression tests for a specific instance.
Exploring ATF Test Generator and Cloud Runner -- Use the ATF Test Generator and Cloud Runner application to generate tests depending on the instance behavior and workflows. You can also execute the generated tests using the Cloud Runner option.
Generating the tests -- Generate tests automatically by leveraging ServiceNow Test Generation and Cloud Runner application. You can also run these tests with the click of a button.
Tests generation for flow and flow logic -- Use the ATF Test Generator and Cloud Runner store application to auto-generate tests that drive a ServiceNow flow for Service Catalog.
Using ATF Test Generator and Cloud Runner -- Use the ATF Test Generator and Cloud Runner store application to execute the generated tests using the Cloud Runner option. You can also schedule test execution and nightly runs to completely automate test execution.
Scheduling test execution -- Use schedules and nightly runs to execute tests and test suites in ServiceNow’s cloud infrastructure allowing you to fully automate ATF test executions.
Log entries in the BOQ form -- Debug errors or track any critical transactions during the execution of the test suites, setting up the Cloud Runner or generating the tests by viewing the log entries in the BOQ form.
System Administrator [admin] -- The admin role is required to access and use the ATF Test Generator and Cloud Runner store application.
HTTP Response Headers -- A response header is a simple name-value pair used in an HTTP response to provide additional information about page content or how the client should process it.
Configure -- Configure standard name-value pairs for HTTP response headers. You designate if the configuration applies to all pages, or to specific types (Service Portal, UI Page, or UX application record).
Configuration for advanced users -- Configure standard name-value pairs for HTTP response headers. You designate if the configuration applies to all pages, or to specific types (Service Portal, UI Page, or UX application record).
Response templates -- Resolve cases or support issues faster and more efficiently with response templates. Response templates (formerly known as templated snippets) are reusable messages that can be copied to case or task forms to provide quick and consistent messages to users, or to display standard chat response messages to requesters in Agent Chat.
Activate -- You can activate response templates (formerly known as templated snippets) [com.sn_templated_snip] if you have the admin role. This plugin includes demo data and activates related plugins if they are not already active.
Components installed with response templates -- Several types of components are installed with activation of the Templated Responses (com.sn_templated_snip) plugin, including tables and user roles.
Create a response template -- Create or modify a response template (formerly known as a templated snippet) to define a reusable message that can be copied to case or task forms or used in Agent Chat sessions to provide quick and consistent messages to users.
Policy as Code Engine (PaCE) -- You can administrate the full life cycle of policies using PaCE in applications by searching, reviewing, and updating existing policies, and creating policies as required. Policies in the applications are powered by PaCE.
Understanding PaCE -- PaCE enables you to manage, administer, and audit policies from a centralized location.
Key user personas and roles -- This section describes different user personas and roles in PaCE. These personas are defined with the application where PaCE is being used.
PaCE life cycle -- This checklist lists the tasks involved in administering PaCE policies.
Administer PaCE policies -- Use PaCE to manage the life cycle of a policy and create, update, review, and execute policies.
Manage PaCE policies -- You can define and manage your PaCE policies in a single management console.
View PaCE policies -- You can view a list of all PaCE policies created by you and other policy administrators. The PaCE management console is your gateway to viewing and updating policies, and managing policy versions.
Create PaCE policy -- Create a PaCE policy to determine if changes to a software service or application comply with a set of pre-defined rules.
Activate or deactivate PaCE policy -- You can activate or deactivate any PaCE policy. Only activated policies can validate object (tables and document IDs) changes. Deactivated policies are not executed, even if the policy is mapped. Deactivating a policy enables you to place the policy into a maintenance-like mode.
Edit PaCE policy -- You can update any existing PaCE policies, whether they are activated or deactivated.
Delete -- You can delete a PaCE policy at any time. All related versions for that policy are also deleted. However, for auditing reasons you cannot delete policies that were or are currently in use.
Map PaCE policies -- For a policy to be invoked correctly, it must be mapped to an object (table or document ID). The defined mapping settings are automatically verified when the policy is invoked.
Define mapping inputs -- You can map a policy to any number of objects. When you map a policy, validate the inputs, and execute the policy, a compliant, non-compliant, or compliant-exception decision is returned.
Edit mapping inputs -- You can edit the mapping settings that map a policy to an object.
PaCE mapping -- Static Mapping enables you to map a set of policies to a record or object such as an incident or deployable. Dynamic Mapping enables you to map a set of policies on a dynamic set of records or objects such as a set of incidents or a set of deployables.
Manage PaCE policy versions -- PaCE policy versions contain the actual policy script, as well as API Variable and Config Parameter definitions used for validating policies. Each policy can have many versions, each of which can be easily managed.
PaCE version states -- A PaCE policy version can be in one of four states: Draft, Current, Archived, and Now-Content. The policy version state also defines the version numbering.
Policy logic fields -- Policy logic is a set of conditions that is used for determining whether a policy is compliant or non-compliant. You can use the condition builder to specify conditions for the policy.
Create copy of an existing PaCE policy version -- You can create a copy of an existing policy version. All the settings and mappings from the existing version are copied over to the new one.
Duplicate PaCE policy versions -- You can create a duplicate policy from a policy version or multiple versions from two or more policy versions. If you want to use a locked policy, you must first create a duplicate version and then modify the policy version as required.
Edit PaCE policy script -- Edit the PaCE policy script to apply any changes to the policy logic.
Publish -- You can publish a policy version at any time. When the policy is published, a compliant, non-compliant, or compliant-exception decision is made for objects (tables or document IDs) mapped to the policy.
Edit draft policy version -- You can edit a Draft PaCE policy version at any time. The Draft version can be published to become the Current version. You can also create multiple different Draft versions from different Archived versions.
Edit archived PaCE policy version -- To edit a Current (published) or Archived PaCE policy version, you must create a copy of that version, which can then be updated as required.
Compare PaCE policy versions -- You can compare two versions of a PaCE policy, whatever their state. Any differences between the two selected versions are highlighted for quick analysis.
Delete PaCE policy version -- You can delete a policy version at any time. However, only versions that have never been published can be deleted. Published versions are stored for auditing purposes.
Passing parameters to PaCE policies -- Parameters can be passed to a PaCE policy to validate updates to an object (tables and document IDs). These variables apply to authoring in both low-code or JavaScript. Policy versions include three types of parameter inputs: API Variables, Config Parameters, and Record References.
Create new variables for policy -- Create an API Variable, Config Parameter, or Record Reference for the policy version in the Define Variables section of the Policy Builder.
Data type descriptions -- The following is a list of the most common data types for creating a variable.
Create data collector -- Create a data collector for a policy version in the Define Variables section of the Policy Builder.
Test data collectors -- Test a data collector for a policy version in the Test Playground.
Add data collectors -- After testing the activated data collectors, add them to a policy in the Policy Builder.
Add nested policies -- Add existing policies to a policy's conditions to define the order a policy's execution and the conditions is executed.
Use Test Playground -- The Test Playground enables you to test updates to a PaCE policy at any time, without the need to test or evaluate them in a Production environment.
Test updates -- Use the Test Playground to test updates to a PaCE policy script. You can evaluate changes to the policy script in real time, enabling you to determine if the changes that are applied render the policy compliant or non-compliant.
Review output decision -- After evaluating any changes made to the PaCE policy script, you can review the execution output and compliance decision reached. You can review this output immediately after evaluating any policy script changes.
Review execution log -- After evaluating any changes made to the PaCE policy script, you can review the execution log generated.
Execute policies -- Execute a policy to determine if the policy is compliant or non-compliant. Executions can be run as part of your policy evaluation process, or in real time when mapped to an object (table or document ID).I presume we should also mention invoking with the API? Do we want to tell the user how to do that exactly?
Review -- You can review the execution activity of any policy at any time. Recorded execution activity includes the time taken to execute, decisions of compliance, execution types, and the outcome of the execution.
Manage categories and tags -- Use categories and tags to manage and group your PaCE policies more efficiently. As the policy administrator, you can create and edit any number of categories and tags.
Manage PaCE categories -- Use the Categories option to group your PaCE policies more efficiently. As the policy administrator, you can create and edit any number of categories.
Create -- Create PaCE policy categories to assign to a policy when creating or updating a policy. Categories enable you to categorize and manage policies more efficiently.
Edit or update -- Update categories for a PaCE policy as required. You can also update categories for Active policies.
View -- You can view the PaCE policies that have been assigned to a specific category. All the categories created, together with their associated policies, can be viewed in the All Categories table.
Manage PaCE tags -- Use tags to manage your PaCE policies more efficiently. As the policy administrator, you can create and edit any number of tags.
Add -- Add or create policy tags on-the-fly for any PaCE policy, including currently Active policies. Tags enable you to manage policies more efficiently.
Edit or remove -- Edit and remove tags from a PaCE policy as required. When editing a tag, you can also define who can view the tag.
View -- You can view the PaCE policies that have been assigned to a specific tag. All tags together with their associated policies can be viewed in the All Tags table.
Write and test policies -- This section provides guidelines on how to write and test PaCE policies.
Policy invocation API -- When a PaCE policy is invoked, the calling service passes the relevant object (tables and document IDs) that is being validated by providing the documentRecord object. A calling service is a service or product that uses the PaCE API. PaCE determines which policies must be executed by using the mapping table and the documentRecord.
Sample PaCE API -- The following is a sample invocation request when the PaCE API is executed.
PaCE API invocation parameters -- This table describes the properties that can be configured when the PaCE API is invoked. These properties can be set whenever the API is invoked or when you test a policy in the Test Playground.
Policy exceptions -- By integrating Policy as Code Engine with Integrated Risk Management and Policy and Compliance Management workspace, the Compliance administrator can manage an organization's overall compliance posture and provide a business and regulatory context for codified policies.
Enable -- Enable exceptions for a PaCE policy and associate it with a control objective in GRC.
Disable -- You can disable exceptions for a policy for which exceptions have been granted. When this option is selected, you can no longer request exceptions and control objectives can no longer be associated with the policy.
Request -- After a policy has been enabled and configured for exceptions, you can map a policy to a deployable and request an exception.
Withdraw -- If an exception is no longer required, you can withdraw a granted exception request for a policy.
Unblock a Password Reset user -- If a user is manually banned or is flagged as exceeding max attempts, the user can be blocked (not allowed to use the Password Reset application). You can unblock a blocked user.
Service instances (Application services) -- Understand service instances (application services), learn about different application service types and how multiple ServiceNow business units and products use them.
View the change history of application services in classic Service Mapping -- You can view the changes made to an application service as a whole and to the individual configuration items (CIs) comprising the service. Change history is useful for maintenance, planning, or troubleshooting procedures.
Compare two versions of an application service in classic Service Mapping -- You can see a summary of application service changes at a glance by comparing two versions of an application service. This feature is useful for checking the application service status before and after a certain change or problem.
Create or modify map indicators -- Dependency Views maps and application service maps, use icons to display additional information for a CI by displaying its related records such as alerts, outages, incidents and problems. These icons are called map indicator.